ABB Relion 620 Series Technical Manual Download Page 17

Page: 17 / 1224

8.3.3

Functionality........................................................................................................................ 976

8.3.4

Operation principle.............................................................................................................976

8.3.5

Application........................................................................................................................... 979

8.3.6

Signals.................................................................................................................................. 980

8.3.7

Settings.................................................................................................................................981

8.3.8

Monitored data....................................................................................................................981

8.3.9

Technical data .....................................................................................................................981

8.3.10 Technical revision history..................................................................................................981

Control functions.................................................................................. 982

9.1

Circuit breaker control CBXCBR, Disconnector control DCXSWI and Earthing switch

control ESXSWI...............................................................................................................................982

9.1.1

Identification....................................................................................................................... 982

9.1.2

Function block..................................................................................................................... 982

9.1.3

Functionality........................................................................................................................ 983

9.1.4

Operation principle............................................................................................................ 983

9.1.5

Application........................................................................................................................... 987

9.1.6

Signals...................................................................................................................................988

9.1.7

Settings.................................................................................................................................991

9.1.8

Monitored data................................................................................................................... 993

9.1.9

Technical revision history..................................................................................................993

9.2

Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI and earthing switch indication ESSXSWI......... 994

9.2.1

Identification....................................................................................................................... 994

9.2.2

Function block.....................................................................................................................994

9.2.3

Functionality........................................................................................................................995

9.2.4

Operation principle............................................................................................................ 995

9.2.5

Application........................................................................................................................... 995

9.2.6

Signals...................................................................................................................................995

9.2.7

Settings.................................................................................................................................997

9.2.8

Monitored data....................................................................................................................997

9.2.9

Technical revision history................................................................................................. 998

9.3

Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN.............................................................................. 998

9.3.1

Identification....................................................................................................................... 998

9.3.2

Function block.....................................................................................................................998

9.3.3

Functionality........................................................................................................................999

9.3.4

Operation principle............................................................................................................ 999

9.3.5

Application.........................................................................................................................1006

9.3.6

Signals.................................................................................................................................1008

9.3.7

Settings.............................................................................................................................. 1009

9.3.8

Monitored data..................................................................................................................1010

9.3.9

Technical data ................................................................................................................... 1011

9.4

Autoreclosing DARREC..................................................................................................................... 1011

9.4.1

Identification...................................................................................................................... 1011

9.4.2

Function block....................................................................................................................1012

Contents

620 series

Technical Manual

Summary of Contents for Relion 620 Series

Page 1: ... RELION PROTECTION AND CONTROL 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 2: ......

Page 4: ...ibed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used copied or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license Trademarks ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Warranty Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your n...

Page 5: ...cted and communicate data and information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the necessary measures such as but not limited to installation of firewalls application of authentication measures encryption of data inst...

Page 6: ...ent Safety Regulations 2016 The Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations 2012 These conformities are the result of tests conducted by the third party testing in accordance with the product standard EN BS EN 60255 26 for the EMC directive regulation and with the product standards EN BS EN 60255 1 and EN BS EN 60255 27 for the low volt...

Page 7: ...on 36 2 2 Local HMI 37 2 2 1 Display 37 2 2 2 LEDs 38 2 2 3 Keypad 38 2 3 Web HMI 40 2 4 Authorization 41 2 4 1 Audit trail 42 2 5 Communication 44 2 5 1 Self healing Ethernet ring 45 2 5 2 Ethernet redundancy 45 2 5 3 Process bus 47 2 5 4 Secure communication 49 3 Basic functions 50 3 1 General parameters 50 3 1 1 Analog input settings phase currents 50 3 1 2 Analog input settings residual curren...

Page 8: ...tion control 83 3 3 1 Function block 83 3 3 2 Functionality 83 3 4 Programmable LEDs 83 3 4 1 Function block 83 3 4 2 Functionality 84 3 4 3 Signals 86 3 4 4 Settings 87 3 4 5 Monitored data 89 3 5 Time synchronization 90 3 5 1 Time master supervision GNRLLTMS 90 3 6 Parameter setting groups 92 3 6 1 Function block 92 3 6 2 Functionality 92 3 7 Test mode 94 3 7 1 Function blocks 94 3 7 2 Functiona...

Page 9: ...GOOSERCV_BIN function block 140 3 15 2 GOOSERCV_DP function block 140 3 15 3 GOOSERCV_MV function block 141 3 15 4 GOOSERCV_INT8 function block 142 3 15 5 GOOSERCV_INTL function block 142 3 15 6 GOOSERCV_CMV function block 143 3 15 7 GOOSERCV_ENUM function block 144 3 15 8 GOOSERCV_INT32 function block 144 3 16 Type conversion function blocks 145 3 16 1 QTY_GOOD function block 145 3 16 2 QTY_BAD f...

Page 10: ...otection 239 4 1 1 Three phase non directional overcurrent protection PHxPTOC 239 4 1 2 Three independent phase non directional overcurrent protection PH3xPTOC 256 4 1 3 Three phase directional overcurrent protection DPHxPDOC 273 4 1 4 Directional three independent phase directional overcurrent protection DPH3xPDOC 298 4 1 5 Three phase voltage dependent overcurrent protection PHPVOC 327 4 1 6 Thr...

Page 11: ... 623 4 5 Voltage protection 630 4 5 1 Three phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 630 4 5 2 Single phase overvoltage protection PHAPTOV 637 4 5 3 Three phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 645 4 5 4 Single phase undervoltage protection PHAPTUV 653 4 5 5 Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV 660 4 5 6 Negative sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV 664 4 5 7 Positive sequence undervoltage protectio...

Page 12: ...plication 771 4 11 6 Signals 771 4 11 7 Settings 771 4 11 8 Monitored data 772 4 11 9 Technical data 772 4 12 Capacitor bank protection 772 4 12 1 Three phase overload protection for shunt capacitor banks COLPTOC 772 4 12 2 Current unbalance protection for capacitor banks CUBPTOC 782 4 12 3 Shunt capacitor bank switching resonance protection current based SRCPTOC794 5 Protection related functions ...

Page 13: ...y 819 5 4 High impedance fault detection PHIZ 819 5 4 1 Identification 819 5 4 2 Function block 820 5 4 3 Functionality 820 5 4 4 Operation principle 820 5 4 5 Application 822 5 4 6 Signals 823 5 4 7 Settings 823 5 4 8 Monitored data 825 5 4 9 Technical revision history 825 5 5 Emergency start up ESMGAPC 825 5 5 1 Identification 825 5 5 2 Function block 825 5 5 3 Functionality 826 5 5 4 Operation ...

Page 14: ...n start up UPCALH 862 5 8 1 Identification 862 5 8 2 Function block 863 5 8 3 Functionality 863 5 8 4 Operation principle 863 5 8 5 Application 864 5 8 6 Signals 864 5 8 7 Settings 864 5 8 8 Technical data 865 6 Supervision functions 866 6 1 Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 866 6 1 1 Identification 866 6 1 2 Function block 866 6 1 3 Functionality 866 6 1 4 Operation principle 866 6 1 5 Application...

Page 15: ...ion 891 6 4 2 Function block 891 6 4 3 Functionality 891 6 4 4 Operation principle 891 6 4 5 Measuring modes 893 6 4 6 Application 893 6 4 7 Signals 895 6 4 8 Settings 895 6 4 9 Monitored data 897 6 4 10 Technical data 897 6 4 11 Technical revision history 898 6 5 Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC 898 6 5 1 Identification 898 6 5 2 Function block 898 6 5 3 Functionality 898 6 5 4 Operation principl...

Page 16: ...rement function applications 934 8 1 4 Three phase current measurement CMMXU 934 8 1 5 Three phase voltage measurement VMMXU 939 8 1 6 Single phase voltage measurement VAMMXU 944 8 1 7 Residual current measurement RESCMMXU 946 8 1 8 Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU 948 8 1 9 Frequency measurement FMMXU 951 8 1 10 Sequence current measurement CSMSQI 953 8 1 11 Sequence voltage measurement VSMS...

Page 17: ...nical revision history 993 9 2 Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI and earthing switch indication ESSXSWI 994 9 2 1 Identification 994 9 2 2 Function block 994 9 2 3 Functionality 995 9 2 4 Operation principle 995 9 2 5 Application 995 9 2 6 Signals 995 9 2 7 Settings 997 9 2 8 Monitored data 997 9 2 9 Technical revision history 998 9 3 Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN 998 9 3 1 Identi...

Page 18: ...ion history 1081 10 Power quality measurement functions 1082 10 1 Current total demand distortion CMHAI 1082 10 1 1 Identification 1082 10 1 2 Function block 1082 10 1 3 Functionality 1082 10 1 4 Operation principle 1082 10 1 5 Application 1083 10 1 6 Signals 1084 10 1 7 Settings 1084 10 1 8 Monitored data 1085 10 2 Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI 1085 10 2 1 Identification 1085 10 2 2 Fun...

Page 19: ...nite minimum time characteristics 1122 11 2 1 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection 1122 11 2 2 Reset in inverse time modes 1143 11 2 3 Inverse timer freezing 1153 11 3 Voltage based inverse definite minimum time characteristics 1153 11 3 1 IDMT curves for overvoltage protection 1153 11 3 2 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection 1160 11 4 Frequency measurement and protection 1164 11 5 Measuremen...

Page 20: ...nction X100 PO3 and PO4 1200 14 10 Signal trip output with high make and carry and with TCS function 1201 14 11 Single pole power output relays X100 PO1 and PO2 1202 14 12 High speed output HSO 1203 14 13 Ethernet interfaces 1204 14 14 Serial rear interface 1205 14 15 Fiber optic communication link 1206 14 16 IRIG B 1207 14 17 Lens sensor and optical fiber for arc protection 1208 14 18 Degree of p...

Page 21: ...normal service 1 2 Intended audience This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel who use technical data during engineering installation and commissioning and in normal service The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems protection equipment protection functions and the configured functional logic in the protection relays The inst...

Page 22: ...cumentation set Figure 1 The intended use of documents during the product life cycle Product series and product specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Web site www abb com relion Introduction 1MRS757644 H 22 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 23: ...es version E 2016 09 27 2 0 FP1 Content updated F 2019 06 19 2 0 FP1 Content updated G 2021 12 21 2 0 FP1 Content updated H 2022 02 04 2 0 FP1 Content fixed Download the latest documents from the ABB Web sitehttp www abb com substationautomation 1 3 3 Related documentation Product series and product specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Web site http www abb com substationautomation 1MRS...

Page 24: ...aged equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death Therefore comply fully with all warning and caution notices 1 4 2 Document conventions A particular convention may not be used in this manual Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary The glossary also contains definitions of important terms Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structu...

Page 25: ...When the function starts the START output is set to TRUE This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is Advanced 1MRS757644 H Introduction 620 series Technical Manual 25 ...

Page 26: ...n low stage DPHLPDOC1 3I 1 67 1 1 DPHLPDOC2 3I 2 67 1 2 Three phase direc tional overcurrent protection high stage DPHHPDOC1 3I 1 67 2 1 DPHHPDOC2 3I 2 67 2 2 Three phase voltage dependent overcur rent protection PHPVOC1 3I U 1 51V 1 PHPVOC2 3I U 2 51V 2 Non directional earth fault protec tion low stage EFLPTOC1 Io 1 51N 1 1 EFLPTOC2 Io 2 51N 1 2 Non directional earth fault protec tion high stage ...

Page 27: ...I1 1 46PD 1 Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV1 Uo 1 59G 1 ROVPTOV2 Uo 2 59G 2 ROVPTOV3 Uo 3 59G 3 Three phase under voltage protection PHPTUV1 3U 1 27 1 PHPTUV2 3U 2 27 2 PHPTUV3 3U 3 27 3 PHPTUV4 3U 4 27 4 Single phase under voltage protection secondary side PHAPTUV1 U_A 1 27_A 1 Three phase overvolt age protection PHPTOV1 3U 1 59 1 PHPTOV2 3U 2 59 2 PHPTOV3 3U 3 59 3 Single phase over volt...

Page 28: ...ervi sion LOFLPTUC1 3I 1 37 1 LOFLPTUC2 3I 2 37 2 Motor load jam pro tection JAMPTOC1 Ist 1 51LR 1 Motor start up super vision STTPMSU1 Is2t n 1 49 66 48 51LR 1 Phase reversal pro tection PREVPTOC1 I2 1 46R 1 Thermal overload protection for motors MPTTR1 3Ith M 1 49M 1 Stabilized and instan taneous differential protection for ma chines MPDIF1 3dl M G 1 87M G 1 High impedance flux balance based dif...

Page 29: ...C3 ARC 3 50L 50NL 3 High impedance fault detection PHIZ1 HIF 1 HIZ 1 Load shedding and restoration LSHDPFRQ1 UFLS R 1 81LSH 1 LSHDPFRQ2 UFLS R 2 81LSH 2 LSHDPFRQ3 UFLS R 3 81LSH 3 LSHDPFRQ4 UFLS R 4 81LSH 4 LSHDPFRQ5 UFLS R 5 81LSH 5 LSHDPFRQ6 UFLS R 6 81LSH 6 Multipurpose protec tion MAPGAPC1 MAP 1 MAP 1 MAPGAPC2 MAP 2 MAP 2 MAPGAPC3 MAP 3 MAP 3 MAPGAPC4 MAP 4 MAP 4 MAPGAPC5 MAP 5 MAP 5 MAPGAPC6 ...

Page 30: ...U RT 1 27RT 1 LVRTPTUV2 U RT 2 27RT 2 LVRTPTUV3 U RT 3 27RT 3 Rotor earth fault pro tection MREFPTOC1 Io R 1 64R 1 High impedance dif ferential protection for phase A HIAPDIF1 dHi_A 1 87A 1 High impedance dif ferential protection for phase B HIBPDIF1 dHi_B 1 87B 1 High impedance dif ferential protection for phase C HICPDIF1 dHi_C 1 87C 1 Circuit breaker uncor responding position start up UPCALH1 C...

Page 31: ...k switching resonance protection current based SRCPTOC1 TD 1 55TD 1 Control Circuit breaker con trol CBXCBR1 I O CB 1 I O CB 1 CBXCBR2 I O CB 2 I O CB 2 CBXCBR3 I O CB 3 I O CB 3 Disconnector control DCXSWI1 I O DCC 1 I O DCC 1 DCXSWI2 I O DCC 2 I O DCC 2 DCXSWI3 I O DCC 3 I O DCC 3 DCXSWI4 I O DCC 4 I O DCC 4 Earthing switch con trol ESXSWI1 I O ESC 1 I O ESC 1 ESXSWI2 I O ESC 2 I O ESC 2 ESXSWI3...

Page 32: ...2 MCS 3I 2 Current transform er supervision for high impedance pro tection scheme for phase A HZCCASPVC1 MCS I_A 1 MCS I_A 1 Current transform er supervision for high impedance pro tection scheme for phase B HZCCBSPVC1 MCS I_B 1 MCS I_B 1 Current transform er supervision for high impedance pro tection scheme for phase C HZCCCSPVC1 MCS I_C 1 MCS I_C 1 Advanced current cir cuit supervision for trans...

Page 33: ...OADPROF 1 Frequency measure ment FMMXU1 f 1 f 1 Fault location Fault locator SCEFRFLO1 FLOC 1 21FL 1 Power quality Current total demand distortion CMHAI1 PQM3I 1 PQM3I 1 Voltage total harmon ic distortion VMHAI1 PQM3U 1 PQM3V 1 Voltage variation PHQVVR1 PQMU 1 PQMV 1 Voltage unbalance VSQVUB1 PQUUB 1 PQVUB 1 Other Minimum pulse timer 2 pcs TPGAPC1 TP 1 TP 1 TPGAPC2 TP 2 TP 2 TPGAPC3 TP 3 TP 3 TPGA...

Page 34: ...VI4 2 MVI4GAPC3 MVI4 3 MVI4 3 MVI4GAPC4 MVI4 4 MVI4 4 Analog value scaling SCA4GAPC1 SCA4 1 SCA4 1 SCA4GAPC2 SCA4 2 SCA4 2 SCA4GAPC3 SCA4 3 SCA4 3 SCA4GAPC4 SCA4 4 SCA4 4 Generic control point 16 pcs SPCGAPC1 SPC 1 SPC 1 SPCGAPC2 SPC 2 SPC 2 SPCGAPC3 SPC 3 SPC 3 Remote generic con trol points SPCRGAPC1 SPCR 1 SPCR 1 Local generic control points SPCLGAPC1 SPCL 1 SPCL 1 Generic up down counters UDFC...

Page 35: ...NT 11 UDCNT 11 UDFCNT12 UDCNT 12 UDCNT 12 Programmable but tons 16 buttons FKEYGGIO1 FKEY 1 FKEY 1 Logging functions Disturbance recorder RDRE1 DR 1 DFR 1 Fault recorder FLTRFRC1 FAULTREC 1 FAULTREC 1 Sequence event re corder SER1 SER 1 SER 1 1MRS757644 H Introduction 620 series Technical Manual 35 ...

Page 36: ...port a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850 with GOOSE messaging IEC 61850 9 2 LE IEC 60870 5 103 Modbus and DNP3 2 1 1 Product series version history Product series version Product series history 2 0 New products REF620 with configurations A and B REM620 with configuration A RET620 with configuration A 2 0 FP1 New configuration REM620 B Platform enhancements IEC 61850 Edition 2 Su...

Page 37: ...tons LED indicators and communication port Earth fault protection Voltage protection Frequency protection Ph unbalance or thermal ov Synchronism OK Breaker failure protection CB condition monitoring Supervision Autoreclose in progress Arc detected Overcurrent protection SG1 Enabled SG2 Enabled SG3 Enabled SG4 Enabled SG5 Enabled SG6 Enabled DR Trigger Trip Lockout Reset CB Block Bypass AR Disable ...

Page 38: ...LEDs on front of the LHMI The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI WHMI or PCM600 2 2 3 Keypad The LHMI keypad contains push buttons which are used to navigate in different views or menus With the push buttons you can give open or close commands to objects in the primary circuit for example a circuit breaker a contactor or a disconnector The push ...

Page 39: ...ed LEDs The buttons and LEDs are freely programmable and they can be configured both for operation and acknowledgement purposes That way it is possible to get acknowledgements of the executed actions associated with the buttons This combination can be useful for example for quickly selecting or changing a setting group selecting or operating equipment indicating field contact status or indicating ...

Page 40: ... Web server is forced to take a secured HTTPS connection to WHMI using TLS encryption The WHMI is verified with Internet Explorer 8 0 9 0 10 0 and 11 0 WHMI is disabled by default Control operations are not allowed by WHMI WHMI offers several functions Programmable LEDs and event lists System supervision Parameter settings Measurement display Disturbance records Fault records Load profile record P...

Page 41: ...s and default passwords The default passwords in the protection relay delivered from the factory can be changed with Administrator user rights If the relay specific Administrator password is forgotten ABB can provide a one time reliable key to access the protection relay For support contact ABB The recovery of the Administrator password takes a few days User authorization is disabled by default fo...

Page 42: ...the reconstruction and examination of the sequence of system and security related events and changes in the protection relay Both audit trail events and process related events can be examined and analyzed in a consistent method with the help of Event List in LHMI and WHMI and Event Viewer in PCM600 The protection relay stores 2048 audit trail events to the nonvolatile audit trail Additionally 1024...

Page 43: ...t overflow Too many audit events in the time period Violation remote Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850 8 1 MMS WHMI FTP or LHMI Violation local Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850 8 1 MMS WHMI FTP or LHMI PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events and process related events Audit trail events are visible through dedicated Security events view Since only the admini...

Page 44: ...settings disturbance recordings and fault records can be accessed using the IEC 61850 protocol Disturbance recordings are available to any Ethernet based application in the IEC 60255 24 standard COMTRADE file format The protection relay can send and receive binary signals from other devices so called horizontal communication using the IEC 61850 8 1 GOOSE profile where the highest performance class...

Page 45: ...The end links of the protection relay loop can be attached to the same external switch or to two adjacent external switches A self healing Ethernet ring requires a communication module with at least two Ethernet interfaces for all protection relays Managed Ethernet switch with RSTP support Managed Ethernet switch with RSTP support Client B Client A Network A Network B Figure 7 Self healing Etherne...

Page 46: ...o referred to as IEC 62439 3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439 3 Edition 2 The protection relay supports IEC 62439 3 2012 and it is not compatible with IEC 62439 3 2010 PRP Each PRP node called a double attached node with PRP DAN is attached to two independent LANs operated in parallel These parallel networks in PRP are called LAN A and LAN B The networks are completely separated to ensure failure independe...

Page 47: ...e frames it receives from one port to the other When the originating node receives a frame sent to itself it discards that to avoid loops therefore no ring protocol is needed Individually attached nodes SANs such as laptops and printers must be attached through a redundancy box that acts as a ring element For example a 615 or 620 series protection relay with HSR support can be used as a redundancy...

Page 48: ... IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization GOOSE SMV GOOSE SMV SMV GOOSE GOOSE SMV GOOSE SMV SMV GOOSE SMV GOOSE Figure 10 Process bus application of voltage sharing and synchrocheck The 620 series supports IEC 61850 process bus with sampled values of analog currents and voltages The measured values are transferred as sampled values using the IEC 61850 9 2 LE protocol which uses the same physical Ethernet...

Page 49: ...ement is a communication card with IEEE 1588 v2 support COM0031 COM0034 or COM0037 See the IEC 61850 engineering guide for detailed system requirements and configuration details 2 5 4 Secure communication The protection relay supports secure communication for WHMI and file transfer protocol If the Secure Communication parameter is activated protocols require TLS based encryption method support fro...

Page 50: ...plitude correction factor Amplitude Corr C 0 9000 1 1000 0 0001 1 0000 Phase C amplitude correction factor Nominal current 2 39 4000 A 1 1300 Network Nominal Current In Rated secondary Val 1 000 150 000 mV Hz 0 001 3 000 Rated Secondary Value RSV ratio Reverse polarity 0 False 1 True 0 False Reverse the polari ty of the phase CTs Angle Corr A 8 000 8 000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase A angle cor rection...

Page 51: ...0 440 000 kV 0 001 20 000 Primary rated volt age Secondary voltage 60 210 V 1 100 Secondary rated voltage VT connection 1 Wye 2 Delta 3 U12 4 UL1 2 Delta Voltage transducer measurement con nection Amplitude Corr A 0 9000 1 1000 0 0001 1 0000 Phase A Voltage phasor magnitude correction of an external voltage transformer Amplitude Corr B 0 9000 1 1000 0 0001 1 0000 Phase B Voltage phasor magnitude c...

Page 52: ...or rection of an exter nal voltage trans former 3 1 4 Analog input settings residual voltage Table 9 Analog input settings residual voltage Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Primary voltage 0 100 440 000 1 kV 0 001 11 547 Primary voltage Secondary voltage 60 210 V 1 100 Secondary voltage Amplitude Corr 0 9000 1 1000 0 0001 1 0000 Amplitude correc tion Angle correction 8 000 8 00...

Page 53: ...sword Remote engineer 0 Set password Remote adminis trator 0 Set password Authority logging 1 None 2 Configuration change 3 Setting group 4 Setting group control 5 Settings edit 6 All 4 Setting group control Authority logging level 1 Authorization override disabled LHMI password required 2 Authorization override enabled LHMI password not required 3 Authorization override disabled communication too...

Page 54: ...Description Threshold voltage 16 176 Vdc 2 16 Binary input threshold voltage Input osc level 2 50 events s 1 30 Binary input oscil lation suppression threshold Input osc hyst 2 50 events s 1 10 Binary input oscil lation suppression hysteresis Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 54 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 55: ...nary output signals in card location Xnnn Name Type Default Description Xnnn Pmm 1 3 BOOLEAN 0 False See the application manual for terminal connections 1 Xnnn Slot ID for example X100 X110 as applicable 2 m For example 1 2 depending on the serial number of the binary input in a particular BIO card 3 Pmm For example PO1 PO2 SO1 SO2 as applicable 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Ma...

Page 56: ...ss XX XX XX XX XX XX Mac address for front port 3 1 10 Ethernet rear port settings Table 16 Ethernet rear port settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description IP address 192 168 2 10 IP address for rear port s Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask for rear port s Default gateway 192 168 2 1 Default gateway for rear port s Mac address XX XX XX XX XX XX Mac address for rear port s 1 Xn...

Page 57: ...k OPERATE output 1 Freeze timer Behaviour for func tion BLOCK inputs Bay name 1 REx620 2 Bay name in system IDMT Sat point 10 50 I I 1 50 Overcurrent IDMT saturation point SMV Max Delay 0 1 90 1 58 ms 1 3 15 2 62 ms 2 4 40 3 67 ms 3 5 65 4 71 ms 4 6 90 5 75 ms 1 3 15 2 62 ms SMV Maximum al lowed delay 1 Used in the IED main menu header and as part of the disturbance recording identification 2 Depe...

Page 58: ...30 s 1 0 Autoscroll delay for Measurements view Setting visibility 1 Basic 2 Advanced 1 Basic Setting visibility for HMI 3 1 13 IEC 60870 5 103 settings Table 19 IEC 60870 5 103 settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 5 off Selects if this pro tocol instance is enabled or disabled Serial port 1 COM 1 2 COM 2 1 COM 1 COM port Address 1 255 1 1 Unit address...

Page 59: ...5 Standard frame 5 6 Private frame 6 7 Private frame 7 6 Private frame 6 Active Class2 Frame 1 Frame2InUse 1 Not in use 0 User frame 1 Standard frame 1 2 Standard frame 2 3 Standard frame 3 4 Standard frame 4 5 Standard frame 5 6 Private frame 6 7 Private frame 7 1 Not in use Active Class2 Frame 2 Frame3InUse 1 Not in use 0 User frame 1 Standard frame 1 2 Standard frame 2 3 Standard frame 3 4 Stan...

Page 60: ...w indication Class1OvBackOff 0 500 1 500 Backoff Range for Class1 buffer GI Optimize 0 Standard behav iour 1 Skip spontane ous 2 Only overflown 3 Combined 0 Standard behav iour Optimize GI traffic DR Notification 0 False 1 True 0 False Disturbance Re corder spontane ous indications en abled disabled Block Monitoring 0 Not in use 1 Discard events 2 Keep events 0 Not in use Blocking of Moni toring D...

Page 61: ...client expects nominal values from event reporting and data attribute reads this is the default for PCM600 3 For PCM600 use only When Unit mode is set to Primary the PCM600 client can force its session to Nominal by selecting Primary Nominal and thus parameterizing in native form The selection is not stored and is therefore effective only for one session This value has no effect if selected via th...

Page 62: ...d 2 even 2 even Parity for the serial connection Start delay 0 20 1 4 Start delay in char acter times for seri al connection End delay 0 20 1 4 End delay in char acter times for seri al connections CRC order 0 Hi Lo 1 Lo Hi 0 Hi Lo Selects between normal or swap ped byte order for checksum for seri al connection De fault Hi Lo Client IP 0 0 0 0 Sets the IP address of the client If set to zero conn...

Page 63: ... memory area ControlStructPWd 3 Password for con trol operations us ing Control Struct mechanism which is available on 4x memory area ControlStructPWd 4 Password for con trol operations us ing Control Struct mechanism which is available on 4x memory area ControlStructPWd 5 Password for con trol operations us ing Control Struct mechanism which is available on 4x memory area ControlStructPWd 6 Passw...

Page 64: ...ddress 1 Disable 2 Enable 2 Enable Support self address query function Need time interval 0 65535 min 1 30 Period to set IIN need time bit Time format 0 UTC 1 Local 1 Local UTC or local Coordinate with master CROB select timeout 1 65535 s 1 10 Control Relay Output Block select timeout Data link confirm 0 Never 1 Only Multiframe 2 Always 0 Never Data link confirm mode Data link confirm TO 100 65535...

Page 65: ...1 BI 2 2 BI status 1 1 BI 1 BI 2 BI with status Default Var Obj 02 1 1 BI event 2 2 BI event time 2 2 BI event time 1 BI event 2 BI event with time Default Var Obj 03 1 1 DBI 2 2 DBI status 1 1 DBI 1 DBI 2 DBI with status Default Var Obj 04 1 1 DBI event 2 2 DBI event time 2 2 DBI event time 1 DBI event 2 DBI event with time Default Var Obj 20 1 1 32bit Cnt 2 2 16bit Cnt 5 5 32bit Cnt no flag 6 6 ...

Page 66: ...I evt 7 7 float AI evt time 8 8 double AI evt time 7 7 float AI evt time 1 32 bit AI event 2 16 bit AI event 3 32 bit AI event with time 4 16 bit AI event with time 5 float AI event 6 dou ble AI event 7 float AI event with time 8 double AI event with time Default Var Obj 40 1 1 32bit AO 2 2 16bit AO 3 3 AO float 4 4 AO double 2 2 16bit AO 1 32 bit AO 2 16 bit AO 3 AO float 4 AO double Default Var ...

Page 67: ... 38400 9 57600 10 115200 6 9600 Baudrate for COM1 3 1 18 COM2 serial communication settings Table 24 COM2 serial communication settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Fiber mode 0 No fiber 2 Fiber optic 0 No fiber Fiber mode for COM2 Serial mode 1 RS485 2Wire 2 RS485 4Wire 3 RS232 no hand shake 4 RS232 with hand shake 1 RS485 2Wire Serial mode for COM2 CTS delay 0 60000 ms 1 ...

Page 68: ... as the relay scheme s ability to refrain from operating when not required The dependability is increased by letting the system operators know about the problem giving them a chance to take the necessary actions as soon as possible The security is increased by preventing the relay from making false decisions such as issuing false control commands There are two types of fault indications Internal f...

Page 69: ...ault disappears the green Ready LED stop flashing and the protection relay returns to the normal service state Internal Fault All ok event appears in the event list after succesfull recovery One possible cause for an internal fault situation is a so called soft error The soft error is a probabilistic phenomenon which is rare in a single device statistically not happening more often than once in a ...

Page 70: ... relay or if relay SW has just been updated redo it If recovered by restarting continue relay normal opera tion If not recovered by restarting or redoing SW update replace the relay most probably hardware failure in CPU module Internal Fault System error 2 Runtime error CPU internal fault Yes 2 Yes 3 No Restart the relay If recovered by restart ing continue relay normal operation If not recover by...

Page 71: ... covered by restarting continue relay normal operation If not recover by re starting exchange the hardware mod ule in slot X105 Fault in PO re lay s attached to X115 51 Runtime error Faul ty Power Output re lay s in card loca ted in slot X115 Yes 2 Yes 3 No Check wirings Restart the relay If re covered by restarting continue relay normal operation If not recover by re starting exchange the hardwar...

Page 72: ...kely Exchange the communication module in slot X000 In some rare cases also communication storm may cause this Detach the ether net communication cable s from the communication module and reboot the relay If not recover exchange the com munication module in slot X000 Internal Fault Conf error X100 63 Start up error Card in slot X100 is wrong type is miss ing does not be long to original con figura...

Page 73: ... faulty Yes 2 Yes 3 No Exchange the hardware module in slot X120 Internal Fault Card error X130 76 Card in slot X130 is faulty Yes 2 Yes 3 No Check the plug in unit connector pins in the card by detaching the plug in unit If pins are OK exchange the hardware module in slot X130 Internal Fault LHMI module 79 Runtime error LHMI LCD error The fault indication may not be seen on the LHMI during the fa...

Page 74: ...mes within a short time Yes 2 Yes 3 No Restart the relay If recovered by restart ing continue relay normal operation If not recover by restarting exchange the RTD hardware module in slot X110 Internal Fault RTD card er ror X130 96 Runtime error RTD card located in slot X130 may have per manent fault Tem porary error has oc curred too many times within a short time Yes 2 Yes 3 No Restart the relay ...

Page 75: ...et error 24 Error in the Data set s Warning Report cont error 25 Error in the Report control block s Warning GOOSE contr error 26 Error in the GOOSE control block s Warning SCL config error 27 Error in the SCL configuration file or the file is missing Warning Logic error 28 Too many connections in the configuration Warning SMT logic error 29 Error in the SMT connections Warning GOOSE input error 3...

Page 76: ... RTD card loca ted in slot X130 Warning RTD meas error X105 100 Measurement error in RTD card located in slot X105 Warning RTD meas error X110 104 Measurement error in RTD card located in slot X110 Warning RTD meas error X130 106 Measurement error in RTD card located in slot X130 For further information on warning indications see the operation manual 3 2 3 Fail safe principle for relay protection ...

Page 77: ...ncontrollably and to secure the emergency stop circuit functionality U TC1 Q0 AUX POWER A1 Control Control IRF ES TO F1 Figure 13 Motor feeder fail safe trip circuit principle example 1 A1 Protection relay ES Emergency stop Q0 Circuit breaker CB TO Protection relay trip output IRF Internal relay fault indication U CB undervoltage trip coil TC1 CB trip coil 1 DCS Distributed process control system ...

Page 78: ... In example 2 the fail safe approach aims at securing motor shutdown via an emergency switch and in case the control voltage disappears In case of internal relay fault the necessary actions must be initiated by the process operators or by the control system U TC1 Q0 AUX POWER A1 F1 Control Control ES IRF K1 K1 TO Figure 15 Motor feeder fail safe trip circuit principle example 3 A1 Protection relay...

Page 79: ... circuit principle example 4 J01 Feeder 1 panel J02 Feeder 2 panel ES Emergency stop Q0 Circuit breaker TO1 Relay trip output 1 TO2 Relay trip output 2 IRF Relay internal fault indication BI1 Relay binary input 1 U CB undervoltage trip coil TC1 CB trip coil 1 F1 Miniature circuit breaker In example 4 the fail safe approach aims at securing motor shutdown via an emergency switch and in case the con...

Page 80: ...eeder panels Q0 Circuit breaker CB TO Relay trip output SO Relay start output A1 Protection relay R1 Auxiliary relay TC CB trip coil F1 Miniature circuit breaker In example 1 the fail safe approach aims at securing circuit breaker tripping even if a relay fails The incomer panel relay indicates the start of selected protection functions This start signal is distributed to all load feeder panels If...

Page 81: ...breaker tripping even if a relay fails A relay in a panel measures also the adjacent panel s currents and voltages and receives the necessary primary device s position information In other words the relay in a panel functions as a backup relay for the adjacent panel This approach allows service continuation while the failed relay is waiting for spare parts or a complete replacement The backup prot...

Page 82: ...of protection functions TC2 Same principle as for TC1 Control Control A1 A1 TO1 A2 TO1 A2 TO2 A3 TO1 F1 Q0 TC1 A3 TO2 A1 TO2 AUX POWER A2 AUX POWER A3 AUX POWER Figure 20 Redundant protection fail safe principle example 4 Q0 Circuit breaker CB A1 Protection relay 1 A2 Protection relay 2 A3 Protection relay 3 TO Protection relay trip output TC1 CB trip coil 1 TC2 CB trip coil 2 F1 Miniature circuit...

Page 83: ...ay configuration LED indication control is preconfigured in a such way that all the protection function general start and operate signals are combined with this function available as output signals OUT_START and OUT_OPERATE These signals are always internally connected to Start and Trip LEDs LEDPTRC collects and combines phase information from different protection functions available as output sig...

Page 84: ...he color setting is common for all the LEDs It is controlled with the Alarm colour setting the default value being Red The OK input corresponds to the color that is available with the default value being Green Changing the Alarm colour setting to Green changes the color behavior of the OK inputs to red The ALARM input has a higher priority than the OK input Each LED is seen in the Application Conf...

Page 85: ...hedAck F S Programmable LED description LED 2 General Figure 24 Menu structure Alarm mode alternatives The ALARM input behavior can be selected with the alarm mode settings from the alternatives Follow S Follow F Latched S and LatchedAck F S The OK input behavior is always according to Follow S The alarm input latched modes can be cleared with the reset input in the application logic Figure 25 Sym...

Page 86: ...sappears if the signal is not present and gives a steady light if the signal is present Activating signal LED Acknow Figure 28 Operating sequence LatchedAck F S 3 4 3 Signals Table 28 Input signals Name Type Default Description OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 1 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 1 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 1 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 2 ALARM BO...

Page 87: ...LEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 8 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 8 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 9 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 9 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 9 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 10 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 10 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 10 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 11 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm...

Page 88: ...F S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 5 Description Programmable LEDs LED 5 Programmable LED description Alarm mode 0 Follow S 1 Follow F 2 Latched S 3 LatchedAck F S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 6 Description Programmable LEDs LED 6 Programmable LED description Alarm mode 0 Follow S 1 Follow F 2 Latched S 3 LatchedAck F S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 7 Descrip...

Page 89: ... 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 1 Programmable LED 2 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 2 Programmable LED 3 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 3 Programmable LED 4 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 4 Programmable LED 5 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 5 Programmable LED 6 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma b...

Page 90: ... time manually Other setting values activate a communication protocol that provides the time synchronization Only one synchronization method can be active at a time IEEE 1588 v2 and SNTP provide time master redundancy The protection relay supports SNTP IRIG B IEEE 1588 v2 DNP3 Modbus and IEC 60870 5 103 to update the real time clock IEEE 1588 v2 with GPS grandmaster clock provides the best accurac...

Page 91: ...TP server the relay tries to switch back to the primary server on every third SNTP request attempt If both the SNTP servers are offline event time stamps have the time invalid status The time is requested from the SNTP server every 60 seconds Supported SNTP versions are 3 and 4 IRIG B time synchronization requires the IRIG B format B004 B005 according to the 200 04 IRIG B standard Older IRIG B sta...

Page 92: ...ix setting groups Each setting group contains parameters categorized as group settings inside application functions The customer can change the active setting group at run time The active setting group can be changed by a parameter or via binary inputs depending on the mode selected with the Configuration Setting Group SG operation mode setting The default value of all inputs is FALSE which makes ...

Page 93: ...r to either Logic mode 1 or Logic mode 2 Thus it is recommended to select the preferred operation mode at the time of installation and commissioning and not change it throughout the protection relay s service Changing the SG operation mode setting from Logic mode 1 to Logic mode 2 or from Logic mode 2 to Logic mode 1 does not affect the setting group SG For example six setting groups can be contro...

Page 94: ... 7 Test mode 3 7 1 Function blocks Figure 31 Function blocks 3 7 2 Functionality The mode of all the logical nodes in the relay s IEC 61850 data model can be set with Test mode Test mode is selected through one common parameter via the WHMI path Tests IED test By default Test mode can only be set locally through LHMI Test mode is also available via IEC 61850 communication LD0 LLN0 Mod Basic functi...

Page 95: ...utputs need to be blocked from the protection the application configuration must be used to block these signals Blocking scheme needs to use BEH_BLK output of PROTECTION function block 3 7 4 Control mode The mode of all logical nodes located under CTRL logical device can be set with Control mode The Control mode parameter is available via the HMI or PCM600 path Configuration Control General By def...

Page 96: ...R L button or via Control function block in application configuration When using the Signal Monitoring tool to force online values the following conditions need to be met Remote force is set to All levels Test mode is enabled Control position of the relay is in remote position Table 38 Remote test mode Remote test mode 61850 8 1 MMS WHMI PCM600 Off No access No access Maintenance Command originato...

Page 97: ...or setting group SG_1_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active SG_2_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active SG_3_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active SG_4_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active SG_5_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active SG_6_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 6 is active BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 block sta tus BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 test sta tus FRQ_ADP_FAIL BOOLEAN Frequen...

Page 98: ... of the protection functions has been operated Start duration shows always values less than 100 The Fault recorded data Protection and Start duration is from the same protection function The Fault recorded data operate time shows the time of the actual fault period This value is the time difference between the activation of the internal start and operate signals The actual operate time also includ...

Page 99: ... Off On Trig mode 0 From all faults 1 From operate 2 From only start 0 From all faults Triggering mode Table 44 FLTRFRC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description A measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used meas urement mode phase currents and residual current 3 8 4 Monitored data Table 45 FLTRFRC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit...

Page 100: ...C1 18 EFLPTOC2 19 EFLPTOC3 22 EFHPTOC1 23 EFHPTOC2 24 EFHPTOC3 25 EFHPTOC4 30 EFIPTOC1 31 EFIPTOC2 32 EFIPTOC3 35 NSPTOC1 36 NSPTOC2 7 INTRPTEF1 5 STTPMSU1 3 JAMPTOC1 Protection function Table continues on the next page 1 When TRPPTRC is triggered by any signal which does not light up the START or TRIP LEDs Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 100 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 101: ...RQ2 61 FRPFRQ3 62 FRPFRQ4 63 FRPFRQ5 64 FRPFRQ6 65 LSHDPFRQ1 66 LSHDPFRQ2 67 LSHDPFRQ3 68 LSHDPFRQ4 69 LSHDPFRQ5 71 DPHLPDOC1 72 DPHLPDOC2 74 DPHHPDOC1 77 MAPGAPC1 78 MAPGAPC2 79 MAPGAPC3 85 MNSPTOC1 86 MNSPTOC2 88 LOFLPTUC1 90 TR2PTDF1 91 LNPLDF1 92 LREFPNDF1 94 MPDIF1 96 HREFPDIF1 Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 101 ...

Page 102: ...PSPTUV1 118 ARCSARC1 119 ARCSARC2 120 ARCSARC3 96 SPHIPTOC1 93 SPHLPTOC2 92 SPHLPTOC1 89 SPHHPTOC2 88 SPHHPTOC1 87 SPHPTUV4 86 SPHPTUV3 85 SPHPTUV2 84 SPHPTUV1 83 SPHPTOV4 82 SPHPTOV3 81 SPHPTOV2 80 SPHPTOV1 25 OEPVPH4 24 OEPVPH3 23 OEPVPH2 22 OEPVPH1 19 PSPTOV2 18 PSPTOV1 15 PREVPTOC1 Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 102 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 103: ...C2 103 ROVPTOV4 117 PSPTUV2 13 PHPTUC3 3 PHLPTOC3 10 PHHPTOC5 11 PHHPTOC6 28 EFHPTOC7 29 EFHPTOC8 107 PHPTOV4 111 PHPTUV4 114 NSPTOV3 115 NSPTOV4 30 PHDSTPDIS1 29 TR3PTDF1 28 HICPDIF1 27 HIBPDIF1 26 HIAPDIF1 32 LSHDPFRQ8 31 LSHDPFRQ7 70 LSHDPFRQ6 80 MAPGAPC4 81 MAPGAPC5 82 MAPGAPC6 83 MAPGAPC7 Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 103 ...

Page 104: ...APC1 37 HAEFPTOC1 35 WPWDE3 34 WPWDE2 33 WPWDE1 52 DEFLPDEF3 84 MAPGAPC8 93 LREFPNDF2 97 HREFPDIF2 117 XDEFLPDEF2 116 XDEFLPDEF1 115 SDPHLPDOC2 114 SDPHLPDOC1 113 XNSPTOC2 112 XNSPTOC1 111 XEFIPTOC2 110 XEFHPTOC4 109 XEFHPTOC3 108 XEFLPTOC3 107 XEFLPTOC2 66 DQPTUV1 65 VVSPPAM1 64 PHPVOC1 63 H3EFPSEF1 60 HCUBPTOC1 59 CUBPTOC1 72 DOPPDPR1 69 DUPPDPR1 61 COLPTOC1 106 MAPGAPC16 105 MAPGAPC15 104 MAPGA...

Page 105: ... 0 00 3000 00 pu Distance to fault meas ured in pu Fault resistance FLOAT32 0 00 1000000 00 ohm Fault resistance Active group INT32 1 6 Active setting group Shot pointer INT32 1 7 Autoreclosing shot pointer value Max diff current IL1 FLOAT32 0 000 80 000 pu Maximum phase A dif ferential current Max diff current IL2 FLOAT32 0 000 80 000 pu Maximum phase B dif ferential current Max diff current IL3 ...

Page 106: ...00 50 000 xIn Negative sequence cur rent Max current IL1B FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Maximum phase A cur rent b Max current IL2B FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Maximum phase B cur rent b Max current IL3B FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Maximum phase C cur rent b Max current IoB FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Maximum residual cur rent b Current IL1B FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Phase A current b Current IL2B FLOAT32 0 000 ...

Page 107: ...2 0 000 4 000 xUn Phase B to phase C volt age b Voltage U31B FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Phase C to phase A volt age b Voltage UoB FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Residual voltage b Voltage Zro SeqB FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Zero sequence voltage b Voltage Ps SeqB FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Positive sequence volt age b Voltage Ng SeqB FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Negative sequence volt age b PTTR thermal level FLOAT32 ...

Page 108: ... and trip LEDs statuses Trip circuit lockout Counter values 3 10 Sensor inputs for currents and voltages This chapter gives short examples on how to define the correct parameters for sensor measurement interfaces Sensors can have correction factors measured and verified by the sensor manufacturer to increase the measurement accuracy Correction factors are recommended to be set to the relay Two typ...

Page 109: ...also works as a 150 A 0 28125 V at 50 Hz sensor When defining another primary value for the sensor also the nominal voltage has to be redefined to maintain the same transformation ratio However the setting in the protection relay Rated Secondary Value is not in V but in mV Hz which makes the same setting Rated Secondary Value valid for both 50 and 60 Hz nominal frequency RSV I I K f n pr r n Equat...

Page 110: ...1250 A 30 000 46 875 mV Hz 60 40 In 1250 2500 A 46 875 93 750 mV Hz 40 20 In 2500 4000 A 93 750 150 000 mV Hz 20 12 5 In Table 47 shows the upper limits of the linear measurement range based on a certain range in application nominal current The linear measurement limit for a given application nominal current can be derived from the values stated in the table with a simple proportion equation For e...

Page 111: ...y voltage For the voltage sensor all parameters are readable directly from its rating plate and or sensor routine test protocol and conversions are not needed Figure 34 Example of ABB voltage sensor KEVA 17 5 B21 rating plate In this example the system phase to phase voltage rating is 10 kV Thus the Primary voltage parameter is set to 10 kV For protection relays with sensor measurement support the...

Page 112: ...filtering At the beginning the input signal is at the high state the short low state is filtered and no input state change is detected The low state starting from the time t 0 exceeds the filter time which means that the change in the input state is detected and the time tag attached to the input change is t 0 The high state starting from t 1 is detected and the time tag t 1 is attached Each binar...

Page 113: ...ds on the condition before blocking The binary input is regarded as non oscillating if the number of valid state changes during one second is less than the set oscillation level value minus the set oscillation hysteresis value Note that the oscillation hysteresis must be set lower than the oscillation level to enable the input to be restored from oscillation When the input returns to a non oscilla...

Page 114: ... can also require wiring a separate trip relay contact back to the protection relay for breaker failure protection function All contacts are freely programmable except the internal fault output IRF 3 12 1 Power output contacts Power output contacts are normally used for energizing the breaker closing coil and trip coil external high burden lockout or trip relays 3 12 1 1 Dual single pole power out...

Page 115: ...O3 PO4 TCS1 TCS2 X100 16 24 21 23 20 22 17 15 19 18 Figure 37 Double pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision Power outputs PO3 and PO4 are included in the power supply module located in slot X100 of the protection relay 3 12 1 3 Dual single pole signal trip output contact SO3 The dual parallel connected single pole normally open form A output contact SO3 has a continuous ratin...

Page 116: ...otection or breaker failure protection where fast operation is required either to minimize fault effects to the equipment or to avoid a fault to expand to a larger area With the high speed outputs the total time from the application to the relay output contact activation is 5 6 ms shorter than when using output contacts with conventional mechanical output relays The high speed power outputs have a...

Page 117: ...and carry rating of 30 A for 0 5 seconds This can be applied for energizing breaker close coil and tripping coil Due to the limited breaking capacity a breaker auxiliary contact can be required to break the circuit When the application requires high making and breaking duty it is possible to use HSO contacts in the protection relay or an external interposing auxiliary relay 3 12 2 1 Internal fault...

Page 118: ...ncluded in the RTD0002 module 9 10 11 12 13 14 X130 SO1 SO2 Figure 42 Signal output in RTD0002 3 12 2 4 Signal outputs SO1 SO2 SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005 The optional card BIO0005 provides the signal outputs SO1 SO2 SO3 and SO4 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual parallel form C contacts SO3 is a single form C contact and SO4 is a single form A contact Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 118 620 series Techn...

Page 119: ...ransformer s tap changer position indication Each input has independent limit value supervision and deadband supervision functions including warning and alarm signals 3 13 2 Operation principle All the inputs of the module are independent RTD and mA channels with individual protection reference and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest...

Page 120: ...ngs are set to their maximum and minimum setting values When the channel is used for temperature sensor type set the Value unit setting to Degrees celsius When Value unit is set to Degrees celsius the linear scaling is not possible but the default range 40 200 C can be set smaller with the Value maximum and Value minimum settings When the channel is used for DC milliampere signal and the applicati...

Page 121: ...o 36 respectively Input maximum Input minimum Input mode 0 20mA 4 mA 20 mA Value minimum 36 AI_VAL Value maximum 36 Value unit Dimensionless X130 Input Figure 44 Milliampere input scaled to tap changer position information 3 13 2 4 Measurement chain supervision Each input contains a functionality to monitor the input measurement chain The circuitry monitors the RTD channels continuously and report...

Page 122: ...upervision function indicates whether the measured value of AI_INST exceeds or falls below the set limits All the measuring channels have an individual limit value supervision function The measured value contains the corresponding range information AI_RANGE and has a value in the range of 0 to 4 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low The range information changes and the new values are report...

Page 123: ...e of the range limit to allow the measurement slightly to exceed the limit value before it is considered out of range 3 13 2 8 Deadband supervision Each input has an independent deadband supervision The deadband supervision function reports the measured value according to integrated changes over a time period Figure 46 Integral deadband supervision The deadband value used in the integral calculati...

Page 124: ...us measurement modes the default values are set to the extremes thus it is very important to set correct limit values to suit the application before the deadband supervision works properly 3 13 2 9 RTD temperature vs resistance Table 56 Temperature vs resistance Temp C Platinum TCR 0 00385 Nickel TCR 0 00618 Copper TCR 0 00427 Pt 100 Pt 250 Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 250 Cu 10 40 84 27 210 675 79 1 94 92 19...

Page 125: ...ype and length Thus the wire resistance is automatically compensated In the 2 wire connection the lead resistance is not compensated This scheme may be adopted when the lead resistance is negligible when compared to the RTD resistance or when the error so introduced is acceptable for the application in which it is used 3 13 2 11 RTD mA card variants The available variants of RTD cards are 6RTD 2mA...

Page 126: ...sensors connected according to the 3 wire connection for 6RTD 2mA card Resistor sensor X110 mA mA1 mA mA2 RTD1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RTD2 RTD3 Figure 48 Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 2 wire connection for 6RTD 2mA card Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 126 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 127: ...ard has one milliampere input two inputs from RTD sensors and three signal outputs The Input 1 is assigned for current measurements inputs 2 and 3 are for RTD sensors and outputs 4 5 6 are used signal outputs RTD mA input connections The examples of 3 wire and 2 wire connections of resistance and temperature sensors to the 2RTD 1mA board are as shown Resistor sensor X130 mA mA RTD1 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 R...

Page 128: ...igure 52 mA wiring connection for RTD mA card 3 13 3 Signals Table 57 6RTD 2mA analog output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN General alarm WARNING BOOLEAN General warning AI_VAL1 FLOAT32 mA input Connectors 1 2 in stantaneous value AI_VAL2 FLOAT32 mA input Connectors 3 4 in stantaneous value Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 128 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 129: ... WARNING BOOLEAN General warning AI_VAL1 FLOAT32 mA input Connectors 1 2 in stantaneous value AI_VAL2 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 3 5 in stantaneous value AI_VAL3 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 6 8 instantaneous value 3 13 4 RTD input settings Table 59 RTD input settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Input mode 1 Not in use 2 Resistance 10 Pt100 11 Pt250 20 Ni100 21 Ni120 22 ...

Page 130: ...Default Description Input mode 1 Not in use 5 0 20mA 1 Not in use Analogue input mode Input maximum 0 20 mA 1 20 Maximum analogue input value for mA or resistance scaling Input minimum 0 20 mA 1 0 Minimum analogue input value for mA or resistance scaling Value unit 1 Dimension less 5 Ampere 23 Degrees cel sius 30 Ohm 1 Dimension less Selected unit for output value for mat Value maximum 10000 0 100...

Page 131: ... 3 high high 4 low low mA input Con nectors 3 4 range AI_DB3 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 RTD input Con nectors 5 6 11c reported value AI_RANGE3 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low RTD input Con nectors 5 6 11c range AI_DB4 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 RTD input Con nectors 7 8 11c reported value AI_RANGE4 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low RTD input Con nectors 7 8 11c range AI_D...

Page 132: ...high 4 low low RTD input Connectors 13 14 12c range AI_DB7 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 RTD input Connectors 15 16 12c repor ted value AI_RANGE7 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low RTD input Connectors 15 16 12c range AI_DB8 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 RTD input Connectors 17 18 12c repor ted value AI_RANGE8 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low RTD input Connectors 17 18 12c range ...

Page 133: ...RANGE3 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low RTD input Con nectors 6 8 range 3 14 SMV function blocks SMV function blocks are used in the process bus applications with the sending of the sampled values of analog currents and voltages and with the receiving of the sampled values of voltages 3 14 1 IEC 61850 9 2 LE sampled values sending SMVSENDER 3 14 1 1 Functionality The SMVSENDER func...

Page 134: ...he LHMI it can only be enabled from the LHMI When disabled the sending of the samples values is disabled 3 14 1 2 Settings Table 63 SMVSENDER Settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 134 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 135: ... 2 phase 2 voltage UL3 INT32 UL3 IEC61850 9 2 phase 3 voltage U0 INT32 Uo IEC61850 9 2 residual voltage 3 14 3 ULTVTR function block 3 14 3 1 Function block Figure 54 Function block 3 14 3 2 Functionality The ULTVTR function is used in the receiver application to perform the supervision for the sampled values and to connect the received analog phase voltage inputs to the application Synchronizatio...

Page 136: ...clude sampling processing and network delay The MINCB_OPEN input signal is supposed to be connected through a protection relay s binary input to the NC auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit The MINCB_OPEN signal sets the FUSEF_U output signal to block all the voltage related functions when MCB is in the open state The WARNING output in the receiver ...

Page 137: ...mplitude Corr C 0 9000 1 1000 0 0001 1 0000 Phase C Voltage phasor magnitude correction of an external voltage transformer Division ratio 1000 20000 1 10000 Voltage sensor divi sion ratio Voltage input type 1 Voltage trafo 3 CVD sensor 1 Voltage trafo Type of the voltage input Angle Corr A 8 000 8 000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase A Voltage phasor angle cor rection of an exter nal voltage trans former A...

Page 138: ... when two or more consecutive SMV frames are lost or late A single loss of frame is corrected with a zero order hold scheme In this case the effect on protection is considered negligible and the WARNING or ALARM outputs are not activated The output is held on for 10 seconds after the conditions return to normal The SMV Max Delay parameter defines how long the receiver waits for the SMV frames befo...

Page 139: ...ection factor 3 14 4 6 Monitored data Monitored data is available in three locations Monitoring I O status Analog inputs Monitoring IED status SMV traffic Monitoring IED status SMV accuracy 3 15 GOOSE function blocks GOOSE function blocks are used for connecting incoming GOOSE data to application They support BOOLEAN Dbpos Enum FLOAT32 INT8 and INT32 data types Common signals The VALID output indi...

Page 140: ...15 1 1 Function block Figure 56 Function block 3 15 1 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_BIN function is used to connect the GOOSE binary inputs to the application 3 15 1 3 Signals Table 71 GOOSERCV_BIN Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 15 2 GOOSERCV_DP function block 3 15 2 1 Function block Figure 57 Function block 3 15 2 2 Functionality The GO...

Page 141: ...ck 3 15 3 1 Function block Figure 58 Function block 3 15 3 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_MV function is used to connect the GOOSE measured value inputs to the application 3 15 3 3 Signals Table 73 GOOSERCV_MV Output signals Name Type Description OUT FLOAT32 Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 141 ...

Page 142: ...nal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 15 5 GOOSERCV_INTL function block 3 15 5 1 Function block Figure 60 Function block 3 15 5 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_INTL function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary input to the application and extracting single binary position signals from the double binary position signal The OP output signal indicates that the position is open Default value 0 is used...

Page 143: ... 1 Function block Figure 61 Function block 3 15 6 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_CMV function is used to connect GOOSE measured value inputs to the application The MAG_IN amplitude and ANG_IN angle inputs are defined in the GOOSE configuration PCM600 The MAG output passes the received GOOSE amplitude value for the application Default value 0 is used if VALID output indicates invalid status The ANG o...

Page 144: ...ion 3 15 7 3 Signals Table 77 GOOSERCV_ENUM Output signals Name Type Description OUT Enum Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 15 8 GOOSERCV_INT32 function block 3 15 8 1 Function block Figure 63 Function block 3 15 8 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_INT32 function block is used to connect GOOSE 32 bit integer inputs to the application Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 144 620 series Technical Manua...

Page 145: ... to any logic application signal logic function output binary input application function output or received GOOSE signal Due to application logic quality bit propagation each simple and even combined signal has quality which can be evaluated The OUT output indicates quality good of the input signal Input signals that have no quality bits set or only test bit is set will indicate quality good statu...

Page 146: ...al Due to application logic quality bit propagation each simple and even combined signal has quality which can be evaluated The OUT output indicates quality bad of the input signal Input signals that have any other than test bit set will indicate quality bad status 3 16 2 3 Signals Table 81 QTY_BAD Input signals Name Type Default Description IN Any 0 Input signal Table 82 QTY_BAD Output signals Na...

Page 147: ...nals Name Type Description COMMVALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 16 4 T_HEALTH function block 3 16 4 1 Function block Figure 67 Function block 3 16 4 2 Functionality The GOOSE data health function T_HEALTH evaluates enumerated data of Health data attribute This function block can only be used with GOOSE The IN input can be connected to GOOSERCV_ENUM function block which is receiving the LD0 LLN0 Healt...

Page 148: ...k 3 16 5 2 Functionality The T_F32_INT8 function is used to convert 32 bit floating type values to 8 bit integer type The rounding operation is included Output value saturates if the input value is below the minimum or above the maximum value 3 16 5 3 Signals Table 87 T_F32_INT8 Input signals Name Type Default Description F32 FLOAT32 0 0 Input signal Table 88 T_F32_INT8 Output signal Name Type Des...

Page 149: ...vice In case the GOOSERCV_ENUM function block does not receive the value from the sending device or it is invalid the default value 0 is used in function outputs The outputs FWD and REV are extracted from the enumerated input value 3 16 6 3 Signals Table 89 T_DIR Input signals Name Type Default Description DIR Enum 0 Input signal Table 90 T_DIR Output signals Name Type Default Description FWD BOOL...

Page 150: ...Enum 0 Input signal Table 93 T_TCMD output signals Name Type Description RAISE BOOLEAN Raise command LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command 3 16 8 T_TCMD_BIN function block 3 16 8 1 Function block Figure 71 Function block 3 16 8 2 Functionality The T_TCMD_BIN function is used to convert 32 bit integer input signal to Boolean output signals Table 94 Conversion from integer to Boolean IN RAISE LOWER 0 FALSE FA...

Page 151: ...OOLEAN Raise command LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command 3 16 9 T_BIN_TCMD function block 3 16 9 1 Function block Figure 72 Function block 3 16 9 2 Functionality The T_BIN_TCMD function is used to convert Boolean input signals to 32 bit integer output signals Table 97 Conversion from Boolean to integer RAISE LOWER OUT FALSE FALSE 0 FALSE TRUE 1 TRUE FALSE 2 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technica...

Page 152: ...LOWER BOOLEAN 0 Lower command Table 99 T_BIN_TCMD output signals Name Type Description OUT INT32 Output signal 3 17 Configurable logic blocks 3 17 1 Standard configurable logic blocks 3 17 1 1 OR function block Function block Figure 73 Function blocks Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 152 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 153: ...LEAN 0 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 B3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3 B4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4 B5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5 B6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6 Table 102 OR20 Input signals Name Type Default Description B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 B3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3 B4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4 B5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5 B6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6 B7 BOOLEAN ...

Page 154: ...e 103 OR Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Table 104 OR6 Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Table 105 OR20 Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 2 AND Function block Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 154 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 155: ...t disconnected AND has two inputs AND6 six inputs and AND20 twenty inputs Signals Table 106 AND Input signals Name Type Default Description B1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2 Table 107 AND6 Input signals Name Type Default Description B1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2 B3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3 B4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4 B5 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 5 B6 BO...

Page 156: ...Input signal 13 B14 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 14 B15 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 15 B16 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 16 B17 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 17 B18 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 18 B19 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 19 B20 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 20 Table 109 AND Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Table 110 AND6 Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Table 111 AND20 Output si...

Page 157: ...me Type Default Description B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 Table 113 XOR Output signals Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 4 NOT function block Function block Figure 76 Function block Functionality NOT is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables NOT inver...

Page 158: ...the maximum value from three analog values Disconnected inputs and inputs whose quality is bad are ignored If all inputs are disconnected or the quality is bad MAX3 output value is set to 2 21 Signals Table 116 MAX3 Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 1 IN2 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 2 IN3 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 3 Table 117 MAX3 Output signal Name Type Description OU...

Page 159: ...to 2 21 Signals Table 118 MIN3 Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 1 IN2 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 2 IN3 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 3 Table 119 MIN3 Output signal Name Type Description OUT FLOAT32 Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 7 R_TRIG function block Function block Figure 79 Function block Functionali...

Page 160: ...ny parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 8 F_TRIG function block Function block Figure 80 Function block Functionality F_TRIG is used as a falling edge detector The function detects the transition from TRUE to FALSE at the CLK input When the falling edge is detected the element assigns the Q output to TRUE At the next execution round the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the...

Page 161: ...ntermediate or faulty breaker position Table 124 Cross reference between circuit breaker position and the output of the function block Circuit breaker position Output of the function block T_POS_CL T_POS_OP T_POS_OK Intermediate 00 FALSE FALSE FALSE Close 01 TRUE FALSE TRUE Open 10 FALSE TRUE TRUE Faulty 11 TRUE TRUE FALSE Signals Table 125 T_POS_CL Input signals Name Type Default Description POS ...

Page 162: ...s available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 10 SWITCHR function block Function block Figure 82 Function block Functionality SWITCHR switching block for REAL data type is operated by the CTL_SW input selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs CTL_SW OUT FALSE IN2 TRUE IN1 Signals Table 131 SWITCHR Input signals Name Type Default Description CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch IN1 REAL 0 0 Rea...

Page 163: ...ts the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs Table 133 SWITCHI32 CTL_SW OUT FALSE IN2 TRUE IN1 Signals Table 134 SWITCHI32 Input signals Name Type Default Description CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch IN1 INT32 0 Input signal 1 IN2 INT32 0 Input signal 2 Table 135 SWITCHI32 Output signals Name Type Description OUT INT32 Output signal 3 17 1 12 SR function block Function block Figure 84 Fun...

Page 164: ...nput signals Name Type Default Description S BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q output when set R BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q output when set Table 138 SR Output signals Name Type Description Q BOOLEAN Q status NOTQ BOOLEAN NOTQ status 3 17 1 13 RS function block Function block Figure 85 Function block Functionality The RS flip flop output Q can be set or reset from the S or R inputs R input has a higher priority...

Page 165: ...t when set R BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q output when set Table 141 RS Output signals Name Type Description Q BOOLEAN Q status NOTQ BOOLEAN NOTQ status Technical revision history Table 142 RS Technical revision history Technical revision Change L The name of the function has been changed from SR to RS 3 17 2 Minimum pulse timer 3 17 2 1 Minimum pulse timer TPGAPC 1 Keep state no change 1MRS757644 H Ba...

Page 166: ...the same setting parameter Figure 87 A Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting B Trip pulse is longer than Pulse time setting Signals Table 143 TPGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 1 status IN2 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 2 status Table 144 TPGAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status Settings Table 14...

Page 167: ...e minimum pulse length for example the signal outputs Once the input is activated the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting Both timers use the same setting parameter Figure 89 A Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting B Trip pulse is longer than Pulse time setting Signals Table 147 TPSGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 1 I...

Page 168: ...ion TPMGAPC contains two independent timers The function has a settable pulse length in minutes The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example the signal outputs Once the input is activated the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting Both timers use the same setting parameter Figure 91 A Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting B Trip pulse is ...

Page 169: ...me 3 17 3 Pulse timer function block PTGAPC 3 17 3 1 Function block Figure 92 Function block 3 17 3 2 Functionality The pulse timer function PTGAPC contains eight independent timers The function has a settable pulse length Once the input is activated the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse delay time setting t0 t0 dt t1 t1 dt t2 t2 dt dt Pulse delay time Figure 93 Timer operation...

Page 170: ...utput 5 status Q6 BOOLEAN Output 6 status Q7 BOOLEAN Output 7 status Q8 BOOLEAN Output 8 status 3 17 3 4 Settings Table 156 PTGAPC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pulse time 1 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse time Pulse time 2 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse time Pulse time 3 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse time Pulse time 4 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse time Pulse time 5 0 3600000 ...

Page 171: ...t is cleared the output stays on until the time set with the Off delay time setting has elapsed t0 t1 dt t2 t3 t5 dt dt Off delay time t1 t4 t5 Figure 95 Timer operation 3 17 4 3 Signals Table 158 TOFGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 1 status IN2 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 2 status IN3 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 3 status IN4 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 4 status IN5 BOOLEAN...

Page 172: ...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 2 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 3 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 4 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 5 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 6 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 7 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 8 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time 3 17 4 5 Technical ...

Page 173: ...tput is set after the time set by the On delay time setting has elapsed t0 t0 dt t2 t3 t4 dt dt On delay time t1 t4 t5 Figure 97 Timer operation 3 17 5 3 Signals Table 162 TONGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 6 IN7 BOOL...

Page 174: ...delay time On delay time 2 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 3 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 4 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 5 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 6 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 7 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 8 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time 3 17 5 5 Technical data Table 165 TONGAPC Technical d...

Page 175: ...rity over the RESET input The status of each Q output is retained in the nonvolatile memory The individual reset for each Q output is available on the LHMI or through tool via communication Table 166 Truth table for SRGAPC S R Q 0 0 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 3 17 6 3 Signals Table 167 SRGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description S1 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q1 output when set R1 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets ...

Page 176: ...when set S6 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q6 output when set R6 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q6 output when set S7 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q7 output when set R7 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q7 output when set S8 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q8 output when set R8 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q8 output when set Table 168 SRGAPC Output signals Name Type Description Q1 BOOLEAN Q1 status Q2 BOOLEAN Q2 status Q3 BOOLEAN Q3 status Q4 BOOLEAN Q4...

Page 177: ...esets Q7 output when set Reset Q8 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets Q8 output when set 3 17 7 Move 8 pcs MVGAPC 3 17 7 1 Function block Figure 99 Function block 3 17 7 2 Functionality The move 8 pcs function MVGAPC is used for user logic bits Each input state is directly copied to the output state This allows the creating of events from advanced logic combinations MVGAPC can generate user defined e...

Page 178: ... BOOLEAN Q4 status Q5 BOOLEAN Q5 status Q6 BOOLEAN Q6 status Q7 BOOLEAN Q7 status Q8 BOOLEAN Q8 status 3 17 7 4 Settings Table 172 MVGAPC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Description MVGAPC1 Q1 Output description Description MVGAPC1 Q2 Output description Description MVGAPC1 Q3 Output description Description MVGAPC1 Q4 Output description Description MVGA...

Page 179: ...range is from 2147483648 to 2147483647 3 17 8 3 Signals Table 173 MVI4GAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 INT32 0 Integer input value 1 IN2 INT32 0 Integer input value 2 IN3 INT32 0 Integer input value 3 IN4 INT32 0 Integer input value 4 Table 174 MVI4GAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 INT32 Integer output value 1 OUT2 INT32 Integer output value 2 OUT3 INT32 Integer ou...

Page 180: ... 0 Analog output range is from 2000000 0 to 2000000 0 If the value of the AIn_VALUE input exceeds the analog input range AOn_VALUE is set to 0 0 If the result of AIn_VALUE multiplied by the Scale ratio n setting exceeds the analog output range AOn_VALUE shows the minimum or maximum value according to analog value range 3 17 9 3 Signals Table 175 SCA4GAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description...

Page 181: ... 17 9 4 Settings Table 177 SCA4GAPC settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Scale ratio 1 0 001 1000 000 0 001 1 000 Scale ratio for analog value 1 Scale ratio 2 0 001 1000 000 0 001 1 000 Scale ratio for analog value 2 Scale ratio 3 0 001 1000 000 0 001 1 000 Scale ratio for analog value 3 Scale ratio 4 0 001 1000 000 0 001 1 000 Scale ratio for analog value 4 1MRS757644 H B...

Page 182: ...heme on the function block inputs If more than one input is active the input with the highest priority is selected The actual state is reflected on the CONTROL function outputs Only one output is active at a time Table 178 Truth table for CONTROL Input Output CTRL_OFF CTRL_LOC CTRL_STA 1 CTRL_REM TRUE any any any OFF TRUE FALSE TRUE any any LOCAL TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE any STATION TRUE FALSE FALSE ...

Page 183: ...gory is always set by the IEC 61850 client The relay supports station and remote IEC 61850 command originator categories depending on the selected station authority level 3 17 10 4 Station authority level L R Relay s default station authority level is L R In this scenario only local or remote control access is allowed Control access with IEC 61850 command originator category station is interpreted...

Page 184: ...th IEC 61850 originator category station is interpreted as remote access IEC 61850 remote IED IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED L R IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED REMOTE LOCAL OFF Figure 104 Station authority is L R L R When station authority level L R L R is used the control access can be selected using R L button or CONTROL functi...

Page 185: ... command originator category set to Remote or Station There is no multilevel access IED IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 station IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED IEC 61850 station IED IEC 61850 station IED IEC 61850 station OFF LOCAL REMOTE STATION Figure 105 Station authority is L S R When the station authority level L S R is used the control access can be selected using R L butto...

Page 186: ... from local station or remote location Simultaneous local station or remote control operation is not allowed as one client and location at time can access controllable objects and they remain reserved until the previously started control operation is first completed by the client IED IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 station IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED IEC 61850 station IED IEC...

Page 187: ...s Control FB input CTRL LLN0 Loc Sta1 CTRL LLN0 MltL ev L R state CTRL LLN0 Loc KeyHMI Local user IEC 61850 client 2 IEC 61850 client3 CTRL_OFF FALSE FALSE 0 CTRL_LOC FALSE FALSE 1 x CTRL_STA FALSE FALSE 3 x CTRL_REM 4 TRUE TRUE 3 x CTRL_REM FALSE TRUE 7 x x CTRL_ALL FALSE TRUE 6 x x x CTRL_ALL 4 TRUE TRUE 5 x x 3 17 10 8 Signals Table 187 CONTROL Input signals Name Type Default Description CTRL_O...

Page 188: ... BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device CTRL test status 3 17 10 9 Settings Table 189 Non group settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description LR control 1 LR key 2 Binary input 1 LR key LR control through LR key or binary input Station authority 1 L R 2 L S R 3 L R L R 4 L S S R L S L S R 1 L R Control command originator cate gory usage Control mode 1 On 2 Blocked 5 Off 1 On Enabling and d...

Page 189: ...0 Object status only 11 Object direct 12 Object select 13 RL local allowed 14 RL remote allowed 15 RL off 16 Function off 17 Function blocked 18 Command progress 19 Select timeout 20 Missing authority 21 Close not enabled 22 Open not enabled 23 Internal fault 24 Already close 25 Wrong client 26 RL station allowed 27 RL change 28 Abortion by trip Latest command re sponse Table continues on the next...

Page 190: ...ts outputs through a local or remote control The local control is provided through the buttons in the front panel and the remote control is provided through communications SPCGAPC has two modes of operation In the Toggle mode the block toggles the output signal for every input pulse received In the Pulsed mode the block generates an output pulse of a preset duration For example if the Operation mo...

Page 191: ...nput of control point 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 6 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 7 IN8 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 8 IN9 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 9 IN10 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 10 IN11 BOOLEAN 0...

Page 192: ...utput 2 status O3 BOOLEAN Output 3 status O4 BOOLEAN Output 4 status O5 BOOLEAN Output 5 status O6 BOOLEAN Output 6 status O7 BOOLEAN Output 7 status O8 BOOLEAN Output 8 status O9 BOOLEAN Output 9 status O10 BOOLEAN Output 10 status O11 BOOLEAN Output 11 status O12 BOOLEAN Output 12 status O13 BOOLEAN Output 13 status O14 BOOLEAN Output 14 status O15 BOOLEAN Output 15 status O16 BOOLEAN Output 16 ...

Page 193: ...eric control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 4 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 ...

Page 194: ...operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 11 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 12 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic ...

Page 195: ... the Operation mode Pulse length and Description settings available to control all 16 outputs By default the Operation mode setting is set to Off This disables the controllable signal output SPCRGAPC also has a general setting Loc Rem restriction which enables or disables the local or remote state functionality When the Operation mode is set to Toggle the corresponding output toggles between True ...

Page 196: ...is TRUE If the Operation mode setting is set to Pulsed the activation of the BLOCK input resets the output to the FALSE state 3 17 12 4 Signals Table 194 SPCRGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 195 SPCRGAPC Output signals Name Type Description O1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status O2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status O3 BOOLEAN Out...

Page 197: ...eric control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Output 4 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000...

Page 198: ...10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Output 11 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Output 12 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off...

Page 199: ...rinciple The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off SPCLGAPC has the Operation mode Pulse length and Description settings available to control all 16 outputs By default the Operation mode setting is set to Off This disables the controllable signal output SPCLGAPC also has a general setting Loc Rem restriction which enables ...

Page 200: ...e Operation mode setting is set to Toggle the output state cannot be changed when the input BLOCK is TRUE If the Operation mode setting is set to Pulsed the activation of the BLOCK input resets the output to the FALSE state 3 17 13 4 Signals Table 197 SPCLGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 198 SPCLGAPC Output ...

Page 201: ...eric control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Output 4 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000...

Page 202: ...10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Output 11 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Output 12 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off...

Page 203: ... function FKEYGGIO is a simple interface between the panel and the application The user input from the buttons available on the front panel is transferred to the assigned functionality and the corresponding LED is ON or OFF for indication The behavior of each function key in the specific application is configured by connection with other application functions This gives the maximum flexibility 3 1...

Page 204: ...alse LED 11 L12 BOOLEAN 0 False LED 12 L13 BOOLEAN 0 False LED 13 L14 BOOLEAN 0 False LED 14 L15 BOOLEAN 0 False LED 15 L16 BOOLEAN 0 False LED 16 Table 201 FKEYGGIO Output signals Name Type Description K1 BOOLEAN KEY 1 K2 BOOLEAN KEY 2 K3 BOOLEAN KEY 3 K4 BOOLEAN KEY 4 K5 BOOLEAN KEY 5 K6 BOOLEAN KEY 6 K7 BOOLEAN KEY 7 K8 BOOLEAN KEY 8 K9 BOOLEAN KEY 9 K10 BOOLEAN KEY 10 K11 BOOLEAN KEY 11 K12 BO...

Page 205: ...diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 113 Functional module diagram Up down counter Each rising edge of the UP_CNT input increments the counter value CNT_VAL by one and each rising edge of the DOWN_CNT input decrements the CNT_VAL by one If there is a rising edge at both the inputs UP_CNT and DOWN_CNT the counter value CNT_VAL is unchanged The CNT_VAL is available in the monitored data...

Page 206: ...e correct settings UDFCNT can record correctly up to 20 pulses per second For example to constantly record 20 pulses per second from slot X110 binary input 1 when the pulse length is 25 ms pulse high and 25 ms pulse low time the following settings are recommended Input 1 filter time is set to 5 15 ms via Configuration I O modules X110 BIO Input filtering Input osc level is set to 45 50 events s vi...

Page 207: ...on data loss or any other file system error that prevents the protection relay from working properly the whole file system can be restored to the original factory state All default settings and configuration files stored in the factory are restored For further information on restoring factory settings see the operation manual 3 19 Load profile record LDPRLRC 3 19 1 Function block Figure 114 Functi...

Page 208: ...to phase 23 voltage U31 Phase to phase 31 voltage UL1 Phase to earth 1 voltage UL2 Phase to earth 2 voltage UL3 Phase to earth 3 voltage UL1B Phase to earth 1 voltage B side UL2B Phase to earth 2 voltage B side UL3B Phase to earth 3 voltage B side S Apparent power P Real power Q Reactive power PF Power factor If the data source for the selected quantity is removed for example with Application Conf...

Page 209: ...7 227 4 682 3 11 3 5 17 5 35 0 52 5 105 0 209 9 629 8 12 3 2 16 2 32 5 48 7 97 5 194 9 584 8 3 19 2 3 Uploading of record The protection relay stores the load profile COMTRADE files to the C LDP COMTRADE folder The files can be uploaded with the PCM600 tool or any appropriate computer software that can access the C LDP COMTRADE folder The load profile record consists of two COMTRADE file types the...

Page 210: ...red 3 19 3 Configuration The load profile record can be configured with the PCM600 tool or any tool supporting the IEC 61850 standard The load profile record can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting under the Configuration Load Profile Record menu Each protection relay can be mapped to each of the quantity channels of the load profile record The mapping is done with the Quantity selec...

Page 211: ...ers Mem warn level and Mem Alarm level 3 19 4 Signals Table 208 LDPRLRC Output signals Name Type Description MEM_WARN BOOLEAN Recording memory warning status MEM_ALARM BOOLEAN Recording memory alarm sta tus 3 19 5 Settings 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 211 ...

Page 212: ... 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 13 UL2 14 UL3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 212 620 series Technical Man...

Page 213: ...ange Unit Step Default Description 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 213 ...

Page 214: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 214 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 215: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 215 ...

Page 216: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 216 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 217: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 217 ...

Page 218: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 218 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 219: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 219 ...

Page 220: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 220 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 221: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 221 ...

Page 222: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 222 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 223: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 223 ...

Page 224: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 224 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 225: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 225 ...

Page 226: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 226 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 227: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 227 ...

Page 228: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 228 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 229: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 229 ...

Page 230: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 230 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 231: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 231 ...

Page 232: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 232 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 233: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 620 series Technical Manual 233 ...

Page 234: ...16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 234 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 235: ... data Name Type Values Range Unit Description Rec memory used INT32 0 100 How much re cording memory is currently used 3 20 ETHERNET channel supervision function blocks 3 20 1 Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH 3 20 1 1 Function block Figure 116 Function block 3 20 1 2 Functionality Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH represents LAN A and LAN B redundant Ethernet channels 1M...

Page 236: ...de is set to HSR or PRP REDLNKLIV Up Down Link status of redundant port LAN B Valid only when Redundant mode is set to HSR or PRP 3 20 1 4 Settings Table 212 Redundancy settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Defaul t Description Redundant mode None PRP HSR None Mode selection for Ethernet switch on redundant communication mod ules The None mode is used with normal and Self healing Ethernet topo...

Page 237: ...es Range Unit Step Defaul t Description CH1LIV True False Status of Ethernet channel X1 LAN Value is True if the port is receiv ing Ethernet frames Valid only when Redundant mode is set to None or port is not one of the redundant ports LAN A or LAN B LNK1LIV Up Down Link status of Ethernet port X1 LAN Table 214 SCHLCCH2 output signals Parameter Values Range Unit Step Defaul t Description CH2LIV Tr...

Page 238: ...differential communica tion Port 2 Mode Off On On Mode selection for rear port s If port is not used it can be set to Off Port cannot be set to Off when Redundant mode is HSR or PRP and port is one of the redundant ports LAN A or LAN B Port 3 Mode Off On On Mode selection for rear port s If port is not used it can be set to Off Port cannot be set to Off when Redundant mode is HSR or PRP and port i...

Page 239: ...ection instantaneous stage PHIPTOC 3I 50P 51P 4 1 1 2 Function block Figure 118 Function block 4 1 1 3 Functionality The three phase non directional overcurrent protection function PHxPTOC is used as one phase two phase or three phase non directional overcurrent and short circuit protection The function starts when the current exceeds the set limit The operate time characteristics for low stage PH...

Page 240: ...iagram are explained in the next sections Figure 119 Functional module diagram Level detector The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value If the measured value exceeds the set Start value the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the phase selection logic If the ENA_MULT input is active the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setti...

Page 241: ... selected the operation time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E If a drop off situation happens that is a fault suddenly disappears before the operate delay is exceeded the timer reset state is activated The functionality of the timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operati...

Page 242: ...odes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global settin...

Page 243: ...unctionality is identical in both cases The timer characteristics supported by different stages comply with the list in the IEC 61850 7 4 specification indicate the characteristics supported by different stages Table 218 Timer characteristics supported by different stages Operating curve type PHLPTOC PHHPTOC 1 ANSI Extremely Inverse x x 2 ANSI Very Inverse x 3 ANSI Normal Inverse x x 4 ANSI Modera...

Page 244: ...can choose how many phases at minimum must have currents above the start level for the function to operate When the number of start phase settings is set to 1 out of 3 the operation of PHxPTOC is enabled with the presence of high current in one phase When the setting is 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 single phase faults are not detected The setting 3 out of 3 requires the fault to be present in all thre...

Page 245: ...ansformer and LV side busbar faults The high set stage PHHPTOC operates instantaneously making use of current selectivity only in transformer HV side faults If there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LV side up to the HV side the transformer must also be equipped with LV side overcurrent protection Inrush current detectors are used in start up situations to multiply ...

Page 246: ...usbar protection this blocking principle is applicable for the protection of transformer LV terminals and short lines The functionality and performance of the proposed overcurrent protections can be summarized as seen in the table Table 220 Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcur rent protection DT definite time IDMT inverse definite minimum time O C stage Operating char...

Page 247: ...nts on the setting values can be reduced by using the protection relay s logic which recognizes the transformer energizing inrush current and blocks the operation or multiplies the current start value setting of the selected overcurrent stage with a predefined multiplier setting Finally a dependable trip of the overcurrent protection is secured by both a proper selection of the settings and an ade...

Page 248: ...minimize the effects of severe short circuit faults The influence of the inrush current is taken into consideration by connecting the inrush current detector to the start value multiplying input of the instantaneous stage In this way the start value is multiplied with a predefined setting during the inrush situation and nuisance tripping can be avoided Figure 123 Functionality of numerical multipl...

Page 249: ...0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier Table 222 PHHPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier 1...

Page 250: ...HHPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 226 PHIPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 1 1 9 Settings Table 227 PHLPTOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 05 5 00 xIn 0 01 0 05 Start value Start value Mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scal in...

Page 251: ... reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Table 229 PHLPTOC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Num of start pha ses 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for oper ate activation Curve parameter A 0 0086 120 0000 1 28 2000 Parameter A for customer program mable curve ...

Page 252: ...inv 3 ANSI Norm inv 5 ANSI Def Time 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 12 IEC Ext inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Table 232 PHHPTOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Table 233 PHHPTOC Non group setti...

Page 253: ...0 2 40 200000 3 ms 10 20 2 40 3 Operate delay time Table 236 PHIPTOC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Num of start pha ses 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for oper ate activation Table 237 PHIPTOC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default ...

Page 254: ... data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time PHIPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 1 1 11 Technical data Table 241 PHxPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f n 2 Hz PHLPTOC 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC 1 5 of s...

Page 255: ... to 40 ms for the Operate delay time setting C Minimum and default values changed to 20 ms for the Operate delay time setting Minimum value changed to 1 00 x In for the Start value setting D Internal improvement E Internal improvement Table 243 PHHPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change C Measurement mode P to P backup re placed with Peak to Peak D Step value changed from 0 05 to...

Page 256: ... protection high stage PH3HPTOC 3I_3 51P 2_3 Three independent phase non di rectional overcurrent protection in stantaneous stage PH3IPTOC 3I_3 50P 51P_3 4 1 2 2 Function block Figure 125 Function block 4 1 2 3 Functionality The three independent phase non directional overcurrent protection function PH3xPTOC is used as one phase two phase or three phase non directional overcurrent and short circui...

Page 257: ...cuit protection The phase operation mode is selected with the Operation curve type setting The operation is further specified with the Num of start phases setting which sets the number of phases in which the current must exceed the set current start value before the corresponding start and operating signals can be activated The operation of PH3xPTOC can be described by using a module diagram All t...

Page 258: ... the Start value setting range The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function INRPHAR is connected to the ENA_MULT input Figure 127 Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic The phase selection logic detects the faulty phase or phases and controls the timers according to the set value of the Num of start phases setting Protection f...

Page 259: ...hases Timer A Timer B Timer C The function design contains three independent phase segregated timers that are controlled by common settings This design allows true three phase overcurrent protection which is useful in some applications Common START and OPERATE outputs are created by ORing the phase specific start and operating outputs Each phase has its own phase specific start and operating outpu...

Page 260: ...ANSI or programmable types of the IDMT operating curves If another operating curve type is selected an immediate reset occurs during the drop off situation The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operation and reset times The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operation time for IDMT The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The M...

Page 261: ...I Def Time or IEC Def Time The functionality is identical in both cases The following characteristics which comply with the list in the IEC 61850 7 4 specification indicate the characteristics supported by different stages Table 245 IDMT curves supported by different stages Operating curve type Supported by PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC 1 ANSI Extremely Inverse x x 2 ANSI Very Inverse x 3 ANSI Normal Inverse ...

Page 262: ...is used for clearing two phase and three phase short circuits Therefore it can be chosen how many phases at minimum must have currents above the start level for the function to operate Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time delays PH3xPTOC consists of three protection stages Low PH3LPTOC High PH3HPTOC Instantaneous PH3IPTOC PH3LPTOC is used for overcu...

Page 263: ... also be fed from the LV side up to the HV side the transformer must also be equipped with an LV side overcurrent protection Inrush current detectors are used in startup situations to multiply the current start value setting in each particular IED where the inrush current can occur The overcurrent and contact based circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF is used to confirm the protection scheme...

Page 264: ... addition to the busbar protection this blocking principle is applicable for the protection of transformer LV terminals and short lines The functionality and performance of the proposed overcurrent protections can be summarized Table 247 Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcur rent protection DT definite time IDMT inverse definite minimum time O C stage Operating char Se...

Page 265: ...ation times of the numerical units So for example a grading margin of 150 ms in the DT mode of operation can be used provided that the circuit breaker interrupting time is shorter than 60 ms The sensitivity and speed of the current selective stages become as good as possible due to the fact that the transient overreach is very low Also the effects of switching inrush currents on the setting values...

Page 266: ...t are cleared rapidly by the instantaneous stage to minimize the effects of severe short circuit faults The influence of the inrush current is taken into consideration by connecting the inrush current detector to the start value multiplying input of the instantaneous stage This way the start value is multiplied with a predefined setting during the inrush situation and nuisance tripping can be avoi...

Page 267: ...urrent I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier Table 249 PH3HPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating th...

Page 268: ...OLEAN Operate phase C START BOOLEAN Start ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C Table 252 PH3HPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate phase A OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate phase B OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C START BOOLEAN Start ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C Table ...

Page 269: ...curves Operate delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext inv 2 ANSI Very inv 3 ANSI Norm inv 4 ANSI Mod inv 5 ANSI Def Time 6 L T E inv 7 L T V inv 8 L T inv 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 11 IEC inv 12 IEC Ext inv 13 IEC S T inv 14 IEC L T inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Table 255 P...

Page 270: ...n group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20 60000 ms 10 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used meas urement mode Table 258 PH3HPTOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 10 40 ...

Page 271: ...2 2 00 1 2 00 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter D 0 46 30 00 1 29 10 Parameter D for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Table 261 PH3HPTOC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20 60000 ms 10 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset ...

Page 272: ...OC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time PH3LPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 266 PH3HPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time PH3HPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 267 PH...

Page 273: ...e 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics RMS No suppression DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 Peak to Peak No suppression Peak to Peak backup No suppression 4 1 3 Three phase directional overcurrent protection DPHxPDOC 4 1 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase directional overcu...

Page 274: ... or inverse definite minimum time IDMT In the DT mode the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears The IDMT mode provides current dependent timer characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 1 3 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled...

Page 275: ...olt Positive sequence voltage Neg seq volt Negative sequence voltage Self pol Self polarization Cross pol Cross polarization The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting The user can select either Non directional Forward or Reverse operation By setting the value of Allow Non Dir to True the non directional operation is allowed when the directional information is inva...

Page 276: ... set with the Voltage Mem time setting The voltage memory cannot be used for the Negative sequence voltage polarization because it is not possible to substitute the positive sequence voltage for negative sequence voltage without knowing the network unsymmetry level This is the reason why the fictive voltage angle and corresponding direction information are frozen immediately for this polarization ...

Page 277: ... selection logic If the ENA_MULT input is active the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting The protection relay does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function INRPHAR is connected to the ENA_MULT input 1MR...

Page 278: ...le IDMT curve is selected the operation time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E If a drop off situation happens that is a fault suddenly disappears before the operate delay is exceeded the timer reset state is activated The functionality of the timer in the reset state depends on the combinatio...

Page 279: ...n the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence ...

Page 280: ...nd the Min forward angle setting gives the corresponding clockwise sector measured from the Characteristic angle setting In the backward operation area the Max reverse angle setting gives the counterclockwise sector and the Min reverse angle setting gives the corresponding clockwise sector a measurement from the Characteristic angle setting that has been rotated 180 degrees Relay characteristic an...

Page 281: ...e being in forward 2 backward The direction information DIR_X for some phase is forward and for some phase is reverse 3 both FAULT_DIR gives the detected direction of the fault during fault situations that is when the START output is active Self polarizing as polarizing method Table 273 Equations for calculating angle difference for self polarizing method Faulted phases Used fault current Used pol...

Page 282: ... the fault is between phases B and C the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U BC and operating quantity IB IC in the self polarizing method Figure 139 Two phase short circuit short circuit is between phases B and C Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 282 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 283: ...UBC ANGLE C U U I I AB BC C A RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 The angle difference between the polarizing quantity U BC and operating quantity I A is marked as φ in an example of the phasors in a single phase earth fault where the faulted phase is phase A The polarizing quantity is rotated with 90 degrees The characteristic angle is assumed to be 0 degrees Figure 140 Single phase earth fault phase A In an exampl...

Page 284: ...nce This is done automatically with a system parameter Phase rotation Negative sequence voltage as polarizing quantity When the negative voltage is used as the polarizing quantity the angle difference between the operating and polarizing quantity is calculated with the same formula for all fault types ANGLE X U I RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 2 2 Equation 6 This means that the actuating polarizing quantity is U2 Pr...

Page 285: ...tions for calculating angle difference for positive sequence quan tity polarizing method Faulted phases Used fault current Used polarizing voltage Angle difference A I A U 1 ANGLE A U I A RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 B I B U 1 ANGLE B U I B RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 120o C I C U 1 ANGLE C U IC RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 120o A B I A IB U 1 ANGLE A U I I A B RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 30o B C I B IC U 1 ANGLE B U I I B C RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 90o C A I C IA ...

Page 286: ...ation The change in the network rotating direction affects the phase to phase voltages polarization method where the calculated angle difference needs to be rotated 180 degrees Also when the sequence components are used which are the positive sequence voltage or negative sequence voltage components the calculation of the components are affected but the angle difference calculation remains the same...

Page 287: ... calculations are needed There are situations with no possibility to have the selectivity with a protection system based on overcurrent protection relays in a closed ring system In some applications the possibility of obtaining the selectivity can be improved significantly if DPHxPDOC is used This can also be done in the closed ring networks and radial networks with the generation connected to the...

Page 288: ...y distribution for the consumers is secured during network fault situations The power is fed at least from two directions which means that the current direction can be varied The time grading between the network level stages is challenging without unnecessary delays in the time settings In this case it is practical to use the directional overcurrent protection relays to achieve a selective protect...

Page 289: ...ase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current I 2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase se quence current U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age A or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age C or phase to phase voltage CA U 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase se quence voltage Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Protec...

Page 290: ...t U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age A or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age C or phase to phase voltage CA U 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase se quence voltage U 2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase se quence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False...

Page 291: ... 5 ANSI Def Time 6 L T E inv 7 L T V inv 8 L T inv 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 11 IEC inv 12 IEC Ext inv 13 IEC S T inv 14 IEC L T inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Directional mode 1 Non directional 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Characteristic an gle 179 180 deg 1 60 Characteristic an gle Max forward an...

Page 292: ... 1 28 2000 Parameter A for customer program mable curve Curve parameter B 0 0000 0 7120 1 0 1217 Parameter B for customer program mable curve Curve parameter C 0 02 2 00 1 2 00 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter D 0 46 30 00 1 29 10 Parameter D for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Table 283 DPHLPDOC ...

Page 293: ...15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Operate delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time Characteristic an gle 179 180 deg 1 60 Characteristic an gle Max forward angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward di rection Max reverse angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse di rection Min forward angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase an gle in forward di rection Min reve...

Page 294: ...able curve Num of start pha ses 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for oper ate activation Table 287 DPHHPDOC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Minimum operate time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Allow Non Dir 0 False 1 True 0 False Allo...

Page 295: ...ion DIR_A Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase A DIR_B Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase B DIR_C Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase C ANGLE_A FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase A ANGLE_B FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase B ANGLE_C FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle diff...

Page 296: ...f start time operate time FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction infor mation DIR_A Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase A DIR_B Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase B DIR_C Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase C Table continues on ...

Page 297: ...age 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 U n Phase angle 2 DPHHPDOC Current 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n at currents in the range of 0 1 10 I n 5 0 of the set value at currents in the range of 10 40 I n Voltage 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 U n Phase angle 2 Start time IFault 2 0 x set Start value Minimum Typical Maximum 39 ms 43 ms 47 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Table c...

Page 298: ...l revision history Technical revision Change B Added a new input NON_DIR C Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting D Monitored data VMEM_USED indicating volt age memory use E Internal improvement 4 1 4 Directional three independent phase directional overcurrent protection DPH3xPDOC 4 1 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identific...

Page 299: ...o be either definite time DT or inverse definite minimum time IDMT In the DT mode the function operates after a predefined operation time and resets when the fault current disappears The IDMT mode provides current dependent timer characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 1 4 4 Operation princip...

Page 300: ...olt Positive sequence voltage Neg seq volt Negative sequence voltage Self pol Self polarization Cross pol Cross polarization The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting The user can select either Non directional Forward or Reverse operation By setting the value of Allow Non Dir to True the non directional operation is allowed when the directional information is inva...

Page 301: ...oss of voltage This time can be set with the Voltage Mem time setting The voltage memory cannot be used for the negative sequence voltage polarization because it is not possible to substitute the positive sequence voltage for negative sequence voltage without knowing the network asymmetry level This is the reason why the fictive voltage angle and corresponding direction information are frozen imme...

Page 302: ...sults of that phase to the phase selection logic If the ENA_MULT input is active the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function INRPHAR is connected to the...

Page 303: ...nput activated Phase selection logic The phase selection logic detects the faulty phase or phases and controls the timers according to the set value of the Num of start phases setting 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 303 ...

Page 304: ...t detected The value 3 out of 3 requires the fault to be present in all three phases Timer A Timer B Timer C The function design contains three independent phase segregated timers which are controlled by common settings This design allows a true three phase overcurrent protection which is useful in some applications The common START and OPERATE outputs are created by ORing the phasespecific starti...

Page 305: ...op off situation If the drop off situation continues the reset timer is reset and the START output is deactivated The Inverse reset selection is only supported with ANSI or programmable IDMT operating curves If another operating curve type is selected an immediate reset occurs during the drop off situation The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operating and reset times The setti...

Page 306: ...e The DT characteristic can be chosen by selecting the Operating curve type values ANSI Def Time or IEC Def Time The functionality is identical in both cases The list of characteristics which matches the list in the IEC 61850 7 4 specification indicates the characteristics supported by different stages Table 294 IDMT curves supported by different stages Operating curve type Supported by DPH3LPDOC ...

Page 307: ...limits are always given as positive degree values In the forward operation area the Max forward angle setting gives the counterclockwise sector and the Min forward angle setting gives the corresponding clockwise sector measured from the Characteristic angle setting In the backward operation area the Max reverse angle setting gives the counterclockwise sector and the Min reverse angle setting gives...

Page 308: ...th Table 296 Momentary phase combined direction value for monitored data view Criterion for phase combined direction information The value for DIRECTION The direction information DIR_X for all phases is unknown 0 unknown The direction information DIR_X for at least one phase is forward none being in reverse 1 forward The direction information DIR_X for at least one phase is reverse none being in f...

Page 309: ...CA C A RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ In an example case of the phasors in a single phase earth fault where the faulted phase is phase A the angle difference between the polarizing quantity U A and operating quantity I A is marked as φ In the self polarization method there is no need to rotate the polarizing quantity Figure 154 Single phase earth fault phase A In an example case of a two phase short circuit failure ...

Page 310: ...C U I AB C RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 A B I A IB U BC UCA ANGLE A U U I I BC CA A B RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 B C I B IC U CA UAB ANGLE B U U I I CA AB B C RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 C A I C IA U AB UBC ANGLE C U U I I AB BC C A RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 The angle difference between the polarizing quantity U BC and operating quantity I A is marked as φ in an example of the phasors in a single phase earth fault where the faulted phase ...

Page 311: ...phasors in a two phase short circuit failure where the fault is between the phases B and C the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity UAB and operating quantity IB IC marked as φ 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 311 ...

Page 312: ...nce This is done automatically with a system parameter Phase rotation Negative sequence voltage as polarizing quantity When the negative voltage is used as the polarizing quantity the angle difference between the operating and polarizing quantity is calculated with the same formula for all fault types ANGLE X U I RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 2 2 Equation 7 This means that the actuating polarizing quantity is U2 Pr...

Page 313: ...tions for calculating angle difference for positive sequence quan tity polarizing method Faulted phases Used fault current Used polarizing voltage Angle difference A I A U 1 ANGLE A U I A RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 B I B U 1 ANGLE B U I B RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 120o C I C U 1 ANGLE C U IC RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 120o A B I A IB U 1 ANGLE A U I I A B RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 30o B C I B IC U 1 ANGLE B U I I B C RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 90o C A I C IA ...

Page 314: ...The change in the network rotation direction affects the polarization method of the phase to phase voltages where the calculated angle difference needs to be rotated 180 degrees Also when the sequence components are used the calculation of the components is affected but the angle difference calculation remains the same The sequence components are the positive sequence voltage or negative sequence ...

Page 315: ...lations are needed There are situations with no possibility to have the selectivity with a protection system based on overcurrent IEDs in a closed ring system In some applications the possibility of obtaining the selectivity can be improved significantly if DPH3xPDOC is used This can also be done in the closed ring networks and radial networks with the generation connected to the remote in the sys...

Page 316: ...ctricity distribution for the consumers is secured during network fault situations The power is fed from at least two directions which means that the current direction can be varied The time grading between the network level stages is challenging without unnecessary delays in the time settings In this case it is practical to use the directional overcurrent IEDs to achieve a selective protection sc...

Page 317: ...current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current I 2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase se quence current U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age A or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age C or phase to phase voltage CA U 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase se quence voltage Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H Protection f...

Page 318: ... Phase to earth volt age A or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age C or phase to phase voltage CA U 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase se quence voltage U 2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase se quence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enabling signal ...

Page 319: ...EAN Operate phase C ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C 4 1 4 9 Settings Table 304 DPH3LPDOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 05 5 00 xIn 0 01 0 05 Start value Start value Mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scal ing the start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI I...

Page 320: ...stic an gle Max forward angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward di rection Max reverse angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse di rection Min forward angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase an gle in forward di rection Min reverse angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase an gle in reverse direc tion Table 305 DPH3LPDOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Descr...

Page 321: ...Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used meas urement mode Allow Non Dir 0 False 1 True 0 False Allows prot activa tion as non dir when dir info is in valid Min operate cur rent 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating cur...

Page 322: ...oup settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Pol quantity 1 Self pol 4 Neg seq volt 5 Cross pol 7 Pos seq volt 5 Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine fault direction Table 310 DPH3HPDOC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default D...

Page 323: ...e 0 False Allows prot activa tion as non dir when dir info is in valid Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used meas urement mode Min operate cur rent 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating current Min operate volt age 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating voltage 4 1 4 10 Monitored data Table 312 DPH3LPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_D...

Page 324: ...LE_B FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase B ANGLE_C FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase C DPH3LPDOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 313 DPH3HPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detecte...

Page 325: ...oth Direction phase B DIR_C Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction phase C ANGLE_A FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase A ANGLE_B FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase B ANGLE_C FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase C DPH3HPDOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 62...

Page 326: ...ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Operate time accuracy in in verse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics RMS No suppression DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 Peak to Peak No suppression Peak to Peak backup No suppression 1 Measurement mode and Pol quantity default current befo...

Page 327: ... short circuit conditions PHPVOC starts when the input phase current exceeds a limit which is dynamically calculated based on the measured terminal voltages The operating characteristics can be selected to be either inverse definite minimum time IDMT or definite time DT PHPVOC contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 1 5 ...

Page 328: ...s available in the Monitored data view and is used by the Level detector module All three phase to phase voltages should be available for the function to operate properly Voltage control mode In the Voltage control mode the Effective start value is calculated based on the magnitude of input voltages U_AB U_BC and U_CA The voltage dependency is phase sensitive which means that the magnitude of one ...

Page 329: ...ge slope characteristic is achieved by assigning different values to Voltage high limit and Voltage low limit The effective start value calculation is based on the equations Voltage level Effective start value I effective U Voltage low limit Start value low U Voltage high limit Start value If Voltage low limit U Voltage high limit I effective A A I C D C U Equation 8 A set Start value low I set St...

Page 330: ... The value of the setting Start value should always be greater than the setting Start value low Otherwise Start value low is used as the effective start value External input control mode The External input control mode is used to enable voltage control from an external application If Control mode is set to the Input Control mode the effective start value for all phases is influenced by the status ...

Page 331: ...e information matches the Num of start phases setting the phase selection logic activates the Timer module Timer Once activated the Timer module activates the START output Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by ...

Page 332: ...function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated 4 1 5 5 Application The three phase voltage dependent overcurrent protection is used as a backup protection for the generators and system from damage due to the phase faults which are not cleared by primary protection and associated breakers In case of a short circuit the sustained fault current of the generator determined by the m...

Page 333: ...tional to the terminal voltage The current start value varies correspondingly with the generator terminal voltages between the set voltage high limit and voltage low limit ensuring the operation of PHPVOC despite the drop in fault current value The operation of PHPVOC should be time graded with respect to the main protection scheme to ensure that PHPVOC does not operate before the main protection ...

Page 334: ...Time 6 L T E inv 7 L T V inv 8 L T inv 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 11 IEC inv 12 IEC Ext inv 13 IEC S T inv 14 IEC L T inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Operate delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time Table 318 PHPVOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curv...

Page 335: ...fault Description Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used meas urement mode Control mode 1 Voltage control 2 Input control 3 Voltage and in put Ctl 4 No Volt depend ency 1 Voltage control Type of control Minimum operate time 40 60000 ms 1 40 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 1 5 8 Monitored data Table 321 PHPVOC Monitore...

Page 336: ... ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the set value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 1 6 Three phase thermal protection for feeders cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR 4 1 6 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase thermal protection for feeders cable...

Page 337: ...re rise continues the function operates based on the thermal model of the line Re energizing of the line after the thermal overload operation can be inhibited during the time the cooling of the line is in progress The cooling of the line is estimated by the thermal model 4 1 6 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter valu...

Page 338: ...d the ambient temperature value used in the calculation is also available in the monitored data as TEMP_AMB in degrees If the final temperature estimation is larger than the set Maximum temperature the START output is activated Current reference and Temperature rise setting values are used in the final temperature estimation together with the ambient temperature It is suggested to set these values...

Page 339: ...t current This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature toperate final operate final n τ ln Θ Θ Θ Θ Equation 13 Caused by the thermal overload protection function there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit after operating The lockout output BLK_CLOSE is activated at the same time when the OPERATE output is activated and...

Page 340: ...model complies with the IEC 60255 149 standard 4 1 6 5 Application The lines and cables in the power system are constructed for a certain maximum load current level If the current exceeds this level the losses will be higher than expected As a consequence the temperature of the conductors will increase If the temperature of the lines and cables reaches too high values it can cause a risk of damage...

Page 341: ... Table 325 T1PTTR Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Env temperature Set 50 100 C 1 40 Ambient tempera ture used when no external temper ature measurement available Current reference 0 05 4 00 xIn 0 01 1 00 The load current leading to Temper ature raise temper ature Temperature rise 0 0 200 0 C 0 1 75 0 End temperature rise above ambient Time constant 60 6000...

Page 342: ...mperature raise above ambient temperature at startup 4 1 6 8 Monitored data Table 329 T1PTTR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TEMP FLOAT32 100 0 9999 9 C The calculated temper ature of the protected object TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0 00 99 99 The calculated temper ature of the protected object relative to the operate level T_OPERATE INT32 0 60000 s Estimated time to oper ate T_ENA_CLOS...

Page 343: ...Technical revision Change C Removed the Sensor available setting param eter D Added the AMB_TEMP input E Internal improvement F Internal improvement 4 1 7 Three phase thermal overload protection two time constants T2PTTR 4 1 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase thermal overload pro tection two time const...

Page 344: ...ing The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of T2PTTR can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections The function uses ambient temperature which can be measured locally or remotely Local measurement is done by the protection relay Remote measurement uses analog GOOSE to connect AMB_TEMP input If the quality of remot...

Page 345: ...erature measurement The temperature rise in degrees Celsius C is calculated from the highest of the three phase currents according to the expression Θ p I I T e p ref ref t 2 1 1 1 τ I I I T e ref ref t 2 2 1 τ Equation 16 ΔΘ calculated temperature rise C in transformer I measured phase current with the highest TRMS value Iref the set value of the Current reference setting rated current of the pro...

Page 346: ... Long time constant is used Figure 172 Effect of the Weighting factor p factor and the difference between the two time constants and one time constant models The actual temperature of the transformer is calculated by adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature Θ Θ Θ amb Equation 17 Θ temperature in transformer C ΔΘ calculated temperature rise C in transformer Θ amb set value of th...

Page 347: ...nitored data view After operating there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit due to the thermal overload protection function The BLK_CLOSE lockout output is activated when the device temperature is above the Reclose temperature lockout release temperature setting value The time to lockout release T_ENA_CLOSE is also calculated The value is available in the monitored data view 4 1 7 5 ...

Page 348: ...he energizing of the transformer is blocked until the heat content is reduced to the set level The thermal curve of two time constants is typical for a transformer The thermal time constants of the protected transformer are given in seconds with the Short time constant and Long time constant settings If the manufacturer does not state any other value the Long time constant can be set to 4920 s 82 ...

Page 349: ...g the blocking mode AMB_TEMP FLOAT32 0 The ambient temper ature used in the cal culation Table 334 T2PTTR Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start ALARM BOOLEAN Thermal Alarm BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator To inhibite reclose 4 1 7 7 Settings Table 335 T2PTTR Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Env temperat...

Page 350: ...t Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 338 T2PTTR Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Initial temperature 0 0 100 0 0 1 80 0 Initial temperature percent value 4 1 7 8 Monitored data Table 339 T2PTTR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TEMP FLOAT32 100 0 9999 9 C The calculated temper ature of the protected obje...

Page 351: ... 4 1 8 Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC 4 1 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC Ist 51LR 4 1 8 2 Function block Figure 173 Function block 4 1 8 3 Functionality The motor load jam protection function JAMPTOC is used for protecting the motor in stall or mechanical jam situations dur...

Page 352: ...istic is according to DT When the operation timer has reached the Operate delay time value the OPERATE output is activated When the timer has elapsed but the motor stall condition still exists the OPERATE output remains active until the phase currents values drop below the Start value that is until the stall condition persists If the drop off situation occurs while the operating time is still coun...

Page 353: ...n is maintained at a given temperature An induction motor stalls when the load torque value exceeds the breakdown torque value causing the speed to decrease to zero or to some stable operating point well below the rated speed This occurs for example when the applied shaft load is suddenly increased and is greater than the producing motor torque due to the bearing failures This condition develops a...

Page 354: ...T BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Start START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time JAMPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 1 8 9 Technical data Table 347 JAMPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f n 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 9...

Page 355: ...h the definite time DT characteristics which means that the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs the definite timer or the function itself if desired 4 1 9 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corr...

Page 356: ...al blocks the operation of the function and resets the timer 4 1 9 5 Application When a motor runs with a load connected it draws a current equal to a value between the no load value and the rated current of the motor The minimum load current can be determined by studying the characteristics of the connected load When the current drawn by the motor is less than the minimum load current drawn it ca...

Page 357: ...lues Range Unit Step Default Description Start value low 0 01 0 50 xIn 0 01 0 10 Current set ting Start value low Start value high 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 50 Current set ting Start value high Operate delay time 400 600000 ms 10 2000 Operate delay time Table 352 LOFLPTUC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 353 L...

Page 358: ...2 I n Start time Typically 300 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 1 04 Retardation time 35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 4 1 9 10 Technical revision history Table 356 LOFLPTUC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement 4 1 10 Loss of phase undercurrent PHPTUC 4 1 10 1 Identificat...

Page 359: ...unction can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of PHPTUC can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 178 Functional module diagram Level detector 1 This module compares the phase currents RMS value to the Start value setting The Operation modesetting c...

Page 360: ...eset delay time the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time The value is available through the monitored data view The BLOCK signal blocks the operation of the function and resets the timer 4 1 10 5 Application In some cases smaller distrib...

Page 361: ...9 PHPTUC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Current block value 0 00 0 50 xIn 0 01 0 10 Low current setting to block internally Start value 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 50 Current setting to start Operate delay time 50 200000 ms 10 2000 Operate delay time Table 360 PHPTUC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 o...

Page 362: ... vol tages fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In Start time Typically 55 ms Reset time 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 1 04 Retardation time 35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 4 1 11 Thermal overload protection for motors MPTTR 4 1 11 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device numbe...

Page 363: ...onding parameter values are On and Off The operation of MPTTR can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections The function uses ambient temperature which can be measured locally or remotely Local measurement is done by the protection relay Remote measurement uses analog GOOSE to connect AMB_TEMP input If the quality of remotely measured tem...

Page 364: ...ut mode the internal FLC is calculated from temperature data available through resistance temperature detectors RTDs using the AMB_TEMP input Table 364 Modification of internal FLC Ambient Temperature Tamb Internal FLC 20 C FLC x 1 09 20 to 40 C FLC x 1 18 Tamb x 0 09 20 40 C FLC 40 to 65 C FLC x 1 Tamb 40 100 65 C FLC x 0 75 The ambient temperature is used for calculating thermal level and it is ...

Page 365: ... the overload limit that is k x I r The equation θ A is used when the value of any one of the phase currents exceeds the overload limit During overload condition the thermal level calculator calculates the value of θ B in background and when the overload ends the thermal level is brought linearly from θ A to θ B with a speed of 1 66 percent per second For the motor at standstill that is when the c...

Page 366: ... view The activation of the BLOCK input does not affect the calculated temperature The thermal level at the beginning of the start up condition of a motor and at the end of the start up condition is available in the monitored data view at the THERMLEV_ST and THERMLEV_END outputs respectively The activation of the BLOCK input does not have any effect on these outputs Alarm and tripping logic The mo...

Page 367: ...ut blocks the ALARM BLK_RESTART and OPERATE outputs Tau 3840 1920 960 640 480 320 160 80 s Figure 182 Trip curves when no prior load and p 20 100 Overload factor 1 05 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 367 ...

Page 368: ...Tau 3840 1920 960 80 160 320 480 640 s Figure 183 Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p 100 Overload factor 1 05 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 368 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 369: ...ing conditions This prevents a premature motor insulation failure The abnormal conditions result in overheating and include overload stalling failure to start high ambient temperature restricted motor ventilation reduced speed operation frequent starting or jogging high or low line voltage or frequency mechanical failure of the driven load improper installation and unbalanced 1MRS757644 H Protecti...

Page 370: ...nds To allow the use of the full capacity of the motor a lower value of Weighting factor p should be used Normally an approximate value of half of the thermal capacity is used when the motor is running at full load Thus by setting Weighting factor p to 50 percent the protection relay notifies a 45 to 50 percent thermal capacity use at full load For direct on line started motors with hot spot tende...

Page 371: ...tive sequence factor During the unbalance condition the symmetry of the stator currents is disturbed and a counter rotating negative sequence component current is set up An increased stator current causes additional heating in the stator and the negative sequence component current excessive heating in the rotor Also mechanical problems like rotor vibration can occur The most common cause of unbala...

Page 372: ...e same as the start up current at the beginning of the motor start up For example if the rated current of a motor is 230 A start up current is 5 7 x I r NegativeSeq factor 175 5 7 5 4 2 Equation 23 Setting the thermal restart level The restart disable level can be calculated as follows θ i startuptimeof the motor operatetimewhen no prior load 100 10 0 0 margin Equation 24 For example the motor sta...

Page 373: ... The ambient temper ature used in the cal culation Table 367 MPTTR Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate ALARM BOOLEAN Thermal Alarm BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator to inhibit restart 4 1 11 7 Settings Table 368 MPTTR Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Overload factor 1 00 1 20 0 01 1 05 Overload factor k Alarm thermal va...

Page 374: ...Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 370 MPTTR Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Current reference 0 30 2 00 xIn 0 01 1 00 Rated current FLC of the motor Initial thermal Val 0 0 100 0 0 1 74 0 Initial thermal level of the motor 4 1 11 8 Monitored data Table 371 MPTTR Monitored data...

Page 375: ...ng on the frequency of the measured current f n 2 Hz Current measurement 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n at currents in the range of 0 01 4 00 I n Operate time accuracy 2 0 of the theoretical value or 0 50 s 4 1 11 10 Technical revision history Table 373 MPTTR Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Added a new input AMB_TEMP Added a new selection for the Env tempera ture mode set...

Page 376: ...s and operates when the residual current exceeds the set limit The operate time characteristic for low stage EFLPTOC and high stage EFHPTOC can be selected to be either definite time DT or inverse definite minimum time IDMT The instantaneous stage EFIPTOC always operates with the DT characteristic In the DT mode the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault curren...

Page 377: ...cteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E If a drop off situation happens that is a fault suddenly disappears before the operate delay is exceeded the timer reset state is activated The functionality of the timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type Type of reset curve ...

Page 378: ...ting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPERATE output mode the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated 4 2 1 5 Measurement modes The function...

Page 379: ...SI Moderately Inverse x 5 ANSI Definite Time x x 6 Long Time Extremely Inverse x 7 Long Time Very Inverse x 8 Long Time Inverse x 9 IEC Normal Inverse x x 10 IEC Very Inverse x x 11 IEC Inverse x 12 IEC Extremely Inverse x x 13 IEC Short Time Inverse x 14 IEC Long Time Inverse x 15 IEC Definite Time x x 17 User programmable curve x x 18 RI type x 19 RD type x EFIPTOC supports only definite time ch...

Page 380: ...ing different current start levels and time delays EFxPTOC consists of three different protection stages Low EFLPTOC High EFHPTOC Instantaneous EFIPTOC EFLPTOC contains several types of time delay characteristics EFHPTOC and EFIPTOC are used for fast clearance of serious earth faults 4 2 1 8 Signals EFLPTOC Input signals Table 377 EFLPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Res...

Page 381: ...ignals Table 381 EFHPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start EFIPTOC Output signals Table 382 EFIPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 2 1 9 Settings EFLPTOC Group settings Table 383 EFLPTOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 010 5 000 xIn 0 005 0 010 ...

Page 382: ...alues Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Table 385 EFLPTOC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Curve parameter A 0 0086 120 0000 1 28 2000 Parameter A for customer program mable curve Curve parameter B 0 000...

Page 383: ...EC ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext inv 3 ANSI Norm inv 5 ANSI Def Time 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 12 IEC Ext inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Table 388 EFHPTOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate...

Page 384: ...l 1 Measured Io 2 Calculated Io 1 Measured Io Selection for used Io signal EFIPTOC Group settings Table 391 EFIPTOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 1 00 40 00 xIn 0 01 1 00 Start value Start value Mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scal ing the start value Operate delay time 20 200000 ms 10 20 Operate delay time Table 392 EFIPTOC Non group se...

Page 385: ...nitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time EFHPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 396 EFIPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time EFIPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 1MRS757644 H Protect...

Page 386: ... 20 ms Suppression of harmonics RMS No suppression DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 Peak to Peak No suppression 4 2 1 12 Technical revision history Table 398 EFIPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B The minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for the Operate delay time setting C Minimum and default values changed to 20 ms for the Operate delay time setting Minimum val...

Page 387: ...ange B The minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for the Operate delay time setting C Start value step changed to 0 005 D Added a setting parameter for the Meas ured Io or Calculated Io selection E Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting F Internal improvement G Internal improvement 4 2 2 Directional earth fault protection DEFxPDEF 4 2 2 1 Identification Function...

Page 388: ...finite minimum time IDMT In the DT mode the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears The IDMT mode provides current dependent timer characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 2 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled ...

Page 389: ...Analog inputs Current Io CT 100 A 1 A The Residual voltage Uo Configuration Analog inputs Voltage Uo VT 11 547 kV 100 V The Start value of 1 0 In corresponds to 1 0 100 A 100 A in the primary The Voltage start value of 1 0 Un corresponds to 1 0 11 547 kV 11 547 kV in the primary Example 2 Both Io and Uo are calculated from the phase quantities Phase CT ratio is 100 1 A and phase VT ratio is 20 sqr...

Page 390: ... mode Description Phase angle The operating sectors for forward and reverse are defined with the settings Min forward angle Max forward angle Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle IoSin The operating sectors are defined as forward when Io x sin ANGLE has a positive value and reverse when the value is neg ative ANGLE is the angle difference between Uo and Io IoCos As IoSin mode Only cosine is use...

Page 391: ...Characteristic angle setting The Correction angle setting can be used to improve selectivity due the inaccuracies in the measurement transformers The setting decreases the operation sector The correction can only be used with the IoCos or IoSin modes The polarity of the polarizing quantity can be reversed by setting the Pol reversal to True which turns the polarizing quantity by 180 degrees For de...

Page 392: ...ted The functionality of the timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings When the DT characteristic is selected the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded When the IDMT curves are selected the Type of reset curve setting can be set to Immediate Def time reset or Inverse reset The reset ...

Page 393: ...ly but the OPERATE output is not activated 4 2 2 5 Directional earth fault principles In many cases it is difficult to achieve selective earth fault protection based on the magnitude of residual current only To obtain a selective earth fault protection scheme it is necessary to take the phase angle of Io into account This is done by comparing the phase angle of the operating and polarizing quantit...

Page 394: ...y characteristic angle RCA 0 degrees in a compensated network Example 2 The Phase angle mode is selected solidly earthed network φRCA 60 deg Characteristic angle 60 deg Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 394 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 395: ...ay characteristic angle RCA 60 degrees in a solidly earthed network Example 3 The Phase angle mode is selected isolated network φRCA 90 deg Characteristic angle 90 deg 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 395 ...

Page 396: ...90 degrees compared to the polarizing voltage Consequently the relay characteristic angle RCA should be set to 90 degrees and the operation criteria to IoSin or Phase angle The width of the operating sector in the phase angle criteria can be selected with the settings Min forward angle Max forward angle Min reverse angle or Max reverse angle Figure 193 illustrates a simplified equivalent circuit f...

Page 397: ...ection relays In this case the selectivity is based on the measurement of the active current component The magnitude of this component is often small and must be increased by means of a parallel resistor in the compensation equipment When measuring the resistive part of the residual current the relay characteristic angle RCA should be set to 0 degrees and the operation criteria to IoCos or Phase a...

Page 398: ...sin Actual operation mode Iosin Actual operation mode Iocos Iocos Actual operation mode Iocos Actual operation mode Iosin Table 404 Characteristic angle control in phase angle operation mode Characteristic angle setting RCA_CTL FALSE RCA_CTL TRUE 90 φ RCA 90 φ RCA 0 0 φ RCA 0 φ RCA 90 Use of the extended phase angle characteristic The traditional method of adapting the directional earth fault prot...

Page 399: ...al value is 170 degrees Min reverse angle in case Directional mode is set to Reverse The Max forward angle setting should be set to cover the possible measurement inaccuracies of current and voltage transformers a typical value is 80 degrees Max reverse angle in case Directional mode is set to Reverse Figure 195 Extended operation area in directional earth fault protection 4 2 2 6 Measurement mode...

Page 400: ...EC Def Time The functionality is identical in both cases The following characteristics which comply with the list in the IEC 61850 7 4 specification indicate the characteristics supported by different stages Table 406 Timer characteristics supported by different stages Operating curve type DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF 1 ANSI Extremely Inverse x x 2 ANSI Very Inverse x 3 ANSI Normal Inverse x x 4 ANSI Moderat...

Page 401: ...orward operation area is limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings The reverse operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings The sector limits are always given as positive degree values In the forward operation area the Max forward angle setting gives the clockwise sector and the Min forward angle setting correspondingly the countercloc...

Page 402: ...the re verse sectors that is the sectors are over lapping 3 both If the Allow Non Dir setting is False the directional operation forward reverse is not allowed when the measured polarizing or operating quantities are invalid that is their magnitude is below the set minimum values The minimum values can be defined with the settings Min operate current and Min operate voltage In case of low magnitud...

Page 403: ...peration criterion Io sin φ When the Iosin φ or Iocos φ criterion is used the component indicates a forward or reverse type fault through the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs in which 1 equals a forward fault and 2 equals a reverse fault Directional operation is not allowed the Allow non dir setting is False when the measured polarizing or operating quantities are not valid that is when their magni...

Page 404: ... limited by angle correction that is the operating sector is 180 degrees 2 angle correction Example 2 Iosin φ criterion selected reverse type fault FAULT_DIR 2 Figure 198 Operating characteristic Iosin φ in reverse fault Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 404 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 405: ..._DIR 1 Figure 199 Operating characteristic Iocos φ in forward fault Example 4 Iocos φ criterion selected reverse type fault FAULT_DIR 2 Figure 200 Operating characteristic Iocos φ in reverse fault 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 405 ...

Page 406: ... the fixed sectors are rounded The sector rounding is used for cancelling the CT measurement errors at low current amplitudes When the current amplitude falls below three percent of the nominal current the sector is reduced to 70 degrees at the fixed sector side This makes the protection more selective which means that the phase angle measurement errors do not cause faulty operation There is no se...

Page 407: ... settings cannot be set but they have a fixed value of 88 degrees The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded Sector rounding in the phase angle 88 consists of three parts If the current amplitude is between 1 20 percent of the nominal current the sector limit increases linearly from 73 degrees to 85 degrees If the current amplitude is between 20 100 percent of the nominal current the secto...

Page 408: ... 40 50 70 80 90 100 Io of In 0 90 45 30 15 75 60 90 45 30 15 75 60 Min forward angle 10 88 deg 85 deg 73 deg 100 of In 20 of In 1 of In Figure 204 Phase angle 88 amplitude Directional mode Forward Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 408 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 409: ...ords the sector can be up to 270 degrees wide This allows the protection settings to stay the same when the resonance coil is disconnected from between the neutral point and earth System neutral earthing is meant to protect personnel and equipment and to reduce interference for example in telecommunication systems The neutral earthing sets challenges for protection systems especially for earth fau...

Page 410: ...ual current measurements and consequently the selectivity of the scheme the core balance current transformers should have a transformation ratio of at least 70 1 Lower transformation ratios such as 50 1 or 50 5 are not recommended Attention should be paid to make sure the measuring transformers are connected correctly so that DEFxPDEF is able to detect the fault current direction without failure A...

Page 411: ...Name Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 False Relay characteristic angle control DEFLPDEF Output signals Table 412 DEFLPDEF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Sta...

Page 412: ... inv 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 11 IEC inv 12 IEC Ext inv 13 IEC S T inv 14 IEC L T inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Operate delay time 50 200000 ms 10 50 Operate delay time Characteristic an gle 179 180 deg 1 90 Characteristic an gle Max forward angle 0 180 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward di rection Max revers...

Page 413: ...2 00 1 2 00 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter D 0 46 30 00 1 29 10 Parameter D for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Table 417 DEFLPDEF Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Minimum operate time 50 60000 ms 1...

Page 414: ...1 1 0 Multiplier for scal ing the start value Directional mode 1 Non directional 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext inv 3 ANSI Norm inv 5 ANSI Def Time 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Operate delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Operat...

Page 415: ...8 2000 Parameter A for customer program mable curve Curve parameter B 0 0000 0 7120 1 0 1217 Parameter B for customer program mable curve Curve parameter C 0 02 2 00 1 2 00 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter D 0 46 30 00 1 29 10 Parameter D for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Table 421 DEFHPDEF Non ...

Page 416: ...lt 3 Zero seq volt Reference quantity used to determine fault direction 4 2 2 12 Monitored data Table 422 DEFLPDEF Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction infor mation ANGLE_RCA FLO...

Page 417: ...rection START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction infor mation ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle between operating angle and characteris tic angle ANGLE FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle between polarizing and operating quan tity I_OPER FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Calculated oper ating current DEFHPDEF Enum 1 on 2...

Page 418: ...t Start value 58 ms 62 ms 66 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 30 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics RMS No suppression DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 Peak to Peak No suppression 1 Measurement mode default ...

Page 419: ...F Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Maximum value changed to 180 deg for the Max forward angle setting Start value step changed to 0 005 C Added a setting parameter for the Meas ured Io or Calculated Io selection and set ting parameter for the Measured Uo Cal culated Uo or Neg seq volt selection for polarization The sector default setting val ues are changed from 88 degrees to...

Page 420: ...ssion networks Fault detection is done from the residual current and residual voltage signals by monitoring the transients The operating time characteristics are according to definite time DT The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 2 3 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the O...

Page 421: ...2 Uo is calculated from phase quantities The phase VT ratio is 20 sqrt 3 kV 100 sqrt 3 V In this case Calculated Uo is selected The nominal values for residual current and residual voltage are obtained from VT ratios entered in Residual voltage Uo Configuration Analog inputs Voltage 3U VT 20 000 kV 100 V The residual voltage start value of 1 0 Un corresponds to 1 0 20 000 kV 20 000 kV in the prima...

Page 422: ...the protected feeder in the background network If the direction has no importance the value Non directional can be selected The detected fault direction FAULT_DIR is available in the monitored data view In the Transient EF mode when the start transient of the fault is detected and the Uo level exceeds the set Voltage start value Timer 1 is activated Timer 1 is kept activated until the Uo level exc...

Page 423: ...ditional transient is detected during the drop off cycle The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient peak In case there is no OPERATE activation for example the fault disappears momentarily START stays activated until the Reset delay time elapses that is reset takes place if time between transients is more than Reset delay time After OPERATE activation a fixed pulse length o...

Page 424: ...ctivated Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal ...

Page 425: ...the insulation leading to a series of cable insulation breakdowns The fault is initiated as the phaseto earth voltage exceeds the reduced insulation level of the fault point and mostly extinguishes itself as the fault current drops to zero for the first time as shown in Figure 210 As a result very short transients that is rapid changes in the form of spikes in residual current Io and in residual v...

Page 426: ...nt and voltage can be measured whereas the intermittent fault creates repetitive transients Figure 211 Example of earth fault transients including discharge and charge transient components when a permanent fault occurs in a 20 kV network in phase C 4 2 3 6 Signals Table 427 INTRPTEF Input signals Name Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN ...

Page 427: ...d Uo 2 Calculated Uo 1 Measured Uo Selection for used Uo signal Table 431 INTRPTEF Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 40 60000 ms 1 500 Reset delay time Peak counter limit 2 20 1 2 Min requirement for peak counter before start in IEF mode Min operate cur rent 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating current for transi ent detector 4 2...

Page 428: ...m 0 01 to 0 10 default changed from 0 01 to 0 20 for the Voltage start value setting Minimum value changed from 0 ms to 40 ms for the Reset delay time setting D Voltage start value description changed from Voltage start value for transient EF to Volt age start value since the start value is effec tive in both operation modes Added support for calculated Uo Uo source measured cal culated can be sel...

Page 429: ...e or non directional and the boundary lines can be tilted if required by the application This allows the optimization of the shape of the admittance characteristics for any given application The function supports two calculation algorithms for admittance The admittance calculation can be set to include or exclude the prefault zero sequence values of Io and Uo Furthermore the calculated admittance ...

Page 430: ...V 100 V The residual voltage start value of 1 0 Un corresponds to 1 0 11 547 kV 11 547 kV in the primary Example 2 Uo is calculated from phase quantities The phase VT ratio is 20 sqrt 3 kV 100 sqrt 3 V In this case Calculated Uo is selected The nominal value for residual voltage is obtained from the VT ratios entered in Residual voltage Uo Configuration Analog inputs Voltage 3U VT 20 000kV 100V Th...

Page 431: ...eres Uo fault Residual voltage during the fault Volts Io prefault Prefault residual current Amperes Uo prefault Prefault residual voltage Volts Δ Io Change in the residual current due to fault Amperes Δ Uo Change in the residual voltage due to fault Volts Traditionally admittance calculation is done with the calculation mode Normal that is with the current and voltage values directly measured duri...

Page 432: ...e measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the feeder Theoretically the measured admittance is located in the third quadrant in the admittance plane close to the im Yo axis see Figure 214 The result of Equation 28 is valid regardless of the neutral earthing method In compensated networks the compensation degree does not affect the result This enables a straightforward setting principle ...

Page 433: ...tance of the protected feeder Y Bg Phase to earth admittance of the background network For example in a 15 kV compensated network with the magnitude of the earth fault current in the protected feeder being 10 A Rf 0 Ω the theoretical value for the measured admittance during an earth fault in the reverse direction that is outside the protected feeder can be calculated Yo j I U j A kV j eFd ph 10 15...

Page 434: ...uation 33 I j I K I U Rcc eTot eFd ph 1 Equation 34 High resistance earthed network Yo Y Y Bgtot Rn Equation 35 I j I I U Rn eTot eFd ph Equation 36 Y Bgtot Sum of the phase to earth admittances YBgA YBgB YBgC of the background network Y CC Admittance of the earthing arrangement compensation coil and parallel resistor I Rcc Rated current of the parallel resistor I eFd Magnitude of the earth fault ...

Page 435: ...ance plane depending on the compensation degree see Figure 215 Before the parallel resistor is connected the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network and the losses of the coil As they are typically small the resistive part may not be sufficiently large to secure the discrimination of the fault and its direction based on the measured conducta...

Page 436: ...o Forward Fault Lcc Rcc IeFd IeTot IeTot IeFd Uo Rn Protected feeder Background network YFd YBg Figure 215 Admittance calculation during a forward fault When the network is fully compensated in compensated networks theoretically during a forward fault the imaginary part of the measured admittance equals the susceptance of the protected feeder with a negative sign The discrimination between a forwa...

Page 437: ...istor should be considered when setting the admittance characteristic When a high sensitivity of the protection is required the residual current should be measured with a cable ring core CT that is the Ferranti CT Also the use of the sensitive Io input should be considered The residual voltage measurement should be done with an open delta connection of the three single pole insulated voltage trans...

Page 438: ... The most typical characteristics are highlighted and explained in details in Chapter 4 2 4 5 Neutral admittance characteristics Operation is achieved when the calculated neutral admittance Yo moves outside the characteristic the operation area is marked with gray The settings defining the admittance characteristics are given in primary milliSiemens mS The conversion equation for the admittance fr...

Page 439: ...Figure 216 Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode Non directional 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 439 ...

Page 440: ...Figure 217 Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode Forward Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 440 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 441: ...Figure 218 Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode Reverse 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 441 ...

Page 442: ...the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPERATE output mode the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated 4 2 4 5 Neutral admittance characteristics The applied characteristic should always be set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a suitable margin However more detailed setting value selection principl...

Page 443: ... is the boundary line is a vertical line in the admittance plane A positive tilt value rotates the boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis In case of non directional conductance criterion the Conductance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over either of the boundary lines The non directional...

Page 444: ...e characteristic Left figure classical forward directional overconductance criterion Middle figure characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle Right figure characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to Bo and Directional mode to Forward Th...

Page 445: ...Circle susceptance are 0 0 mS and Conductance tilt Ang equals zero degrees that is the characteristic is a combination of an origin centered circle with two vertical overconductance boundary lines A positive tilt value for the Conductance tilt Ang setting rotates boundary lines counterclockwise from the vertical axis In case of the non directional conductance criterion the Conductance reverse sett...

Page 446: ...e defined with the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings By default the tilt angles are zero degrees that is the boundary lines are straight lines in the admittance plane A positive Conductance tilt Ang value rotates the overconductance boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis A positive Susceptance tilt Ang value rotates the oversusceptance boundary line counterclock...

Page 447: ...onal oversusceptance characteristic The non directional overconductance and non directional oversusceptance characteristic provides a good sensitivity and selectivity when the characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a proper margin The sign of the admittance characteristic settings should be considered based on the location of characteristic boundary in the...

Page 448: ...he full resonance and when the parallel resistor of the coil is not connected The residual overvoltage based start condition for the admittance protection enables a multistage protection principle For example one instance of EFPADM could be used for alarming to detect faults with a high fault resistance using a relatively low value for the Voltage start value setting Another instance of EFPADM cou...

Page 449: ...than the absolute value of the capacitive reactance of the network Parallel resistor of the compensation coil is assumed to be disconnected 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total earth fault current A Rf 0 ohm Residual voltage Resonance K 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total earth fault current A Rf 0 ohm Residual voltage Over Und...

Page 450: ...l resistor Yo Y Y j B Bgtot CC 1 73 mS Equation 43 Where the imaginary part of the admittance B depends on the tuning of the coil compensation degree The admittance characteristic is selected to be the combined overconductance and oversusceptance characteristic Box characteristics with four boundary lines Operation mode Go Bo Directional mode Non directional The admittance characteristic is set to...

Page 451: ...e reverse This setting should be set based on the value of the maximum earth fault current produced by the feeder considering possible feeder topology changes with a security margin This ensures that the admittance operating point stays inside the Box characteristics during outside fault The recommended security margin should not be lower than 1 5 Susceptance reverse 10 A 1 5 15 kV sqrt 3 1 73 mS ...

Page 452: ... value Directional mode 1 Non directional 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Operation mode 1 Yo 2 Go 3 Bo 4 Yo Go 5 Yo Bo 6 Go Bo 7 Yo Go Bo 1 Yo Operation criteria Operate delay time 60 200000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time Circle radius 0 05 500 00 mS 0 01 1 00 Admittance circle radius Circle conductance 500 00 500 00 mS 0 01 0 00 Admittance circle midpoint conduc tance Circle suscepta...

Page 453: ...ange Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 441 EFPADM Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Admittance Clc mode 1 Normal 2 Delta 1 Normal Admittance calcula tion mode Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity Min operate cur rent 0 01 1 00 xIn 0...

Page 454: ...n 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 2 4 10 Technical data Table 443 EFPADM Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f f n 1 0 or 0 01 mS In range of 0 5 100 mS Start time Minimum Typical Maximum 56 ms 60 ms 64 ms Reset time 40 ms Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value of 20 ms Suppression of harmonics 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 2 5 Rotor eart...

Page 455: ...0 or 230 V AC 50 60 Hz input source and injects a 100 V AC voltage via its coupling capacitors to the rotor circuit towards earth MREFPTOC consists of independent alarm and operating stages The operating time characteristic is according to definite time DT for both stages 4 2 5 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter val...

Page 456: ...ock the function The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets the internal timers Timer 2 Once activated the Timer activates the alarm timer The timer characteristic is according to DT When the alarm timer has reached the value set by Alarm delay time in the DT mode the ALARM output is activated If a drop off situation occurs that is a fault suddenly disappears before the a...

Page 457: ...of 130 mA at a fully developed earth fault fault resistance RE 0 one coupling capacitor C1 2μF is used The integrated current transformer of the injection device REK 510 then amplifies this current with the ratio of 1 10 to a measurable level MREFPTOC is used to measure this current An example of the measured curves with various field to earth leakage capacitance values is given in Figure 233 It i...

Page 458: ...n of the rotor earth fault resistance with various field to earth capacitance values with the measuring circuit resistance Rm 3 0 Ω fn 50 Hz Only one coupling capacitor is used Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 458 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 459: ... 2 000 xIn 0 001 0 010 Operate start value Alarm start value 0 010 2 000 xIn 0 001 0 010 Alarm start value Operate delay time 40 20000 ms 1 500 Operate delay time Alarm delay time 40 200000 ms 1 10000 Alarm delay time Table 447 MREFPTOC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 448 MREFPTOC Non group settings Adva...

Page 460: ...etardation time 50 ms Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value of 20 ms Suppression of harmonics 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 4 2 6 Harmonics based earth fault protection HAEFPTOC 4 2 6 1 Identification Description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Harmonics based earth fault pro tection HAEFPTOC Io HA 51NHA 4 2 6 2 Function block OPERATE START Io...

Page 461: ...ding to the DT characteristic The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timer or the function itself if desired 4 2 6 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of HAEFPTOC can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram...

Page 462: ...llel feeders in the substation that is in the same busbar is fed to the function through the I_REF_RES input If the locally measured harmonics current is higher than I_REF_RES the enabling signal is sent to Timer If the locally measured harmonics current is lower than I_REF_RES the fault is not in that feeder The detected situation blocks Timer internally and simultaneously also the BLKD_I_REF out...

Page 463: ...e start duration may change substantially depending on the user settings When the programmable IDMT curve is selected the operation time characteristics are defined with the Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E parameters If a drop off situation happens that is a fault suddenly disappears before the operation delay is exceeded the Timer rese...

Page 464: ...unication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated In the Block all mode the wh...

Page 465: ...ation with three analog GOOSE receivers 4 2 6 6 Signals Table 452 HAEFPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode I_REF_RES FLOAT32 0 0 Reference current Table 453 HAEFPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series...

Page 466: ... type Table 455 HAEFPTOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 100 200000 ms 10 500 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Enable reference use 0 False 1 True 0 False Enable using cur rent reference from other IEDs instead of stand alo...

Page 467: ...son status indicator HAEFPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 2 6 9 Technical data Table 459 HAEFPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f n 2 Hz 5 of the set value or 0 004 I n Start time Typically 77 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1...

Page 468: ...e earth fault power exceed the set limits and the angle φ between the residual current and the residual voltage is inside the set operating sector that is forward or backward sector The operating time characteristic can be selected to be either definite time DT or a special wattmetric type inverse definite minimum type wattmetric type IDMT The wattmetric based earth fault protection is very sensit...

Page 469: ... polarizing quantity after considering the Characteristic angle setting is in the operation sector the module sends an enabling signal to Level detector The directional operation is selected with the Directional mode setting Either the Forward or Reverse operation mode can be selected The direction of fault is calculated based on the phase angle difference between the operating quantity Io and pol...

Page 470: ...m sensitivity Characteristic angle can be set anywhere between 179 to 180 Thus the effective phase angle ϕ for calculating the residual power considering characteristic angle is according to the equation φ Uo Io Characteristic angle Equation 44 In addition the characteristic angle can be changed via the control signal RCA_CTL The RCA_CTL input is used in the compensated networks where the compensa...

Page 471: ... only when the correct angle calculation can be made If the magnitude of the operating quantity or polarizing quantity is not high enough the direction calculation is not reliable Hence the magnitude of the operating quantity is compared to the Min operate current setting and the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is compared to Min operate voltage and if both the operating quantity and polarizi...

Page 472: ...R is calculated continuously and it is available in the monitored data view The power is given in relation to nominal power calculated as Pn Un In where Un and In are obtained from the entered voltage transformer and current transformer ratios entered and depend on the Io signal Sel and Uo signal Sel settings Level detector Level detector compares the magnitudes of the measured operating quantity ...

Page 473: ...n 3U VT Io CT Pn 3U VT 3I CT Example 1 Io is measured with cable core CT 100 1A and Uo is measured from open delta connected VTs 20 sqrt 3 kV 100 sqrt 3 V 100 3 V In this case Measured Io and Measured Uo are selected The nominal values for residual current and residual voltage are obtained from CT and VT ratios Residual current Io Configuration Analog inputs Current Io CT 100 A 1 A Residual voltag...

Page 474: ...uation and the set operation time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an intern...

Page 475: ...Figure 243 Operation time curves for wattmetric IDMT for S ref set at 0 15 xPn 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 475 ...

Page 476: ...coil L If the coil is tuned exactly to the system capacitance the fault current has only a resistive component This is due to the resistances of the coil and distribution lines together with the system leakage resistances R 0 Often a resistor R L in parallel with the coil is used for increasing the fault current When a single phase to earth fault occurs the capacitance of the faulty phase is bypas...

Page 477: ...ent errors and current transformer amplitude are checked first It is not recommended to use the directional wattmetric protection in case of a ring or meshed system as the wattmetric requires a radial power flow to operate The relay characteristic angle needs to be set based on the system earthing In an unearthed network that is when the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances betwee...

Page 478: ...ng the blocking mode RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 False Relay characteristic angle control Table 462 WPWDE Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 2 7 9 Settings Table 463 WPWDE Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Current start value 0 010 5 000 xIn 0 001 0 010 Mini...

Page 479: ... cur rent 0 010 1 000 xIn 0 001 0 010 Minimum operating current Min operate volt age 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating voltage Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity Io signal Sel 1 Measured Io 2 Calculated Io 1 Measured Io Selection for used Io signal Uo signal Sel 1 Measured Uo 2 Calculated Uo 1 Measured Uo Selecti...

Page 480: ...lly 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Operate time accuracy in IDMT mode 5 0 of the set value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 4 2 8 Multifrequency admittance based earth fault protection MFADPSDE 4 2 8 1 Identification Description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C3...

Page 481: ...th dominantly fundamental frequency content as well as transient intermittent and restriking earth faults MFADPSDE can be used as an alternative solution to transient or intermittent function INTRPTEF MFADPSDE supports fault direction indication both in operate and non operate direction which may be utilized during fault location process The inbuilt transient detector can be used to identify restr...

Page 482: ...which exceeds the maximum healthy state zero sequence voltage value taking into consideration of possible network topology changes compensation coil and parallel resistor switching status and compensation degree variations As an alternative for internal residual zero sequence overvoltage based start condition MFADPSDE function can also be externally released by utilizing the RELEASE input In this ...

Page 483: ...susceptance Im Im Y I U j B n n n o n 0 0 0 3 Equation 48 where n 2 3 5 7 and 9 Y n 0 The nth harmonic frequency neutral admittance phasor In 0 The nth harmonic frequency zero sequence current phasor U n 0 The nth harmonic frequency zero sequence voltage phasor Bo n The nth harmonic frequency susceptance Im Y n 0 For fault direction determination the fundamental frequency admittance and harmonic s...

Page 484: ...ntermittent and restriking earth faults with dominantly non sinusoidal or transient content It is equally valid during continuous stable earth faults The concept of CPS is illustrated in Figure 248 It is the result of adding values of the measured sum admittance phasors together in phasor format in chronological order during the fault Using the discrete sum admittance phasors Yosum in different ti...

Page 485: ... provides universal applicability that is it is valid both in compensated and unearthed networks also if the compensation coil is temporarily switched off The tilt of the operation sector is defined with setting Tilt angle to compensate the measurement errors of residual current and voltage transformers The typical setting value of 5 degrees is recommended but it should always reflect the actual m...

Page 486: ...out harmonics in the fault quantities when the network is compensated As no harmonic components are present the phase angle of the accumulated phasor is determined by the compensation degree of the network With high degree of overcompensation the phasor turns towards the negative Im Yo axis as phasor 4 Figure 249 Directional characteristic of MFADPSDE The residual current is recommended to be meas...

Page 487: ...er faulty feeder has been tripped cross country fault has been transformed back to a single phase earth fault The direction of the MFADPSDE function is supervised by a settable current magnitude threshold The operate current used in the magnitude supervision is measured with a special filtering method which provides very stable residual current estimate regardless of the fault type This stabilized...

Page 488: ...Adaptive is selected the method adapts the principle of magnitude supervision automatically to the system earthing condition In case the phase angle of accumulated sum admittance phasor is greater than 45 degrees the set minimum operate current threshold is compared to the amplitude of Io stab 1 see Figure 250 In case the phase angle of accumulated sum admittance phasor is below 45 degrees the set...

Page 489: ...he network corresponding to the resistive current of the parallel resistor of the coil and the natural losses of the system typically in order of 1 5 of the total capacitive earth fault current of the network p security factor 0 5 0 7 This setting should be set based on the total resistive earth fault current of the network including the parallel resistor of the coil and the network losses It must...

Page 490: ...ors especially phase displacement Transient detector The Transient detector module is used for detecting transients in the residual current and zero sequence voltage signals Whenever transient is detected this is indicated with the PEAK_IND output When the number of detected transients equals or exceeds the Peak counter limit setting without the function being reset depending on the drop off time ...

Page 491: ... start value defines the basic sensitivity of the MFADPSDE function In General EF mode the operate timer is started in the following conditions Earth fault is detected by the General Fault Criterion GFC Fault direction equals Directional mode setting Estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds the set Min operate current level The START output is activated once Start delay ...

Page 492: ...constant of post fault oscillations is very long network losses and damping is low To keep the operate timer activated between current spikes during intermittent or restriking earth fault the Reset delay time should be set to a value exceeding the maximum expected time interval between fault spikes obtained at full resonance condition Recommended value is at least 300 ms Figure 252 Operation in Ge...

Page 493: ... is not valid in the Alarming EF mode Reset timer is started if any of the above three conditions are not valid In case the fault is transient and self extinguishes START output stays activated until the elapse of reset timer setting Reset delay time In case detection of temporary earth faults is not desired the activation of START output can be delayed with setting Start delay time To keep the op...

Page 494: ... in Intermittent EF mode The application of Intermittent EF mode is limited to low ohmic intermittent or restriking earth faults In the Intermittent EF mode the operate timer is started when the following conditions are met Transient is detected by the Transient detector indicated with PEAK_IND output Earth fault is detected by the GFC at time of transient Fault direction equals Directional mode s...

Page 495: ...rrent exceeds set Minimum operate current setting The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient Function is reset if time between current peaks is more that Reset delay time or if the General Fault Criterion release is reset After OPERATE output activation START and OPERATE outputs are reset immediately at the falling edge of General Fault Criterion release that is when zero s...

Page 496: ...communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPE...

Page 497: ...ay time elapses Activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the BLK_EF output and resets Timer Figure 255 Activation of BLK_EF output indication that fault is located opposite to the set operate direction 4 2 8 5 Application MFADPSDE provides selective directional earth fault protection for high impedance earthed networks that is for compensated unearthed and high resistance earthed systems It can b...

Page 498: ...e inbuilt transient detector can be used to identify restriking or intermittent earth faults and discriminate them from permanent or continuous earth faults The direction of MFADPSDE can be set as forward or reverse The operation characteristic is defined by a tilted operation sector which is universally valid both in unearthed and compensated networks The tilt of the operation sector should be se...

Page 499: ...t transient detection indication 4 2 8 7 Settings Table 470 MFADPSDE Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Voltage start value 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 10 Voltage start value Operate delay time 60 1200000 ms 10 500 Operate delay time Table 471 MFADPSDE Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit...

Page 500: ... Uo Selection for used Uo signal Peak counter limit 2 20 1 2 Peak counter limit for restriking EF Start delay time 30 60000 ms 1 30 Start delay time Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 500 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity 4 2 8 8 Monitored data Table 474 MFADPSDE Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of s...

Page 501: ...haracteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage f n 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 U n Start time Typically 35 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 4 3 Differential protection 1 Includes the delay of the signal output contact results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 1MRS757644 H Protect...

Page 502: ...ction The stability of the differential protection is enhanced by a DC restraint feature This feature decreases the sensitivity of the differential protection optionally for a temporary time period to avoid an unnecessary disconnection of the machine during the external faults that have a fault current with high DC currents MPDIF also includes a CT saturation based blocking which prevents unnecess...

Page 503: ...I d is obtained using the equation assuming that the positive direction of the current is towards the machine I I I d 1 2 Equation 58 During normal conditions there is no fault in the area protected by the function block so the currents I1 and I2 are equal and the differential current I d 0 However in practice some differential current exists due to inaccuracies in the current transformer on the p...

Page 504: ... at an overvoltage transformer fed motor or an external fault may saturate the current transformers The uneven saturation of the star and line side CTs for example due to burden differences may lead to a differential current which can cause a differential protection to operate This module blocks the operation of MPDIF biased low stage internally in case of the CT saturation Once the blocking is ac...

Page 505: ...d for the protection of operation the higher the load current Based on the conditions checked from the through fault module the DC component detection module and the CT saturation based blocking modules the biased low stage module decides whether the differential current is due to the internal faults or some false reason In case of detection of the TF DC or CT saturation the internal differential ...

Page 506: ...3 For a stabilizing current higher than End section 1 but lower than End section 2 I I Lowoperatevalue I Ir End section Slope doperate r b 1 s section 2 Equation 64 For higher stabilizing current values exceeding End section 2 I I Lowoperatevalue End section End section S d operate r 2 1 l lope section I I End section Slope section b r 2 2 3 Equation 65 When the differential current exceeds the op...

Page 507: ...when the instantaneous peak values of the differential current exceed 2 5 High operate value The factor 2 5 1 8 2 is due to the maximum asymmetric short circuit current The OPERATE output is always activated when the OPR_HS output activates The internal blocking signals of the function block do not prevent the operation of the instantaneous stage When required the operate signal due to instantaneo...

Page 508: ...s of the stator windings normally causes large fault currents The short circuit creates a risk of damages to the insulation windings and stator core The large short circuit currents cause large current forces which can damage other components in the machine The short circuit can also initiate explosion and fire When a short circuit occurs in a machine there is a damage that has to be repaired The ...

Page 509: ...hort circuit it gives an increased risk of a power system collapse Besides there is a production loss for every unwanted trip of the machine Therefore preventing the unwanted disconnection of machines has a great economical value Recommendations for current transformers The more important the object to be protected is the more attention is paid to the current transformers It is not normally possib...

Page 510: ...nsformer to be used in differential protection must fulfill the requirement F K Ik T e a r dc T m Tdc max ω 1 1 Equation 67 Ik max The maximum through going fault current in I R at which the protection is not allowed to operate T dc The primary DC time constant related to Ik max ω The angular frequency that is 2 x π x f n T m The time to saturate that is the duration of the saturation free transfo...

Page 511: ...ce is very probable It is assumed to be 40 percent here On the other hand the fault current is now smaller and since the ratio of the resistance and reactance is greater in this location having a full DC offset is not possible Furthermore the DC time constant T dc of the fault current is now smaller assumed to be 50 ms here Assuming the maximum fault current is 30 percent lower than in the bus fau...

Page 512: ... close to each other as possible If high inrush or start currents with high DC components pass through the protected object when it is connected to the network special attention is required for the performance and the burdens of the current transformers and the settings of the function block Connection of current transformers The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as Ty...

Page 513: ...Figure 260 Connection of current transformer of Type 1 example 1 Figure 261 Connection of current transformer of Type 1 example 2 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 513 ...

Page 514: ...Figure 262 Connection of current transformer of Type 2 example 1 Figure 263 Connection of current transformer of Type 2 example 2 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 514 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 515: ...ort circuit in a power line the short circuit current contains a DC component The magnitude of the DC component depends on the phase angle when the short circuit occurs Figure 265 shows the secondary current of the CT in the fault situation Because of the DC component the flux reaches its maximum value at 0 07 seconds causing saturation As the DC component decays the CT recovers gradually from the...

Page 516: ... set OPR_HS BOOLEAN Operate from high set INT_BLKD BOOLEAN Internal block status 4 3 1 7 Settings Table 478 MPDIF Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Low operate value 5 30 Ir 1 5 Basic setting for the stabilized stage start High operate value 100 1000 Ir 10 500 Instantaneous stage operate value Slope section 2 10 50 1 30 Slope of the second line of the operat...

Page 517: ...e 481 MPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description OPR_A BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Operate phase A OPR_B BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Operate phase B OPR_C BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Operate phase C INT_BLKD_A BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Internal block status phase A INT_BLKD_B BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Internal block status phase B INT_BLKD_C BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Internal block status phase C ID_A F...

Page 518: ...m 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status IL1 diff 1 FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 Measured differential current amplitude phase IL1 IL2 diff 1 FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 Measured differential current amplitude phase IL2 IL3 diff 1 FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 Measured differential current amplitude phase IL3 IL1 bias 1 FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL1 IL2 bias 1 FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 Measur...

Page 519: ...t clearance of faults while remaining stable with high currents passing through the protected zone increasing errors on current measuring The second harmonic restraint together with the waveform based algorithms ensures that the low stage does not operate due to the transformer inrush currents The fifth harmonic restraint ensures that the low stage does not operate on apparent differential current...

Page 520: ... described by using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 267 Functional module diagram Differential calculation TR2PTDF operates phase wise on a difference of incoming and outgoing currents The positive direction of the currents is towards the protected object Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 520 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 521: ... makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults I I I b W W 1 2 2 Equation 70 If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current or if the phase angle between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero in a normal situation the phase difference is 180 degrees a fault has most certainly occurred in the area protected by the differential protection relay...

Page 522: ...Winding 1 type setting is Y Winding 2 type is d and Clock number is Clk Num 11 This is compensated internally by giving winding 1 internal compensation value 0 and winding 2 internal compensation value 30 I I I I I I I I I L mLV L L L mLV L L L mLV L L 1 1 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 Equation 72 The Y side currents stay untouched while the d side currents are compensated to match the currents actually flo...

Page 523: ...zero sequence component of the phase currents is calculated and reduced for each phase current I I x I I I I I x I I I I I L m L L L L L m L L L L L m L 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 2 3 x I I I L L L Equation 73 In many cases with the earthed neutral of a wye winding it is possible to make the compensation so that a zero sequence component of the phase currents is automatically eliminated...

Page 524: ...tion information is corrupted for some reason the automatic tap changer position adaptation does not try to adapt to any unrealistic position values Figure 269 Simplified presentation of the high voltage and medium voltage windings with demonstration of the Max winding tap Min winding tap and Tap nominal parameters The position value is available through the Monitored data view on LHMI or through ...

Page 525: ...ulate the weighted ratios of the second harmonic to the fundamental component for each phase using the original ratios of the phases The latter option is used here The second harmonic ratios I_2H_RAT_x are given in Monitored data The ratio to be used for second harmonic blocking is therefore calculated as a weighted average on the basis of the ratios calculated from the differential currents of th...

Page 526: ...k 5 H parameter Figure 270 The limits and operation of the fifth harmonic blocking when both blocking and deblocking features are enabled using the Harmonic deblock 5 H control parameter The fifth harmonic blocking has a hysteresis to avoid rapid fluctuation between TRUE and FALSE The blocking also has a counter which counts the required consecutive fulfillments of the condition When the condition...

Page 527: ... compensated Transformer no load current Transformer inrush currents Transformer overexcitation in overvoltage Underfrequency situations CT saturation at high currents passing through the transformer The differential current caused by CT errors or tap changer positions increases at the same percent ratio as the load current In the protection of generators the false differential current can be caus...

Page 528: ...section 2 and the setting of the second turning point of the operating characteristic curve End section 2 the first turning point is fixed The settings are the same for all the phases When the differential current exceeds the operating value determined by the operating characteristic the differential function awakes If the differential current stays above the operating value continuously for a sui...

Page 529: ...he BLK_OPR_LS or BLOCK external control signals Ib2 Id1 Id2 Ib3 Id3 100 200 300 100 200 300 400 500 End section 2 End section 1 Low operate value Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Id Ir Ib Ir Figure 272 Operation characteristic for biased operation of TR2PTDF The Low operate value of the biased stage of the differential function is determined according to the operation characteristic Low operate value...

Page 530: ...s of percent This should be considered in Low operate value In section 2 where End section 1 Ib In End section 2 is called the influence area of Slope section 2 In this section variations in the starting ratio affect the slope of the characteristic that is how big a change in the differential current is required for tripping in comparison with the change in the load current The starting ratio shou...

Page 531: ...urrent is small compared to the differential current or the phase angle between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero in a normal situation the phase difference is 180 degrees a fault has occurred in the area protected by TR2PTDF Then the operation value set for the instantaneous stage is automatically halved and the internal blocking signals of the biased stage are inhibited...

Page 532: ...TRUE the operation of the function is blocked but measurement output signals are still updated When the BLK_OPR_LS input is active TRUE TR2PTDF operates normally except that the OPR_LS output is not active or activated in any circumstance Additionally the OPERATE output can be activated only by the instantaneous high stage if not blocked as well When the BLK_OPR_HS input is active TRUE TR2PTDF ope...

Page 533: ...to the current leaving the transformer A correct analysis of fault conditions by TR2PTDF must consider the changes to voltages currents and phase angles The traditional transformer differential protection functions required auxiliary transformers for the correction of the phase shift and turns ratio The numerical microprocessor based differential algorithm implemented in TR2PTDF compensates for bo...

Page 534: ...l Generally this requires the interposing CTs to handle the vector group and or ratio mismatch between the two windings feeders The accuracy limit factor for the interposing CT must fulfill the same requirements as the main CTs Please note that the interposing CT imposes an additional burden to the main CTs The most important rule in these applications is that at least 75 percent of the short circ...

Page 535: ...er currents to a two winding protection relay The fundamental frequency component is numerically filtered with a Fourier filter DFT The filter suppresses frequencies other than the set fundamental frequency and therefore the protection relay is not adapted for measuring the output of the frequency converter that is TR2PTDF is not suited for protecting of a power transformer or motor fed by a frequ...

Page 536: ...d 1 and CT ration Cor Wnd 2 settings First the rated load of the power transformer must be calculated on both sides when the apparent power and phase to phase voltage are known I S U nT n n 3 Equation 77 I nT rated load of the power transformer S n rated power of the power transformer U n rated phase to phase voltage Next the settings for the CT ratio correction can be calculated CT ratio correcti...

Page 537: ... 2 A LV side I nT_Wnd2 25 MVA 1 732 x 21 kV 687 3 A Settings CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 300 A 131 2 A 2 29 CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 1000 A 687 3 A 1 45 Vector group matching and elimination of the zero sequence component The vector group of the power transformer is numerically matched on the high voltage and low voltage sides by means of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type and Clock number settings Thus no interp...

Page 538: ...6 Not needed YNy6 YN y Clk Num 6 HV side YNyn6 YN yn Clk Num 6 HV LV side Yyn6 Y yn Clk Num 6 LV side Yy8 Y y Clk Num 8 Not needed YNy8 YN y Clk Num 8 Not needed YNyn8 YN yn Clk Num 8 Not needed Yyn8 Y yn Clk Num 8 Not needed Yy10 Y y Clk Num 10 Not needed YNy10 YN y Clk Num 10 Not needed YNyn10 YN yn Clk Num 10 Not needed Yyn10 Y yn Clk Num 10 Not needed Yd1 Y d Clk Num 1 Not needed YNd1 YN d Clk...

Page 539: ... Num 5 Not needed YNz5 YN z Clk Num 5 Not needed YNzn5 YN zn Clk Num 5 LV side Yzn5 Y zn Clk Num 5 Not needed Yz7 Y z Clk Num 7 Not needed YNz7 YN z Clk Num 7 Not needed YNzn7 YN zn Clk Num 7 LV side Yzn7 Y zn Clk Num 7 Not needed Yz11 Y z Clk Num 11 Not needed YNz11 YN z Clk Num 11 Not needed YNzn11 YN zn Clk Num 11 LV side Yzn11 Y zn Clk Num 11 Not needed Zy1 Z y Clk Num 1 Not needed Zyn1 Z yn C...

Page 540: ...zn Clk Num 8 Not needed Dz10 D z Clk Num 10 Not needed Dzn10 D zn Clk Num 10 Not needed Zd0 Z d Clk Num 0 Not needed ZNd0 ZN d Clk Num 0 HV side Zd2 Z d Clk Num 2 Not needed ZNd2 ZN d Clk Num 2 Not needed Zd4 Z d Clk Num 4 Not needed ZNd4 ZN d Clk Num 4 Not needed Zd6 Z d Clk Num 6 Not needed ZNd6 ZN d Clk Num 6 HV side Zd8 Z d Clk Num 8 Not needed ZNd8 ZN d Clk Num 8 Not needed Zd10 Z d Clk Num 1...

Page 541: ... zn Clk Num 10 Not needed Zzn10 Z zn Clk Num 10 Not needed Yy0 Y y Clk Num 0 Not needed YNy0 YN y Clk Num 0 HV side YNyn0 YN yn Clk Num 0 HV LV side Yyn0 Y yn Clk Num 0 LV side Yy2 Y y Clk Num 2 Not needed YNy2 YN y Clk Num 2 Not needed YNyn2 YN yn Clk Num 2 Not needed Yyn2 Y yn Clk Num 2 Not needed Yy4 Y y Clk Num 4 Not needed YNy4 YN y Clk Num 4 Not needed YNyn4 YN yn Clk Num 4 Not needed Yyn4 Y...

Page 542: ... D d Clk Num 6 Not needed Dd8 D d Clk Num 8 Not needed Dd10 D d Clk Num 10 Not needed Dy1 D y Clk Num 1 Not needed Dyn1 D yn Clk Num 1 Not needed Dy5 D y Clk Num 5 Not needed Dyn5 D yn Clk Num 5 Not needed Dy7 D y Clk Num 7 Not needed Dyn7 D yn Clk Num 7 Not needed Dy11 D y Clk Num 11 Not needed Dyn11 D yn Clk Num 11 Not needed Yz1 Y z Clk Num 1 Not needed YNz1 YN z Clk Num 1 Not needed YNzn1 YN z...

Page 543: ...connection type Winding 1 type Winding 2 type and Clock number for the connection group compensation can be verified by monitoring the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1 I_ANGL_B1_C1 I_ANGL_C1_A1 I_ANGL_A2_B2 I_ANGL_B2_C2 I_ANGL_C2_A2 I_ANGL_A1_A2 I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 while injecting the current into the transformer These angle values are calculated from the compensated currents See signal descrip...

Page 544: ...the same value of 120 the polarity of one current transformer can be wrong For instance if the polarity of the current transformer measuring IL2 is wrong I_ANGL_A1_B1 shows 60 deg I_ANGL_B1_C1 shows 60 deg and I_ANGL_C1_A1 shows 120 deg When the phase order and the angle values are correct the angle values I_ANGL_A1_A2 I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 usually show 180 deg There can be several reasons...

Page 545: ...en of the current transformer S a The actual burden of the current transformer Example 1 The rated burden Sn of the current transformer 5P20 is 10 VA the secondary rated current is 5A the internal resistance Rin 0 07 Ω and the accuracy limit factor Fn corresponding to the rated burden is 20 5P20 Thus the internal burden of the current transformer is Sin 5A 2 0 07 Ω 1 75 VA The input impedance of t...

Page 546: ...den of the phase current transformer is used in differential protection The parameter r is the maximum remanence flux density in the CT core in p u from saturation flux density The value of the parameter r depends on the magnetic material used and on the construction of the CT For instance if the value of r 0 4 the remanence flux density can be 40 percent of the saturation flux density The manufac...

Page 547: ...the line In this case the existence of remanence is very probable It is assumed to be 40 percent here On the other hand the fault current is now smaller and since the ratio of the resistance and reactance is greater in this location having a full DC offset is not possible Furthermore the DC time constant Tdc of the fault current is now smaller assumed to be 50 ms here Assuming a maximum fault curr...

Page 548: ...ts pass through the protected object when it is connected to the network special attention is required for the performance and the burdens of the current transformers and for the settings of the function block 4 3 2 6 CT connections and transformation ratio correction The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as Type 1 and Type 2 If the positive directions of the winding 1...

Page 549: ...Figure 281 Connection example of current transformers of Type 1 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 549 ...

Page 550: ...Figure 282 Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 1 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 550 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 551: ...Figure 283 Connection of current transformers of Type 2 and example of the currents during an external fault 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 551 ...

Page 552: ...can be corrected on both sides of the power transformer with the CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 settings 4 3 2 7 Signals Table 484 TR2PTDF Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A1 SIGNAL 0 Phase A primary cur rent I_B1 SIGNAL 0 Phase B primary cur rent I_C1 SIGNAL 0 Phase C primary cur rent Table continues on the next page Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 552 620 series Technic...

Page 553: ...restraint block status BLKD5H BOOLEAN 5th harmonic restraint block status BLKDWAV BOOLEAN Waveform blocking status 4 3 2 8 Settings Table 486 TR2PTDF Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description High operate value 500 3000 Ir 10 1000 Instantaneous stage setting Low operate value 5 50 Ir 1 20 Basic setting for biased operation Slope section 2 10 50 1 30 Slope of the sec...

Page 554: ...ing in case of severe overvoltage Table 488 TR2PTDF Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On CT connection type 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 1 Type 1 CT connection type Determined by the directions of the connected cur rent transformers Winding 1 type 1 Y 2 YN 3 D 4 Z 5 ZN 1 Y Connection of the HV side windings Winding 2 type 1 y...

Page 555: ...on number resulting the maximum num ber of effective winding turns on the side of the transformer where the tap changer is Tap nominal 36 36 1 18 The nominal posi tion of the tap changer resulting the default trans formation ratio of the transformer as if there was no tap changer Tapped winding 1 Not in use 2 Winding 1 3 Winding 2 1 Not in use The winding where the tap changer is connected to Step...

Page 556: ...rmonic restraint blocking for PHAR LN phase A BLKD2HPHAR_B BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True 2nd harmonic restraint blocking for PHAR LN phase B BLKD2HPHAR_C BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True 2nd harmonic restraint blocking for PHAR LN phase C BLKD5HPHAR BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True 5th harmonic restraint blocking for PHAR LN combined BLKD5HPHAR_A BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True 5th harmonic restraint blocking for PHAR LN phase A BLK...

Page 557: ...1_A1 FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Current phase angle phase C to A winding 1 I_ANGL_A2_B2 FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Current phase angle phase A to B winding 2 I_ANGL_B2_C2 FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Current phase angle phase B to C winding 2 I_ANGL_C2_A2 FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Current phase angle phase C to A winding 2 I_ANGL_A1_A2 FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Current phase angle diff between winding ...

Page 558: ...ly 0 96 Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 11 Technical revision history Table 492 TR2PTDF Technical revision history Technical revision Change B 5th harmonic and waveform blockings taken to event data set C Added setting Slope section 3 Added input TAP_POS 4 3 3 Numerical stabilized low impedance restricted earth fault protection LREFPNDF 4 3 3 1 Identification Fu...

Page 559: ...sformer inrush situation It is also possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 3 3 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of LREFPNDF can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 286...

Page 560: ...sformer and neutral current transformer residual current in the analog input settings is taken into account by the function with the properly set analog input setting values During an earth fault in the protected area the currents ΣI and Io are directed towards the protected area The factor cosφ is 1 when the phase difference of the residual current and the neutral current is 180 degrees that is w...

Page 561: ...operation characteristic ID IB is constant at 50 percent Different operating characteristics are possible based on the Operate value setting For the protection of the trip the measured neutral current has to be above 4 percent When the condition has been fulfilled the measured neutral current must stay above 2 percent otherwise reset time is started To calculate the directional differential curren...

Page 562: ...n The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking...

Page 563: ... is Type 1 The connection examples of Type 1 are as shown in figures Figure 289 and Figure 290 If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents equate the CT connection type setting parameter is Type 2 The connection examples of Type 2 are as shown in figures Figure 291 and Figure 292 The default value of the CT connection type setting is Type 1 In case the earth...

Page 564: ... fault situation Both earthings are inside the area to be protected Figure 290 Connection of the current transformers of Type 1 The connected phase currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an external earth fault situation Both earthings are outside the area to be protected Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 564 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 565: ...tions at an external earth fault situation Phase earthing is outside and neutral earthing is inside the area to be protected Internal and external faults LREFPNDF does not respond to any faults outside the protected zone An external fault is detected by checking the phase angle difference of the neutral current and the sum of the phase currents When the difference is less than 90 degrees the opera...

Page 566: ...t Uzs Figure 293 Current flow in all the CTs for an external fault A B C a b c Ia 0 I Ib 0 I c 0 I Uzs Io zone of protection Ifault IN Io IN Reference is Neutral Current Restrain for external fault Operate for internal fault For internal fault s o u r c e Figure 294 Current flow in all the CTs for an internal fault Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 566 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 567: ... transformer to be protected increases momentarily when the voltage returns to normal after the clearance of a fault outside the protected area The sympathetic inrush is caused by the energization of a transformer running in parallel with the protected transformer already connected to the network Blocking the starting of the restricted earth fault protection at the magnetizing inrush is based on t...

Page 568: ...nit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On CT connection type 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 2 Type 2 CT connection type Table 498 LREFPNDF Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 3 3 8 Monitored data Table 499 LREFPNDF Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT3...

Page 569: ...ical revision history Table 501 LREFPNDF Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Unit for setting Start value 2 H changed from In to C Internal Improvement 4 3 4 High impedance based restricted earth fault protection HREFPDIF 4 3 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number High impedance based restricted ear...

Page 570: ... exceeds the Operate value setting the level detector sends an enable signal to the timer module to start the definite timer Timer Once activated the timer activates the START output The time characteristic is according to DT When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum operate time the OPERATE output is activated If the fault disappears before the module operates the reset timer ...

Page 571: ...protection is its high sensitivity Sensitivities of close to 1 0 percent can be achieved whereas normal differential IEDs have their minimum sensitivity in the range of 5 to 10 percent The level for HREFPDIF is dependent on the current transformers magnetizing currents The restricted earth fault protection is also very fast due to the simple measuring principle as it is a unit type of protection T...

Page 572: ...zone of protection The stabilization is obtained by a stabilizing resistor in the differential circuit This method requires that all the CTs used have a similar magnetizing characteristic same ratio and relatively high knee point voltage CTs on each sides are connected in parallel along with a relay measuring branch as shown in Figure 298 The measuring branch is a series connection of stabilizing ...

Page 573: ... branch is below the relay operating current during out of zone faults As a result the operation is stable during the saturation and can still be sensitive at the non saturated parts of the current waveform as shown in Figure 299 In case of an internal fault the fault current cannot circulate through the CTs but it flows through the measuring branch and the protection operates Partial CT saturatio...

Page 574: ...tion 85 I kmax the highest through fault current n the turns ratio of the CT R in the secondary internal resistance of the CT R m the resistance of the longest loop of secondary circuit Additionally it is required that the current transformers knee point voltages U k are at least twice the stabilizing voltage value U s 4 3 4 7 Recommendations for current transformers The sensitivity and reliabilit...

Page 575: ...e from growing too high it is advisable to use current transformers the secondary winding resistance of which is of the same size as the resistance of the measuring loop As the impedance of the IED alone is low a stabilizing resistor is needed The value of the stabilizing resistor is calculated with the formula R U I s s rs Equation 88 R s the resistance of the stabilizing resistor U s the stabili...

Page 576: ...highest through fault should be known However when the necessary data are not available approximates can be used Small power transformers I kmax 16 x I n corresponds to z k 6 and infinite grid Large power transformers I kmax 12 x I n corresponds to z k 8 and infinite grid Generators and motors I kmax 6 x I n Where I n rated current and z k short circuit impedance of the protected object 2 The rate...

Page 577: ...age U max ignoring the CT saturation during the fault is calculated with the equation U I n R R R I n R k in in m s k in s max max max Equation 92 I kmaxin the maximum fault current inside the zone in primary amps n the turns ration of the CT R in the internal resistance of the CT in ohms R m the resistance of the longest loop of the CT secondary circuit in ohms R s the resistance of the stabilize...

Page 578: ...y current is 1200 A and the secondary current is 5 A R in 0 26 Ω value given by the manufacturer U k 40 V value given by the manufacturer I e 0 055 A value given by the manufacturer R m 1 81 Ω km 2 0 05 km 0 181 Ω 0 18 Ω U V V s 12600 0 26 0 18 240 23 According to the criterion the value of U k should be 2 U s 2 23 V 46 V It depends on if the stability of the scheme is achieved with U k 40 V Other...

Page 579: ..._ 2 0 11 5 2 2 The resistance of the stabilizing resistor can be calculated R s U s I rs 34 V 0 11 A 309 Ω However the sensitivity can be calculated more accurately when the actual values of I u and I rs are known The stabilizing resistor of the relay is chosen freely in the above example and it is assumed that the resistor value is not fixed Example 2a n n m u s Figure 301 Restricted earth fault ...

Page 580: ...arlier I m 0 5 I e gives a realistic value for I prim in Equation 90 If I u 0 and I rs m 0 5 I e the value for the sensitivity is I prim n m I e 1000 4 0 012 A 48 A 6 x I n I rs 4 0 5 0 012 A 0 024 A The setting value can be calculated with Operatevalue I I A A rs CT n _ 2 0 024 1 2 4 The resistance of the stabilizing resistor can now be calculated R s U s I rs 78 V 2 I e 78 V 2 0 012 A 3250 Ω Exa...

Page 581: ...he nominal current Minimum operate time 40 300000 ms 1 40 Minimum operate time Table 505 HREFPDIF Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 506 HREFPDIF Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 3 4 11 Monitored data Table 5...

Page 582: ...e 509 HREFPDIF Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement 4 3 5 High impedance differential protection HIxPDIF 4 3 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number High impedance differential pro tection for phase A HIAPDIF dHi_A 87A High impedance differential pro tection...

Page 583: ...en the differential current exceeds the set limit The operate time characteristics are according to definite time DT The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs timer or the whole function 4 3 5 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of ...

Page 584: ...ivated Timer activates the START output The time characteristic is according to DT When the operation timer reaches the value set by Minimum operate time the OPERATE output is activated If the fault disappears before the module operates the reset timer is activated If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time the operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated Timer calc...

Page 585: ...he high impedance principle is used for differential protection due to its capability to manage the through faults also with the heavy current transformer CT saturation For current transformer recommendations see the Requirements for measurement transformers section in this manual High impedance principle The phase currents are measured from both the incoming and the outgoing feeder sides of the b...

Page 586: ...eeder To keep it simple the voltage dependent resistor R u is not included The wiring resistances are presented as total wiring resistances R m1 and R m2 R m1 is the maximum wiring resistance concerning all incoming feeder sets whereas R m2 is the maximum wiring resistance concerning all outgoing feeder sets The lower part of Figure 305 shows the voltage balance when there is no fault in the syste...

Page 587: ...rough only one CT its secondary emf magnetizes the opposite CT that is E 1 E 2 Id Rs Rm1 Rin1 Rin2 Rm2 E1 U E2 U E1 E2 Figure 306 Equivalent circuit in case of in zone fault Figure 307 shows CT saturation at a through fault that is out of zone situation The magnetization impedance of a saturated CT is almost zero The saturated CT winding can be presented as a short circuit When one CT is saturated...

Page 588: ...remains stable non operative during the saturated parts of the CT secondary current waveform the non saturated part of the current waveform causes the protection to operate Figure 308 Secondary waveform of a saturated CT The secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation voltage of the CTs connection wires and the protection relay because of the stabilizing resistance and CT saturation ...

Page 589: ... the total instantaneous incoming current is equal to the total instantaneous outgoing current and the difference current is negligible A fault in the busbar results in an imbalance between the incoming and the outgoing current The difference current flows through the protection relay which generates a trip signal Figure 309 Phase segregated single busbar protection employing high impedance differ...

Page 590: ...hus the current flowing through the bus coupler needs to be considered in calculating differential current During normal condition the summation of the current on each bus section is zero However if there is a fault in any busbar section the difference current is no longer zero and the protection operates Figure 310 Differential protection on busbar with bus coupler Single phase representation 4 3...

Page 591: ... I kmax 25 kA 10 feeders per protected zone including bus coupler and incomer CT data is assumed to be CT 2000 1 A R in 15 75 Ω U kn 436 V I e 7 mA at U kn R m 1Ω The stabilizing voltage is calculated using the formula 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 591 ...

Page 592: ...4 Equation 97 The resistance of the stabilizing resistor is calculated based on Equation 98 R V A S 209 37 0 034 6160 Ω Equation 98 The calculated value is the maximum value for the stabilizing resistor If the value is not available the next available value below should be selected and the protection relay setting current is tuned according to the selected resistor For example in this case the res...

Page 593: ... that to be approximately 2 mA at stabilizing voltage Iu A 0 002 Equation 104 The sensitivity of the protection can be recalculated taking into account the leakage current through the VDR as per Equation 105 I A A A A prim 2000 0 035 10 0 0034 0 002 142 Equation 105 4 3 5 7 Signals Table 510 HIAPDIF Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Bloc...

Page 594: ...rate START BOOLEAN Start 4 3 5 8 Settings Table 516 HIAPDIF Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operate value 1 0 200 0 In 1 0 5 0 Operate value per centage of the nominal current Minimum operate time 20 300000 ms 10 20 Minimum operate time Table 517 HIAPDIF Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on...

Page 595: ...meter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operate value 1 0 200 0 In 1 0 5 0 Operate value per centage of the nominal current Minimum operate time 20 300000 ms 10 20 Minimum operate time Table 523 HICPDIF Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 524 HICPDIF Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Rang...

Page 596: ...r 0 002 I n Start time Minimum Typical Maximum I Fault 2 0 set Start value 12 ms 16 ms 24 ms I Fault 10 set Start value 10 ms 12 ms 14 ms Reset time 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 4 3 5 11 Technical revision history Table 529 HIxPDIF Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Function nam...

Page 597: ...or motors MHZPDIF starts and operates when any of the three phase differential currents ID_A ID_B or ID_C exceeds the set limit The operation timer characteristic is according to the definite time DT This function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs timers or the function itself 4 3 6 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the...

Page 598: ...ge through faults with a heavy current transformer CT saturation High impedance principle The high impedance principle is stable for all types of faults outside the protection zone The stabilization is obtained by a stabilizing resistor in the differential circuit This method requires all the CTs to have a similar magnetizing characteristic same ratio and a relatively high knee point voltage The C...

Page 599: ...can easily exceed the isolation voltage of the CTs connection wires and the protection relay To limit this voltage a voltage dependent resistor VDR is used The whole scheme that is the stabilizing resistor voltage dependent resistor and wiring must be adequately maintained operation and insulation tested regularly to be able to withstand the high voltage pulses that appear during an internal fault...

Page 600: ...is no fault within the protected zone When a fault occurs within the protected zone the currents flowing through the core balance transformer amplify each other and the differential protection operates Figure 316 Three phase differential protection for motors based on fluxbalancing principle The advantage of this scheme is that the CT rated primary current can be selected smaller than the rated cu...

Page 601: ...d the burden of the branches are not equal the maximum burden equal to 3 2 Ω should be used for calculating the stabilized voltage Figure 317 High impedance differential protection with different CT burden value on each branch The stabilizing voltage that is the voltage appearing across the measuring branch during an out of zone fault is calculated assuming that one of the CTs connected in paralle...

Page 602: ...esistor U s The stabilizing voltage of the protection relay I rs The value of the Operate value setting in secondary amps The stabilizing resistor should be capable of dissipating high energy within a very short time Therefore a wire wound type resistor should be used The rated power should be in class of a few tens of watts in minimum because of the possible CT inaccuracy which might cause some c...

Page 603: ...ed with Equation 111 4 The sensitivity I prim is calculated with Equation 110 If the achieved sensitivity is sufficient the present CT is chosen If a better sensitivity is needed a CT with a bigger core is chosen If a Class X CT is not used an estimate for U kn is calculated with the equation U F I R S I kn n n in n n 0 8 2 2 2 Equation 111 F n The rated accuracy limit factor corresponding to the ...

Page 604: ...240 and knee point voltage is 81 V The stabilizing resistor is 330 Ohms U A V max Ω 12600 240 330 17325 Equation 114 u kV 2 2 81 17325 81 3 34 Equation 115 As the peak voltage ȗ 3 2 kV VDR must be used In some cases VDR can be avoided if Rs is smaller The value of Rs depends on the protection relay operation current and stabilizing voltage Thus a higher setting in the protection relay must be used...

Page 605: ...ata Quantity Value CT 1000 1 A Rin 15 3 Ω Ukn 323 V Ie 35 mA at Ukn Figure 318 Example calculation for high impedance differential protection only one phase is presented in detail The length of the secondary circuit loop is 200 m and the area of the cross section is 2 5 mm2 Resistance at 75 C is 0 00865 Ω m 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 605 ...

Page 606: ...etizing currents of all connected CTs to obtain adequate protection stability I mA mA rs 2 8 5 17 Equation 120 The resistance of the stabilizing resistor is calculated based on Equation 108 R V A s 78 7 0 017 4629 Ω Equation 121 The calculated value 4629 Ω is the maximum value for the stabilizing resistor If this value is not available the next available value downwards should be chosen and the pr...

Page 607: ...n 2 kV The leakage current through the varistor at the stabilizing voltage can be available from the varistor manual assuming that to be approximately 2 mA at stabilizing voltage Iu A 0 002 Equation 127 The sensitivity of the protection can be re calculated taking into account the leakage current through the varistor as per Equation 110 I A A A A prim 1000 0 020 2 0 0085 0 002 39 Equation 128 4 3 ...

Page 608: ... 20 Minimum operate time Table 535 MHZPDIF Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 536 MHZPDIF Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 0 Reset delay time 4 3 6 10 Monitored data Table 537 MHZPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Des...

Page 609: ... Reset time 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value of 20 ms 4 4 Unbalance protection 4 4 1 Negative sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC 4 4 1 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Negative sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC I2 46 1...

Page 610: ...e DT mode the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears The IDMT mode provides current dependent timer characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 4 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The...

Page 611: ...on the Reset delay time setting With the reset curve type Inverse reset the reset time depends on the current during the drop off situation The START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed The Inverse reset selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves If another operating curve type is selected an immediate reset occurs during the dr...

Page 612: ...voltage side of a delta wye connected power transformer for earth faults taking place on the wye connected low voltage side If an earth fault occurs on the wye connected side of the power transformer negative sequence current quantities appear on the delta connected side of the power transformer The most common application for the negative sequence overcurrent protection is probably rotating machi...

Page 613: ... Def Time 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Table 542 NSPTOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Table 543 NSPTOC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Opera...

Page 614: ...le 546 NSPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In Start time Minimum Typical Maximum I Fault 2 set Start value I Fault 10 set Start value 23 ms 15 ms 26 ms 18 ms 28 ms 20 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time...

Page 615: ...scontinuity protection function PDNSPTOC is used for detecting unbalance situations caused by broken conductors The function starts and operates when the unbalance current I 2 I 1 exceeds the set limit To prevent faulty operation at least one phase current needs to be above the minimum level PDNSPTOC operates with DT characteristic The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to b...

Page 616: ... time the OPERATE output is activated If the fault disappears before the module operates the reset timer is activated If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time The value is avai...

Page 617: ... underground cables The operation of PDNSPTOC is based on the ratio of the positive sequence and negative sequence currents This gives a better sensitivity and stability compared to plain negative sequence current protection since the calculated ratio of positive sequence and negative sequence currents is relatively constant during load variations The unbalance of the network is detected by monito...

Page 618: ...efault Description I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 549 PDNSPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 618 620 series ...

Page 619: ... 4 4 2 8 Monitored data Table 553 PDNSPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time RATIO_I2_I1 FLOAT32 0 00 999 99 Measured current ratio I2 I1 PDNSPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 4 2 9 Technical data Table 554 PDNSPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the...

Page 620: ...f the motor PREVPTOC starts and operates when I 2 exceeds the set limit PREVPTOC operates on definite time DT characteristics PREVPTOC is based on the calculated I 2 and the function detects too high I 2 values during the motor start up The excessive I 2 values are caused by incorrectly connected phases which in turn makes the motor rotate in the opposite direction The function contains a blocking...

Page 621: ...ns and pumps for example and the rotation direction is reversed due to a wrong phase sequence the driven process can be disturbed and the flow of the cooling air of the motor can become reversed too With a motor designed only for a particular rotation direction the reversed rotation direction can lead to an inefficient cooling of the motor due to the fan design In a motor the value of the negative...

Page 622: ...cription START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time PREVPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 4 3 9 Technical data Table 561 PREVPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f n 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n Start time I Fault 2 0 set Start value Minimum Typical Maximum 23 ms 25 ...

Page 623: ...otection for machines function MNSPTOC protects electric motors from phase unbalance A small voltage unbalance can produce a large negative sequence current flow in the motor For example a 5 percent voltage unbalance produces a stator negative sequence current of 30 percent of the full load current which can severely heat the motor MNSPTOC detects the large negative sequence current and disconnect...

Page 624: ...chine manufacturer In case there is a mismatch between the used CT and the protected motor s nominal current values it is possible to fit the IDMT curves for the protected motor using the Current reference setting The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output The deactivation of the OPERATE output activates the cooling timer The timer is set to the value entered in the Cool...

Page 625: ...ed The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the integrator calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the inverse time mode The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values used The Minimum operate time and Maximum operate time settings define the minimum operate time and maximum operate time possible for the IDMT mode F...

Page 626: ...the negative sequence current rises above the set value during the reset period the operate calculations are continued using the saved values If the reset period elapses without a fault being detected the operate timer is reset and the saved values of start time and integration are cleared Inv curve B The inverse time equation for curve type B is t s k I I I I r S r 2 2 2 Equation 132 t s Operate ...

Page 627: ...e timer is reset The reset period thus continues for a time equal to the Cooling time setting or until the operate time decreases to zero whichever is less 4 4 4 6 Application In a three phase motor the conditions that can lead to unbalance are single phasing voltage unbalance from the supply and single phase fault The negative sequence current damages the motor during the unbalanced voltage condi...

Page 628: ...herefore even a three percent voltage unbalance can lead to 18 percent stator negative sequence current in windings The severity of this is indicated by a 30 40 percent increase in the motor temperature due to the extra current 4 4 4 7 Signals Table 563 MNSPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I 2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the ...

Page 629: ...data Table 568 MNSPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time T_ENARESTART INT32 0 10000 s Estimated time to reset of block restart MNSPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 4 4 10 Technical data Table 569 MNSPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency o...

Page 630: ...ription IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3U 59 4 5 1 2 Function block Figure 331 Function block 4 5 1 3 Functionality The three phase overvoltage protection function PHPTOV is applied on power system elements such as generators transformers motors and power lines to protect the system from excessive voltages t...

Page 631: ...n logic module The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly differs from the Start value setting After leaving the hysteresis area the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting phase to earth or phase t...

Page 632: ...cs are selected the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded If the drop off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time the Timer is reset and the START output is deactivated When the IDMT operate time curve is selected the functionality of the Timer in the drop off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve Type of time reset and Reset delay time settings...

Page 633: ...g is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The Minimum operate time setting should be used with care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting For more information see Chapter 11 3 1 IDMT curves for overvoltage protection in this manual The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates t...

Page 634: ... curve types Operating curve type 5 ANSI Def Time 15 IEC Def Time 17 Inv Curve A 18 Inv Curve B 19 Inv Curve C 20 Programmable 4 5 1 6 Application Overvoltage in a network occurs either due to the transient surges on the network or due to prolonged power frequency overvoltages Surge arresters are used to protect the network against the transient overvoltages but the relay s protection function is ...

Page 635: ...ock signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 574 PHPTOV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 5 1 8 Settings Table 575 PHPTOV Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 05 1 60 xUn 0 01 1 10 Start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 40 30...

Page 636: ... 1 1 00 Parameter B for customer program mable curve Curve parameter C 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter D 0 000 60 000 1 0 000 Parameter D for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 000 3 000 1 1 000 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Voltage selection 1 phase to earth 2 phase to phase 2 phase to phase Parameter to select phase or phase...

Page 637: ...cy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 5 1 11 Technical revision history Table 581 PHPTOV Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting C Curve Sat relative max range widened from 3 0 to 10 0 and default value changed from 2 0 to 0 0 D...

Page 638: ... DT and inverse definite minimum time IDMT characteristics for the delay of the trip The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timer or the function itself if desired 4 5 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of PHAPTOV can be described...

Page 639: ...ing to DT or IDMT For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves see the IDMT curves for overvoltage protection section in this manual When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the IDMT the OPERATE output is activated When the user programmable IDMT curve is selected the operate time characteristics are defined by...

Page 640: ...set instan taneously when drop off occurs Immediate Setting has no effect Setting has no effect Frozen timer Operation timer is frozen during drop off Def time reset Freeze Op tim er Operate timer is reset after the set Reset delay time has elapsed Linear decrease Operation timer value linearly de creases during the drop off sit uation Def time reset Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 640 620 serie...

Page 641: ...e times The Minimum operate time setting parameter defines the minimum desired operate time for IDMT The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The Minimum operate time setting should be used with care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting For more information see the IDMT curves for overcurrent...

Page 642: ...ly but the OPERATE output is not activated The Freeze timers mode of blocking has no effect during the inverse reset mode 4 5 2 5 Timer characteristics PHAPTOV supports several operating curve types Table 583 Timer characteristics supported by IDMT operate curve types Operating curve type 5 ANSI Def Time 15 IEC Def Time 17 Inv Curve A 18 Inv Curve B 19 Inv Curve C 20 Programmable 4 5 2 6 Applicati...

Page 643: ...ignals Name Type Default Description U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age A or phase to phase voltage AB BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 585 PHAPTOV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 5 2 8 Settings Table 586 PHAPTOV Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 0...

Page 644: ...rameter C 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter D 0 000 60 000 1 0 000 Parameter D for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 000 3 000 1 1 000 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Voltage selection 1 phase to earth 2 phase to phase 2 phase to phase Parameter to select phase or phase to phase voltages Table 589 PHAPTOV Non group settings Advan...

Page 645: ...n definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 5 3 Three phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 4 5 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase undervoltage protec t...

Page 646: ...ribed using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 338 Functional module diagram Level detector The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages are compared phase wise to the set Start value If the measured value is lower than the set value of the Start value setting the level detector enables the phase selection logic mod...

Page 647: ... value of the set Operating curve type the time characteristics are selected according to DT or IDMT For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves see Chapter 11 3 2 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection in this manual When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the IDMT the OPERATE output is activated When the u...

Page 648: ...Immediate Setting has no effect Setting has no effect Frozen timer Operation timer is frozen during drop off Def time reset Freeze Op tim er Operate timer is reset after the setReset delay time has elapsed Linear decrease Operation timer value linearly de creases during the drop off sit uation Def time reset Decrease Op timer Operate timer is reset after the set Reset delay time has elapsed Protec...

Page 649: ...uld be used with care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting For more information see Chapter 11 3 2 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection in this manual The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time The value is ava...

Page 650: ...ge conditions Low voltage conditions are caused by abnormal operation or a fault in the power system PHPTUV can be used in combination with overcurrent protections Other applications are the detection of a no voltage condition for example before the energization of a high voltage line or an automatic breaker trip in case of a blackout PHPTUV is also used to initiate voltage correction measures suc...

Page 651: ...alues Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 05 1 20 xUn 0 01 0 90 Start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 60 300000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time Operating curve type 5 ANSI Def Time 15 IEC Def Time 21 Inv Curve A 22 Inv Curve B 23 Programmable 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Table 597 PHPTUV Group set...

Page 652: ...th 2 phase to phase 2 phase to phase Parameter to select phase or phase to phase voltages Table 599 PHPTUV Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 60 60000 ms 1 60 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Curve Sat Relative 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve dis continuities Vo...

Page 653: ...hnical revision Change B Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting C Curve Sat relative max range widened from 3 0 to 10 0 and default value changed from 2 0 to 0 0 D Added setting Type of time reset 4 5 4 Single phase undervoltage protection PHAPTUV 4 5 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device numbe...

Page 654: ...vel detector The fundamental frequency component of the measured single phase voltage is compared phase wise to the set value of the Start value setting If the measured value is lower than the set value of the Start value setting the Llevel detector activates the Timer module The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly varies abo...

Page 655: ...rameter D and Curve parameter E If a drop off situation occurs that is a fault suddenly disappears before the operation delay is exceeded the reset state is activated The behavior in the drop off situation depends on the selected operation time characteristics If the DT characteristics are selected the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded If the drop off situation exce...

Page 656: ...T The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The Minimum operate time setting should be used with care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting For more information see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section in this manual The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which in...

Page 657: ...e 15 IEC Def Time 21 Inv Curve A 22 Inv Curve B 23 Programmable 4 5 4 6 Application PHAPTUV detects low voltage conditions in power system elements such as generators transformers motors and power lines Low voltage conditions are caused by abnormal operation or a fault in the power system PHAPTUV can be used in combination with overcurrent protections Other applications are the detection of a no v...

Page 658: ...ettings Table 607 PHAPTUV Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 05 1 20 xUn 0 01 0 90 Start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 60 300000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time Operating curve type 5 ANSI Def Time 15 IEC Def Time 21 Inv Curve A 22 Inv Curve B 23 Programmable 15 IEC Def Time Sel...

Page 659: ... or phase to phase voltages Table 610 PHAPTUV Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 60 60000 ms 1 60 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Curve Sat Relative 0 0 3 0 0 1 2 0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve dis continuities Voltage block value 0 05 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 20 Low level blocking f...

Page 660: ...al overvoltage protection ROVPTOV Uo 59G 4 5 5 2 Function block Figure 343 Function block 4 5 5 3 Functionality The residual overvoltage protection function ROVPTOV is used in distribution networks where the residual overvoltage can reach non acceptable levels in for example high impedance earthing The function starts when the residual voltage exceeds the set limit ROVPTOV operates with the defini...

Page 661: ...red in Residual voltage Uo Configuration Analog inputs Voltage Uo VT 11 547 kV 100 V The residual voltage start value of 1 0 Un corresponds to 1 0 11 547 kV 11 547 kV in the primary Example 2 Uo is calculated from the phase quantities The phase VT ratio is 20 sqrt 3 kV 100 sqrt 3 V In this case Calculated Uo is selected The nominal value for residual voltage is obtained from the VT ratios entered ...

Page 662: ...ed to control the switching device of the neutral resistor The function can also be used for the back up protection of feeders for busbar protection when a more dedicated busbar protection would not be justified In compensated and isolated neutral systems the system neutral voltage that is the residual voltage increases in case of any fault connected to earth Depending on the type of the fault and...

Page 663: ...ulated Uo 1 Measured Uo Selection for used Uo signal Table 617 ROVPTOV Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 5 5 8 Monitored data Table 618 ROVPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time ROVPTOV Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 t...

Page 664: ...ion description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Negative sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV U2 47O 4 5 6 2 Function block Figure 345 Function block 4 5 6 3 Functionality The negative sequence overvoltage protection function NSPTOV is used to detect negative sequence overvoltage conditions NSPTOV is used for the protection of machines The function...

Page 665: ...ches the value set by Reset delay time the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled ...

Page 666: ...tection or it can be used as an alarm The latter can be applied when it is not required to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better than the rotating machines If there is a considerable degree of voltage unbalance in the network the rotating machines should not be connected to the network at all This logic can be implemented by inhibiting the closure of the circuit breaker if the NSPTOV oper...

Page 667: ...of start time op erate time NSPTOV Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 5 6 9 Technical data Table 627 NSPTOV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured f n 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 U n Start time U Fault 1 1 set Start value U Fault 2 0 set Start value Minimum Typical Maximum 33 ms 24 ms 35 ms 26 ms 37 ms 28 ms...

Page 668: ...ve sequence undervoltage protection function PSPTUV is used to detect positive sequence undervoltage conditions PSPTUV is used for the protection of small power generation plants The function helps in isolating an embedded plant from a fault line when the fault current fed by the plant is too low to start an overcurrent function but high enough to maintain the arc Fast isolation of all the fault c...

Page 669: ...positive sequence voltage normalizes before the module operates the reset timer is activated If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time The value is available in the monitored da...

Page 670: ...mover and controllers The generator can be able to operate synchronously even if the voltage drops by a few tens of percent for some hundreds of milliseconds The setting of PSPTUV is thus determined by the need to protect the power station from the risks of the islanding conditions since that requires a higher setting value The loss of synchronism of a generator means that the generator is unable ...

Page 671: ...lue 0 False 1 True 1 True Enable Internal Blocking Table 633 PSPTUV Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 634 PSPTUV Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Relative hysteresis 1 0 5 0 0 1 4 0 Relative hysteresis for ope...

Page 672: ...at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 5 7 10 Technical revision history Table 637 PSPTUV Technical revision history Technical revision Change B C Internal improvement D Internal improvement 4 5 8 Overexcitation protection OEPVPH 4 5 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Overexcitation protection OEPVPH U f 24 1 Start value 1 ...

Page 673: ... operating time has elapsed The operating time characteristic can be selected to be either definite time DT or overexcitation inverse definite minimum time overexcitation type IDMT This function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs reset timer or the function itself if desired 4 5 8 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Op...

Page 674: ...ternal induced voltage emf E phase to earth A or AB E U I j X A A leak 3 phase to earth B or BC E U I j X B B leak 3 phase to earth C or CA E U I j X C C leak 3 phase to phase A or AB E U I I j X AB A B leak phase to phase B or BC E U I I j X BC B C leak phase to phase C or CA E U I I j X CA C A leak Pos sequence N A E U I j Xleak 3 1 1 If all three phase or phase to phase voltages and phase curre...

Page 675: ... OPERATE output is activated In a drop off situation that is when the excitation level drops below Start value before the function operates the reset timer is activated and the START output resets after the time delay of Reset delay time for the DT characteristics For the IDMT curves the reset operation is as described in Chapter 4 5 8 5 Timer characteristics For the IDMT curves it is possible to ...

Page 676: ...When the DT characteristics are selected the functionality is only affected by the Operate delay time and Reset delay time settings OEPVPH also supports four overexcitation IDMT characteristic curves OvExt IDMT Crv1 OvExt IDMT Crv2 OvExt IDMT Crv3 and OvExt IDMT Crv4 Overexcitation inverse definite minimum time curve IDMT In the inverse time modes the operate time depends on the momentary value of...

Page 677: ...ult reoccurs the integration continues from the current integral value and the start time is adjusted as shown in Figure 351 The start time becomes the value at the time when the fault dropped off minus the amount of reset time that occurred If the reset period elapses without a fault being detected the saved values of the start time and integration are cleared Figure 351 An example of a delayed r...

Page 678: ... IDMT curves Operating curve type setting a b c OvExt IDMT Crv1 2 5 115 00 4 886 OvExt IDMT Crv2 2 5 113 50 3 040 OvExt IDMT Crv3 2 5 108 75 2 443 Figure 352 Operating time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve OvExt IDMT Crv1 for parameters a 2 5 b 115 0 and c 4 886 Overexcitation IDMT curve 4 The base equation for the IDMT curve OvExt IDMT Crv4 is Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 678 620 ser...

Page 679: ...when the Constant delay is 800 milliseconds The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output For the IDMT characteristic OvExt IDMT Crv4 the deactivation of the OPERATE output activates the cooling timer The Timer is set to the value entered in the Cooling time setting The Restart Ena level setting determines the level when BLK_RESTART should be released enable restart time En...

Page 680: ...ating and severe damage to the insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time Overvoltage underfrequency or a combination of the two results in an excessive flux density level Since the flux density is directly proportional to the voltage and inversely proportional to the frequency the overexcitation protection calculates the relative V Hz ratio instead of measuring the flux density dire...

Page 681: ...r system a single phase to earth fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases to earth but no overexcitation on any winding The phase to phase voltages remain essentially unchanged An important voltage to be considered for the overexcitation is the voltage between the two ends of each winding Example calculations for overexcitation protection Example 1 Nominal values of the machine Nominal ...

Page 682: ...s 1 00 at the nominal voltage and nominal frequency Therefore the value 100 percent for the setting Voltage Max Cont is recommended If the Voltage Max Cont setting is 105 percent the excitation level M of the machine is calculated with the equation Excitationlevel M 12490 49 98 11000 50 1 05 1 0818 Equation 141 Example 3 In this case the function operation is according to IDMT The Operating curve ...

Page 683: ...e Maximum operate time setting limits the operate time to 1000000 milliseconds if the excitation level stays between 1 1 and 1 16 In general however the excitation level seldom remains constant Therefore the exact operate times in any inverse time mode are difficult to predict Example 4 In this case the function operation is according to IDMT The Operating curve type setting is selected as OvExt I...

Page 684: ...setting Maximum operate time 3600000 milliseconds does not limit the maximum operate time because the operate time at Start value 110 1 1 pu is approximately 75000 milliseconds 4 5 8 7 Signals Table 640 OEPVPH Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current I 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase se quence current U_A_AB SIGNAL...

Page 685: ...ated ma chine COOL_ACTIVE BOOLEAN Signal to indicate machine is in cooling process 4 5 8 8 Settings Table 642 OEPVPH Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 100 200 1 100 Over excitation start value Operating curve type 5 ANSI Def Time 15 IEC Def Time 17 OvExt IDMT Crv1 18 OvExt IDMT Crv2 19 OvExt IDMT Crv3 20 OvExt IDMT Crv4 15 IEC Def Time Selection ...

Page 686: ...akage reactance of the machine Voltage Max Cont 80 160 1 110 Maximum allowed continuous operat ing voltage ratio Table 644 OEPVPH Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 10 100 Resetting time of the operate time counter in DT mode Minimum operate time 200 60000 ms 10 200 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves 4 5 8 9 Monitored data...

Page 687: ...V 4 5 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Low voltage ride through protec tion LVRTPTUV U RT 27RT 4 5 9 2 Function block Figure 357 Function block 4 5 9 3 Functionality The low voltage ride through protection function LVRTPTUV is principally a three phase undervoltage protection It differs from the traditional thre...

Page 688: ... Ph the measured three phase voltages are compared phase wise to the set Voltage start value If the measured value is lower than the set Voltage start value setting in number of phases equal to that set Num of start phases the START output is activated The setting options available for Num of start phases are Exactly 1 of 3 Exactly 2 of 3 and Exactly 3 of 3 which are different from conventional se...

Page 689: ...nate settings When Recovery time 1 is set to non zero value it results into horizontal characteristics from point of fault till Recovery time 1 Two examples of LVRT curve are defined in Figure 359 and Figure 360 with corresponding settings in Table 647 It is necessary to set the coordinate points correctly in order to avoid maloperation For example setting for Recovery time 2 should be greater tha...

Page 690: ...00 ms Voltage level 5 0 9 Un Recovery time 5 3000 ms It is necessary that the last active Voltage level X setting is set greater than or equal to Voltage start value Settings are not accepted if the last active Voltage level X setting is not set greater than or equal to Voltage start value Figure 361 describes an example of operation of LVRTPTUV protection function set to operate with Num of start...

Page 691: ...ge frequency regulation These requirements make it necessary for the wind and solar farms to remain in operation in the event of network disturbances Many grid codes now demand that the distributed generation connected to HV grids must withstand voltage dips to a certain percentage of nominal voltage down to 0 in some cases and for a specific duration Such requirements are known as Low Voltage Rid...

Page 692: ...2 A typical required ride through voltage capability of generating unit The LVRT requirement depends on the power system characteristics and the protection employed varying significantly from each other The requirement also differs from country to country LVRTPTUV function incorporates four types of LVRT curves which satisfy most of the power system needs Grid operators can fine tune the LVRT curv...

Page 693: ...ff 1 on Operation Off On Num of start pha ses 4 Exactly 1 of 3 5 Exactly 2 of 3 6 Exactly 3 of 3 4 Exactly 1 of 3 Number of faulty phases Voltage selection 1 Highest Ph to E 2 Lowest Ph to E 3 Highest Ph to Ph 4 Lowest Ph to Ph 5 Positive Seq 4 Lowest Ph to Ph Parameter to select voltage for curve monitoring Active coordinates 1 10 1 3 Coordinates used for defining LVRT curve Voltage level 1 0 00 ...

Page 694: ...ordi nate for defining LVRT curve Recovery time 3 0 300000 ms 1 10000 3rd time coordi nate for defining LVRT curve Recovery time 4 0 300000 ms 1 10000 4th time coordi nate for defining LVRT curve Recovery time 5 0 300000 ms 1 10000 5th time coordi nate for defining LVRT curve Recovery time 6 0 300000 ms 1 10000 6th time coordi nate for defining LVRT curve Recovery time 7 0 300000 ms 1 10000 7th ti...

Page 695: ...k Figure 363 Function block 4 5 10 3 Functionality The voltage vector shift protection function VVSPPAM also known as vector surge or delta phi function measures continuously the duration of a voltage cycle At the instance of islanding the duration of measured voltage cycle becomes shorter or longer than the previous one that is the measured voltage cycle shifts with time This shifting of voltage ...

Page 696: ...ecting vector shift The available Phase supervision options are All and Pos sequence If the calculated value of Δδ exceeds the set Start value setting for all the defined phases the module sends an enabling signal to start the Pulse timer The Voltage selection setting is used to select whether the available voltage signal is phase to earth or phase to phase voltage The recommended and the default ...

Page 697: ... after the opening of a circuit breaker Islanding is also referred as Loss of Mains LOM or Loss of Grid LOG When LOM occurs neither the voltage or the frequency is controlled by the utility supply These distributed generators are not equipped with voltage and frequency control therefore the voltage magnitude of an islanded network may not be kept within the desired limits which causes undefined vo...

Page 698: ...itive settings are used The vector shift detection also protects synchronous generators from damaging due to islanding or loss of mains To detect loss of mains with vector shift function the generator should aim to export or import at least 5 10 of the generated power to the grid in order to guarantee detectable change in loading after islanding or loss of mains Multicriteria Loss of Mains Apart f...

Page 699: ...lly blocked 4 5 10 7 Settings Table 656 VVSPPAM Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 2 0 30 0 deg 0 1 6 0 Start value for vec tor shift Table 657 VVSPPAM Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Over Volt Blk value 0 40 1 50 xUn 0 01 1 20 Voltage above which function will be internally blocked Under Volt Blk val u...

Page 700: ...e BC VEC_SHT_C_CA FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Vector shift for phase to earth voltage C or phase to phase voltage CA VEC_SHT_U1 FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Vector shift for positive sequence voltage VVSPPAM Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 5 10 9 Technical data Table 661 VVSPPAM Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured vo...

Page 701: ...ncy rate of change protection Additionally it is possible to use combined criteria to achieve even more sophisticated protection schemes for the system The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timer or the function itself if desired 4 6 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parame...

Page 702: ...gic module df dt detection The frequency gradient detection module includes a detection for a positive or negative rate of change gradient of frequency based on the set Start value df dt value The negative rate of change protection is selected when the set value is negative The positive rate of change protection is selected when the set value is positive When the frequency gradient protection is s...

Page 703: ...ristic is according to DT When the operation timer has reached the value set by the Operate Tm Freq setting the OPERATE and OPR_OFRQ outputs are activated If the frequency restores before the module operates the reset timer is activated If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm Freq setting the operate timer resets and the START and STR_OFRQ outputs are deactivated df dt The functio...

Page 704: ...ted The OPR_UFRQ output is not active when this operation mode is used Freq df dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods When the measured frequency exceeds the set val ue of the Start value Freq setting the frequency gradient protection is enabled After the frequency exceeds the set value the frequency gradient is compared to the set value of the Start value df dt setti...

Page 705: ... set value A detailed information from the active module is avail able at the STR_OFRQ and STR_FRG outputs The shortest operate delay time from the set Operate Tm Freq or Oper ate Tm df dt is dominant regarding the OPERATE output The time characteristic is according to DT The characteris tic that activates the OPERATE output can be seen from the OPR_OFRQ or OPR_FRG output If the frequency gradi en...

Page 706: ... due to a sudden loss of a significant amount of load or due to failures in the turbine governor system If the situation continues and escalates the power system loses its stability The underfrequency is applicable in all situations where a reliable detection of a low fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed The low fundamental frequency in a power system indicates that the generated p...

Page 707: ...cy ST_UFRQ BOOLEAN Start signal for underfre quency ST_FRG BOOLEAN Start signal for frequency gradient 4 6 1 7 Settings Table 666 FRPFRQ Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation mode 1 Freq 2 Freq 3 df dt 4 Freq df dt 5 Freq df dt 6 Freq OR df dt 7 Freq OR df dt 1 Freq Frequency protec tion operation mode selection Start value Freq 0 9000 1 2000 xFn 0 000...

Page 708: ...1 0 Reset delay time for rate of change 4 6 1 8 Monitored data Table 669 FRPFRQ Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration ST_DUR_OFRQ FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration ST_DUR_UFRQ FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration ST_DUR_FRG FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration FRPFRQ Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 6 1 9 Technical ...

Page 709: ...nge of the frequency The load that is shed during the frequency disturbance can be restored once the frequency has stabilized to the normal level The measured system frequency is compared to the set value to detect the underfrequency condition The measured rate of change of frequency df dt is compared to the set value to detect a high frequency reduction rate The combination of the detected underf...

Page 710: ...are On and Off The operation of LSHDPFRQ can be described using a module diagram All the modules are explained in the next sections Figure 369 Functional module diagram Underfrequency detection The underfrequency detection measures the input frequency calculated from the voltage signal An underfrequency is detected when the measured frequency drops below the set value of the Start Value Freq setti...

Page 711: ...cs Upon detection of df dt operation timer activates the ST_FRG output When the timer has reached the value set by Operate Tm df dt the OPR_FRG output is activated if the df dt condition still persists If df dt becomes normal before the module operates the reset timer is activated If the reset timer reaches the value of the Reset delay time setting the timer resets and the ST_FRG output is deactiv...

Page 712: ...G 500ms 1s OPERATE is activated as Freq AND df dt condition satisfied OPERATE 48 75 Hz Start of operation timer ST_FRQ OPR_FRQ Start of operation timer 1s Time s Frequency Hz Figure 370 Load shedding operation in the Freq AND df dt mode when both Freq and df dt conditions are satisfied Rated frequency 50 Hz Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 712 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 713: ...z Figure 371 Load shedding operation in the Freq AND df dt mode when only the df dt condition is satisfied Rated frequency 50 Hz Restore detection If after the activation of the OPERATE input the frequency recovers to a level above the Restore start Val setting the RESTORE signal output is activated The RESTORE output remains active for a 100 ms The Restore mode setting is used to select the resto...

Page 714: ...he ST_REST start output is deactivated A condition can arise where the restoring operation needs to be canceled Activating the BLK_REST input for the Auto or Manual modes cancels the restoring operation In the Manual restoring mode the cancellation happens even if MAN_RESTORE is present Once the RESTORE output command is cancelled the reactivation of RESTORE is possible only after the reactivation...

Page 715: ...balance in such islands that leads to a deviation in the operating frequency from the nominal frequency This off nominal frequency operation is harmful to power system components like turbines and motors Therefore such situation must be prevented from continuing The frequency based load shedding scheme should be applied to restore the operation of the system to normal frequency This is achieved by...

Page 716: ...s are taken only if necessary In order to take the effect of any transient a sufficient time delay should be set The value of the setting has to be well below the lowest occurring normal frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency of the system The setting level the number of steps and the distance between two steps in time or in frequency depend on the characteristics of the power sy...

Page 717: ...bances in large power systems the rate of change of the frequency is much less often just a fraction of 1 0 Hz s Similarly the setting for df dt can be from 0 1 Hz s to 1 2 Hz s in steps of 0 1 Hz s to 0 3 Hz s for large distributed power networks with the operating time varying from a few seconds to a few fractions of a second Here the operating time should be kept in minimum for the higher df dt...

Page 718: ...tection ST_FRG BOOLEAN Pick Up signal for high df dt detection RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load re storing purposes ST_REST BOOLEAN Restore frequency attained and restore timer started 4 6 2 7 Settings Table 677 LSHDPFRQ Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Load shed mode 1 Freq 6 Freq OR df dt 8 Freq AND df dt 1 Freq Set the operation mode for load shed...

Page 719: ...settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 50 Time delay after which the definite timers will reset 4 6 2 8 Monitored data Table 680 LSHDPFRQ Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration LSHDPFRQ Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 6 2 9 Technical data Table 681 LSH...

Page 720: ...ance plane The function calculates the apparent impedance from the machine terminal voltages and currents If the impedance vector enters the offset mho circle the function gives the operating signal after a set definite time The operating time characteristics are according to definite time DT This function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs timer or the ...

Page 721: ... calculating the impedance Table 682 Voltages and currents used in impedance calculation Measurement mode Phase Sel for Z Clc Voltages and currents 1Phase earth A or AB U_A I_A 1Phase earth B or BC U_B I_B 1Phase earth C or CA U_C I_C 1Phase phase A or AB U_AB I_A I_B 1Phase phase B or BC U_BC I_B I_C 1Phase phase C or CA U_CA I_C I_A 3Phase earth N A U_A U_B U_C I_A I_B I_C 3Phase phase N A U_AB ...

Page 722: ...tics are defined with the Offset Diameter and Displacement settings If the calculated impedance value enters the circle in the impedance plane the module sends an enabling signal to start the Timer Offset Displacement Diameter X Reactance p u R Resistance p u R X Operating Region Figure 375 Operating region of the impedance mho circle A fault in Automatic Voltage Regulator AVR or in the excitation...

Page 723: ...g mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPERATE output mode the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated 4 7 1 5 Application There are limits for the underexcitation of a synchronous machine A reduction o...

Page 724: ...ce plane and the circle is parameterized with the Offset Diameter and Displacement setting values Table 683 Parameters of the circle Setting values Description Offset Distance of the top of the circle from the R axis This is usually set equal to x d 2 where x d is the transient reactance of the machine The sign of the setting value determines the top of the circle regarding the R axis If the sign ...

Page 725: ... impedance locus in underexcitation In an example of a typical impedance locus once the impedance locus enters the relay operation characteristics the relay operates after a settable definite time a Z locus in under excitation for heavily loaded machine b Z locus in under excitation for lightly loaded machine c Z locus for a fault in the network X Reactance R Resistance X Relay operation character...

Page 726: ...cking mode EXT_LOS_DET BOOLEAN 0 False External signal for excitation loss detec tion Table 685 UEXPDIS Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 7 1 7 Settings Table 686 UEXPDIS Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Diameter 1 6000 Zn 1 200 Diameter of the Mho diagram Offset 1000 1000 Zn 1 10 Offset of top of the impedan...

Page 727: ...onitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time in Z_AMPL_A FLOAT32 0 00 200 00 xZn Impedance amplitude phase A Z_ANGLE_A FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Impedance angle phase A Z_AMPL_B FLOAT32 0 00 200 00 xZn Impedance amplitude phase B Z_ANGLE_B FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Impedance angle phase B Z_AMPL_C FLOAT32 0 00 200 00 xZn Impe...

Page 728: ...t value or 0 2 Zb Start time Typically 45 ms Reset time Typically 30 ms Reset ratio Typically 1 04 Retardation time Total retardation time when the impedance returns from the operating circle 40 ms Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 8 Power protection 4 8 1 Underpower protection DUPPDPR 4 8 1 1 Identification Function des...

Page 729: ...e The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of DUPPDPR can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 379 Functional module diagram Power calculation This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltage and current measuremen...

Page 730: ...g Power calculation PhsA PhsB PhsC S U I U I U I a a b b c c P S Re Arone S U I U I ab a bc c P S Re Pos Seq S U I 3 1 1 P S Re PhsAB S U I I ab a b 3 P S Re PhsBC S U I I bc b c 3 P S Re PhsCA S U I I ca c a 3 P S Re PhsA S U I a a 3 P S Re PhsB S U I b b 3 P S Re PhsC S U I c c 3 P S Re Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 730 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 731: ...reverse direction If the polarity of the measured power is opposite to normal the correction can be done by setting Pol reversal to True which rotates the apparent power by 180 degrees Level detector The Level detector compares the calculated value of the active power with a set Start value If the calculated value of the active power falls below Start value in the forward direction or if the measu...

Page 732: ...k all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPERATE output mode the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated 4 8 1 5 Application The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy Sometimes the mechanical power from the prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover the internal losse...

Page 733: ...or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age C or phase to phase voltage CA U 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase se quence voltage DISABLE BOOLEAN 0 False Signal to block the function during gen erator startup BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 693 DUPPDPR Output signals Na...

Page 734: ...time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Reverse the defini tion of the power direction Disable time 0 60000 ms 1000 0 Additional wait time after CB clos ing 4 8 1 8 Monitored data Table 697 DUPPDPR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time P FLOAT32 160 000 160 000 xSn Active power Q FLOAT32 160 000 160 000 xSn Reactive ...

Page 735: ...er directional over power protection DOPPDPR P Q 32R 32O 4 8 2 2 Function block Figure 381 Function block 4 8 2 3 Functionality The reverse power directional overpower protection function DOPPDPR can be used for generator protection against delivering an excessive power beyond the generator s capacity to the grid against the generator running like a motor and against the motor running like a gener...

Page 736: ... corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of DOPPDPR can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 382 Functional module diagram Power calculation This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltages and currents The Measurement mode setting determines which voltages and currents are used It i...

Page 737: ... I I bc b c 3 P S Re PhsCA S U I I ca c a 3 P S Re PhsA S U I a a 3 P S Re PhsB S U I b b 3 P S Re PhsC S U I c c 3 P S Re If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the protection relay the positive sequence alternative is recommended The calculated powers S P Q and the power factor angle PF_ANGL are available in the Monitored data view 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series ...

Page 738: ...ode and Power angle The selectable options for the Directional mode setting are Forward and Reverse The Power angle setting can be used to set the power direction between the reactive and active power A typical error is for example that the VT or CT poles are wrongly connected This is seen as a power flow opposite to that of the intended direction The Pol Reversal setting can be used to correct th...

Page 739: ...onitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLO...

Page 740: ...xially and touches stationary parts They are not always strong enough to withstand the associated stresses A hydroturbine that rotates in water with the closed wicket gates draws about 10 of the rated power from the rest of the power system if the intake is blocked due to ice snow branches or leaves A complete blockage of the intake may cause cavitations If there is only air in the hydroturbine th...

Page 741: ... characteristics a and forward reactive overpower characteristics b P Q Non operating area Operating area P Q Operating area Non operating area a b Figure 386 Reverse active overpower characteristics a and reverse reactive overpower characteristics b 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 741 ...

Page 742: ...tage CA BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 701 DOPPDPR Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 8 2 7 Settings Table 702 DOPPDPR Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 01 2 00 xSn 0 01 1 00 Start value Operate delay time 40 300000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time Directiona...

Page 743: ... time 0 60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Reverse the defini tion of the power direction 4 8 2 8 Monitored data Table 705 DOPPDPR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time P FLOAT32 160 000 160 000 xSn Active power Q FLOAT32 160 000 160 000 xSn Reactive power S FLOAT32 0 000 160 000 xSn A...

Page 744: ...PTUV Q 3U 32Q 27 4 8 3 2 Function block Figure 387 Function block 4 8 3 3 Functionality The directional reactive power undervoltage protection function DQPTUV is used at the grid connection point of distributed power generating units as stipulated by various grid codes to prevent voltage collapse of the grid due to network faults DQPTUV measures phase voltages and current at the grid connection po...

Page 745: ...the Timer indicating an undervoltage condition at the grid connection point Reactive power monitoring This module calculates and monitors the reactive power based on positive sequence current and voltage The use of a positive sequence component makes the determination of power insensitive to a possible asymmetry in current and voltages When the reactive power exceeds Min reactive power and flows i...

Page 746: ... situation and the set operating time The value is available through the Monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an ...

Page 747: ...enerators stay connected it must be ensured that they do not take reactive power from the network because this may lead to collapse of the grid DQPTUV is used for detecting such situations that is simultaneous undervoltage and reactive power under excited generators and trip the generators The protection function DQPTUV is developed considering various grid codes For example in the BDEW Technical ...

Page 748: ...dvanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Min reactive power 0 01 0 50 xSn 0 01 0 05 Minimum reactive power needed for function to operate Min Ps Seq current 0 02 0 20 xIn 0 01 0 05 Minimum positive sequence current Pwr sector reduc tion 0 10 deg 1 3 Power sector re duction Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Reverse the defini tion of the positive reactive power di rection 4 8 ...

Page 749: ... 20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 9 Arc protection ARCSARC 4 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Arc protection ARCSARC ARC 50L 50NL 4 9 2 Function block Figure 390 Function block 1 Start value 0 05 S n reactive power before fault 0 8 Start value reactive power overshoot 2 times...

Page 750: ...I_C BLOCK Level detector 2 Io FLT_ARC REM_FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET Operation mode selector t Dropoff OPR_MODE t Dropoff Figure 391 Functional module diagram Level detector 1 The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Phase start value If the measured value exceeds the set Phase start value the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the operation mode selector Level dete...

Page 751: ...al to another relay Protection stage with phase and earth fault current measurement The function detects light from an arc either locally or via a remote light signal Locally the light is detected by lens sensors connected to the inputs Light sensor 1 Light sensor 2 or Light sensor 3 on the serial communication module of the relay The lens sensors can be placed for example in the busbar compartmen...

Page 752: ...ion distance between the two lens sensors in the busbar area is six meters and the maximum distance from a lens sensor to the end of the busbar is three meters Figure 392 Arc protection with one protection relay Arc protection with several protection relays When using several protection relays the protection relay protecting the outgoing feeder trips the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder when...

Page 753: ... can be configured to trip all the circuit breakers regardless of where the arc is detected Q1 Q2 M1 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 PO3 PO1 3I Io S1 S2 S3 S4 DI1 SO1 SO1 SO1 DI1 DI1 DI1 3I Io 3I Io 3I Io 3I Io DI1 SO1 SO1 REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 Figure 393 Arc protection with several protection relays and normal outputs 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manual 753 ...

Page 754: ... system the cable terminations of the outgoing feeders are protected by protection relays using one lens sensor for each protection relay The busbar and the incoming feeder are protected by the sensor loop of the separate arc protection system With arc detection at the cable terminations an protection relay trips the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder However when detecting an arc on the busba...

Page 755: ...s Table 714 ARCSARC Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for all bi nary outputs REM_FLT_ARC BOOLEAN 0 False Remote Fault arc de tected OPR_MODE BOOLEAN 0 False Operation mode in put 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 620 series Technical Manu...

Page 756: ...2 Light only 3 BI controlled 1 Light current Operation mode Table 717 ARCSARC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On 4 9 8 Monitored data Table 718 ARCSARC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description ARCSARC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 9 9 Technical data Table 719 ARCSARC Techn...

Page 757: ...rvision STTPMSU 4 10 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Motor start up supervision STTPMSU Is2t n 49 66 48 51LR 4 10 2 Function block Figure 396 Function block 1 Phase start value 1 0 I n current before fault 2 0 set Phase start value f n 50 Hz fault with nominal frequency results based on statistical distribution o...

Page 758: ... means checking if the rotor is able to rotate or not This feature operates after a predefined operating time STTPMSU also protects the motor from an excessive number of start ups Upon exceeding the specified number of start ups within certain duration STTPMSU blocks further starts The restart of the motor is also inhibited after each start and continues to be inhibited for a set duration When the...

Page 759: ...onitoring the TRMS currents In the IIt stall CB mode the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor during the start up condition but the start up condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS current as well as the circuit breaker status In both the IIt stall and IIt stall CB mode the function also checks for motor stalling by monitoring the speed switch When the measured current value is...

Page 760: ... in which case the phase current value rises above 0 1 pu and after some delay the CB auxiliary contact gives the information of the CB_CLOSED input In some cases the CB_CLOSED input can be active but the value of current may not be greater than the value of the Motor standstill A setting To allow both possibilities a time slot of 200 milliseconds is provided for current and the CB_CLOSED input If...

Page 761: ...d Based on the values of the phase currents the completion of the start up period cannot be judged So in this mode of operation the value of the time delay setting can even be as high as within the range of seconds for example around 30 seconds The activation of the BLOCK input signal deactivates the MOT_START output Thermal stress calculator Because of the high current surges during the start up ...

Page 762: ...resistance insertion The start up time is dependent on the load connected to the motor Based on the motor characteristics supplied by the manufacturer this module is required if the stalling time is shorter than or too close to the starting time In such cases a speed switch must be used to indicate whether a motor is accelerating during start up or not At motor standstill the STALL_IND input is ac...

Page 763: ... reset from the Clear menu The old Number of motor start ups occurred counter value START_CNT can be taken into use by writing the value to the Ini start up counter parameter and resetting the value via the Clear menu from WHMI or LHMI The calculated values of T_RST_ENA T_ST_CNT and START_CNT are available in the Monitored data view The activation of the BLK_LK_ST input signal deactivates the LOCK...

Page 764: ...etic field and the rotor during the start up time induces a high magnitude of slip current in the rotor at frequencies higher than when the motor is at full speed The skin effect is stronger at higher frequencies and all these factors increase the losses and the generated heat This is worse when the rotor is locked The starting current for slip ring motors is less than the full load current and th...

Page 765: ...hat calculates them This insures that the thermal effects on the motor for consecutive starts stay within permissible levels For example the motor manufacturer may state that three starts at the maximum are allowed within 4 hours and the start up situation time is 60 seconds By initiating three successive starts we reach the situation as illustrated As a result the value of the register adds up to...

Page 766: ...ent I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block of function BLK_LK_ST BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks lock out condi tion for restart of mo tor CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 False Input showing the status of motor cir cuit breaker STALL_IND BOOLEAN 0 False Input signal for show ing the motor is not stalling ST_EMERG_ENA BOOLEAN 0 False Enable emergency start to disable lock ...

Page 767: ...Default Description Start detection A 0 1 10 0 xIn 0 1 1 5 Current value for detecting starting of motor Table 725 STTPMSU Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Operation mode 1 IIt 2 IIt CB 3 IIt stall 4 IIt stall CB 1 IIt Motor start up op eration mode Counter Red rate 2 0 250 0 s h 0 1 60 0 Start time counter red...

Page 768: ... Thermal stress relative to set maximum ther mal stress STALL_RL FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start time relative to the operate time for stall condition STTPMSU Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 10 9 Technical data Table 728 STTPMSU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f n 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n Sta...

Page 769: ...otection with many possible application areas as it has flexible measuring and setting facilities The function can be used as an under or overprotection with a settable absolute hysteresis limit The function operates with the definite time DT characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs the definite timer or the function itself if desired ...

Page 770: ...t sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area If the ENA_ADD input is activated the threshold value of the internal comparator is the sum of the Start value Add and Start value settings The resulting threshold value for the comparator can be increased or decreased depending on the sign and value of the Start value Add setting Timer Once activated the timer activates the START o...

Page 771: ...ection schemes for the function Thus the absolute hysteresis can be set to a value that suits the application The temperature protection using the RTD sensors can be done using the function block The measured temperature can be fed from the RTD sensor to the function input that detects too high temperatures in the motor bearings or windings for example When the ENA_ADD input is enabled the thresho...

Page 772: ...735 MAPGAPC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 100 0 Reset delay time Absolute hysteresis 0 01 100 00 0 01 0 10 Absolute hysteresis for operation 4 11 8 Monitored data Table 736 MAPGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time op erate time MAPGAPC Enum 1 on 2 b...

Page 773: ...d current which is proportional to the voltage across the capacitor The overload function operates with IDMT characteristic and an alarm function operates with DT characteristic COLPTOC provides undercurrent protection to detect disconnection of the capacitor COLPTOC has breaker reclosing inhibit feature to enable complete capacitor discharging before breaker reclosing after it has operated COLPTO...

Page 774: ...n monitored data view The frequency response of the peak integrated current calculator can be seen in Figure 407 Figure 407 Frequency response of the peak integrated current calculator Operate level detector The Operate level detector compares I_PEAK_INT_x value to Start value overload If the phase or phases in which I_PEAK_INT_x exceeds the setting matches the Num of start phases setting the Oper...

Page 775: ...1 1 40 15 ANSI IEEE37 99 1 70 1 ANSI IEEE37 99 2 20 0 120 ANSI IEEE37 99 Operate time is based on maximum value of I_PEAK_INT_A I_PEAK_INT_B and I_PEAK_INT_C From maximum value calculated operate time between any two consecutive points in the standard table is based on logarithmic interpolation The operate time can be scaled using the Time multiplier setting The OPR_OVLOD output is activated if th...

Page 776: ...eration timer is frozen However if the integrated current exceeds 1 1 times the Start value overload setting value again the operation timer continue from the freezing point Thus the operation timer is cumulative If the integrated current exceeds 1 1 times the setting Start value overload only once and remains within the Start value overload area for 24 hours the operation timer and the output ST_...

Page 777: ...ue to Alarm start value If the phase or phases in which I_PEAK_INT_x exceeds the setting matches the Num of start phases setting the Alarm level detector module activates the Timer 2 module The Num of start phases setting is a common setting for both Operate level detector and Alarm level detector Timer 2 The Timer 2 characteristics are according to Definite Time DT When the operation timer has re...

Page 778: ...t If the circuit breaker closed status signal is not detected the constant value TRUE has to be connected to CB_CLOSED input to enable the undercurrent detector If the circuit breaker status signal is not connected to CB_CLOSED input the OPR_UN_I output is activated even if the circuit breaker is open and undercurrent is detected Inhibit reclose When the output OPR_UN_I becomes active or when the ...

Page 779: ... turn to the system Hence COLPTOC is specially designed for the protection against overloads produced by harmonic currents and overvoltage Undercurrent protection is used to disconnect the capacitor bank from the rest of the power system when the voltage at the capacitor bank terminals is too low for too long a period of time To avoid an undercurrent trip operation when the capacitor bank is disco...

Page 780: ...AN Alarm BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Inhibit re close of capacitor bank 4 12 1 7 Settings Table 741 COLPTOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value over load 0 30 1 50 xIn 0 01 1 00 Start value for overload stage Alarm start value 80 120 1 105 Alarm start value of Start value overload Start value Un Cur 0 10 0 70 xIn 0 01 0 50 Start value for un der current oper...

Page 781: ...ed for oper ate activation Table 744 COLPTOC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Enable under cur rent 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 Enable Enable under cur rent functionality 4 12 1 8 Monitored data Table 745 COLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description ST_DUR_OVLOD FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration for over load stage ST_DUR_UN_I FLOAT32 0 0...

Page 782: ... history Table 747 COLPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement 4 12 2 Current unbalance protection for capacitor banks CUBPTOC 4 12 2 1 Identification Table 748 Function identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Current unbalance protection for shunt capacitor banks CUBPTOC dI C 51NC 1...

Page 783: ... blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs timers or the function itself if required 4 12 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The current unbalance protection for shunt capacitor banks operates on the DFT measurement mode The operation of CUBPTOC can be described by u...

Page 784: ...ent needs to be recorded when there is no fault in the capacitor banks and it is initiated through the command Record unbalance available under menu path Control CUBPTOC By selecting Record unbalance with value Record the measured unbalance current IUnb is considered as the natural unbalance current INatUnb and is stored as a reference The amplitude and angle of the recorded natural unbalance curr...

Page 785: ...odule Timer 1 Once activated the Timer 1 module activates the START output Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve the OPERATE output is activated When the user programmable IDMT curve is s...

Page 786: ...nch of the element failure location is detected However the element failure location also depends on the type of capacitor banks that is whether internal or external fuses are used The setting Fuse location is used to set the capacitor bank type as External or Internal For an external fuse capacitor bank the element failure location and corresponding counters to be incremented are determined based...

Page 787: ...ed on the phase angle of the compensated unbalance current Table 750 Element failure location and counters to be incremented for internal fuse and blown fuse case Phase angle of the compensated unbalance current degrees Phase and branch of the element failure Counters to be incremented 15 15 Phase A branch 2 COUNT_BR2_A 15 45 Phase A branch 2 Phase C branch 1 COUNT_BR2_A COUNT_BR1_C 45 75 Phase C ...

Page 788: ...ew The ALARM output is activated when the value of FAIL_COUNT exceeds the setting Element failure limit The counter values can be reset via CUBPTOC counters which is located under the Clear menu Level detector 2 The calculated compensated unbalance current I_AMPL_COMP is compared to the set Alarm start value If the I_AMPL_COMP exceeds the set Alarm value the Level detector 2 sends enabling signal ...

Page 789: ...or bank overload protection function to increase the sensitivity of protection for capacitor banks Due to the two stage operation and alarm stage unbalance protection and the natural unbalance compensation facility the protection of capacitor banks with internal fuses can be implemented with a very high degree of sensitivity Furthermore CUBPTOC provides a sophisticated method of detecting the numb...

Page 790: ...he capacitor bank compensated unbalance current I_COM_AMPL is observed from Monitored data 4 The command Record unbalance must be activated by selecting the value Record which stores the unbalance reference for future unbalance calculations 5 The compensated unbalance current I_COM_AMPL is re checked to be approximately zero The natural unbalance recording should be made only during the steady sta...

Page 791: ...mal 2 Element counter 1 Normal Mode of operation for Alarm stage Start value 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 10 Start value Alarm start value 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 05 Alarm start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext inv 2 ANSI Very inv 3 ANSI Norm inv 4 ANSI Mod inv 5 ANSI Def Time 6 L T E inv 7 L T V inv 8 L T inv 9 IEC Norm inv 10...

Page 792: ...0 0000 0 1 28 20000 Parameter A for customer program mable curve Curve parameter B 0 00000 0 71200 1 0 12170 Parameter B for customer program mable curve Curve parameter C 0 02 2 00 1 2 00 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Table 756 CUBPTOC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default De...

Page 793: ...res in branch2 phase A COUNT_BR1_B INT32 0 2147483647 Number of ele ment failures in branch1 phase B COUNT_BR2_B INT32 0 2147483647 Number of ele ment failures in branch2 phase B COUNT_BR1_C INT32 0 2147483647 Number of ele ment failures in branch1 phase C COUNT_BR2_C INT32 0 2147483647 Number of ele ment failures in branch2 phase C FAIL_COUNT INT32 0 2147483647 Total number of element failures CU...

Page 794: ...story Table 759 CUBPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Selection name for Recorded unbalance changed 4 12 3 Shunt capacitor bank switching resonance protection current based SRCPTOC 4 12 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Shunt capacitor bank switching resonance protection current based SRC...

Page 795: ...explained in the next sections Figure 416 Functional module diagram Resonance current calculation This module calculates the resonance current per phase set as per setting Tuning harmonic Num The resonance current for phase A is calculated with the equation I RESO A I I I I RMS A A DC A K A _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 1 2 2 2 Equation 149 I RMS_A RMS value of current in phase A contains up to 11 th harmonic I D...

Page 796: ...d only for reactive power compensation and there is no series reactor in a filter branch the resonance protection is very important In this case the setting Tuning harmonic Num should be set to 1 because the capacitor branch is not tuned for a special frequency as in tuned filter applications Even though Tuning harmonic Num is set to 1 the fundamental component is subtracted only once from I RMS L...

Page 797: ...n timer is frozen to the prevailing value In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPERATE output mode SRCPTOC operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated 4 12 3 5 Application Switched shunt capacitor banks are widely used by utilities and customers in industrial distribution systems to provide voltage support and to improve the power ...

Page 798: ...lation of the resonance current If there is more than one harmonic filter bank involved each SRCPTOC tunes to the harmonic frequency of its corresponding filter bank The interlinking between the functions can be done in such a way that if resonance occurs in a higher harmonic frequency filter bank all the lower harmonic frequency filter banks can be tripped immediately by activating the function i...

Page 799: ...ed harmonic currents indicating resonance condi tion Tuning harmonic Num 1 11 1 11 Tuning frequency harmonic number of the filter branch Operate delay time 120 360000 ms 1 200 Operate delay time for resonance Alarm delay time 120 360000 ms 1 200 Alarm delay time for resonance alarm Table 763 SRCPTOC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off ...

Page 800: ... 0 002 In for 2nd order Harmonics 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In for 3rd order Harmonics 10th order 6 of the set value or 0 004 In for Harmonics 10th order Reset time Typically 45 ms or maximum 50 ms Retardation time Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics 50 dB at f fn 4 12 3 10 Technical revision h...

Page 801: ...e the output signal BLK2H is activated once the numerically derived ratio of second harmonic current I_2H and the fundamental frequency current I_1H exceeds the set value The operate time characteristic for the function is of definite time DT type The function contains a blocking functionality Blocking deactivates all outputs and resets timers 5 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled ...

Page 802: ... value the BLK2H output is activated After the timer has elapsed and the inrush situation still exists the BLK2H signal remains active until the I_2H I_1H ratio drops below the value set for the ratio in all phases that is until the inrush situation is over If the drop off situation occurs within the operate time up counting the reset timer is activated If the drop off time exceeds Reset delay tim...

Page 803: ...overcurrent and earth fault function stages when the ratio of second harmonic component over the fundamental component exceeds the set value Other applications of this function include the detection of inrush in lines connected to a transformer Figure 420 Inrush current in transformer It is recommended to use the second harmonic and the waveform based inrush blocking from the transformer different...

Page 804: ...Name Type Description BLK2H BOOLEAN Second harmonic based block 5 1 7 Settings Table 769 INRPHAR Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 5 100 1 20 Ratio of the 2 to the 1 harmonic leading to restraint Operate delay time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Operate delay time Table 770 INRPHAR Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description O...

Page 805: ...0 of the set value Reset time 35 ms 0 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Operate time accuracy 35 ms 0 ms 5 1 10 Technical revision history Table 774 INRPHAR Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement 5 2 Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 5 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE...

Page 806: ...n a predefined setting range The function has two independent timers for trip purposes a retrip timer for the repeated tripping of its own breaker and a back up timer for the trip logic operation for upstream breakers A minimum trip pulse length can be set independently for the trip output The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs if desired 5 2 4 ...

Page 807: ...er than the short circuit currents To detect a breaker failure at single phase earth faults in these systems it is necessary to measure the residual current separately In effectively earthed systems also the setting of the earth fault current protection can be chosen at a relatively low current level The current setting should be chosen in accordance with the setting of the sensitive earth fault p...

Page 808: ...CB failure mode setting is set to Both the resetting logic requires that the circuit breaker is in the open condition and the values of the phase currents and the residual current drops below the Current value and Current value Res setting respectively The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function Figure 423 Start logic Timer 1 Once activated the timer runs until the set Retrip time value ...

Page 809: ...the ability to maintain transient stability in case of a fault close to a power plant Figure 424 Timeline of the breaker failure protection Timer 3 This module is activated by the CB_FAULT signal Once activated the timer runs until the set CB fault delay value has elapsed The time characteristic is according to DT When the operation timer has reached the maximum time value CB fault delay the CB_FA...

Page 810: ...t level The TRRET output remains active for a fixed time set with the Trip pulse time setting The activation of the BLOCK input or the CB_FAULT_AL output deactivates the TRRET output POSCLOSE I From Level detector 1 Timer 1 elapsed From Timer 1 OR AND AND CB fail retrip mode Without check CB fail retrip mode Current check CB failure mode Current CB failure mode Breaker status CB failure mode Both ...

Page 811: ...sidual current both exceed the Current value and Current value Res setting respectively or two phase currents exceeding the Current value Once TRBU is activated it remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all the phase currents drop below the Current value whichever takes longer In most applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient If the CB failure mode is s...

Page 812: ...ls to trip for the protected component The detection of a failure to break the current through the breaker is made by measuring the current or by detecting the remaining trip signal unconditional CCBRBRF can also retrip This means that a second trip signal is sent to the protected circuit breaker The retrip function is used to increase the operational reliability of the breaker The function can al...

Page 813: ...he same time as the retrip timer If CCBRBRF detects a failure in tripping the fault within the set backup delay time which is longer than the retrip time it sends a backup trip signal to the chosen backup breakers The circuit breakers are normally upstream breakers which feed fault current to a faulty feeder The backup trip always includes a current check criterion This means that the criterion fo...

Page 814: ...Res 0 05 2 00 xIn 0 05 0 30 Operating residual current CB failure trip mode 1 2 out of 4 2 1 out of 3 3 1 out of 4 2 1 out of 3 Backup trip current check mode CB failure mode 1 Current 2 Breaker status 3 Both 1 Current Operating mode of function CB fail retrip mode 1 Off 2 Without Check 3 Current check 1 Off Operating mode of retrip logic Retrip time 0 60000 ms 10 120 Delay timer for ret rip CB fa...

Page 815: ... current f n 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Reset time 1 Typically 40 ms Retardation time 20 ms 5 2 10 Technical revision history Table 781 CCBRBRF Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Default trip pulse time changed to 150 ms C Added new setting parameter Start latching mode Maximum value changed to 2 00 xIn for the Cur...

Page 816: ...trip pulse length can be set when the non latched mode is selected It is also possible to select the latched or lockout mode for the trip signal 5 3 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off When the TRPPTRC function is disabled all trip outputs intended to go through the function to the circuit break...

Page 817: ...en using the Lockout or Latched modes but only when the Non latched mode is selected The CL_LKOUT and TRIP outputs can be blocked with the BLOCK input Table 782 Operation modes for the TRPPTRC trip output Mode Operation Non latched The Trip pulse length parameter gives the minimum pulse length for TRIP Latched TRIP is latched both local and remote clear ing is possible Lockout TRIP is locked and c...

Page 818: ...PHHPTOC1 operate PHHPTOC2 operate PHIPTOC operate NSPTOC1 operate NSPTOC2 operate EFLPTOC1 operate EFHPTOC operate EFIPTOC operate PDNSPTOC operate EFLPTOC2 operate ARCPSARC1 operate ARCPSARC2 operate ARCPSARC3 operate DARREC open cb BLOCK CL_LKOUT Figure 430 Typical TRPPTRC connection 5 3 6 Signals Table 783 TRPPTRC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block of functi...

Page 819: ...on mode for trip output 5 3 8 Monitored data Table 786 TRPPTRC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TRPPTRC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 5 3 9 Technical revision history Table 787 TRPPTRC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B C D Internal improvement E Setting Trip output mode default setting is changed to Latched F Internal improvement ...

Page 820: ... or isolated neutral 5 4 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off PHIZ uses a multi algorithm approach Each algorithm uses various features of earth currents to detect a high impedance fault Although the PHIZ algorithm is very sophisticated the setting required to operate the function is simple The S...

Page 821: ...ally Based on experience and confidence gained in a particular application the setting can be moved either side In many cases it would be a good practice to use PHIZ as an indicative function during a piloting phase until enough experience has been gathered and a suitable setting found Transformer Feeder Bus Ct Breaker Figure 432 Electrical power system equipped with PHIZ Power system signals are ...

Page 822: ... an accurate depiction of a non stationary signal with a time dependent spectrum Figure 434 Validation of PHIZ on gravel Figure 435 Validation of PHIZ on concrete Figure 436 Validation of PHIZ on sand Figure 437 Validation of PHIZ on grass 5 4 5 Application PHIZ is used to detect a downed conductor dropping to a very resistive ground causing an earth fault which is very difficult to detect by a co...

Page 823: ...by conventional overcurrent relays or fuses PHIZ always needs sensitive Io measurement High impedance fault PHIZ detection requires a different approach than that for conventional low impedance faults Reliable detection of PHIZ provides safety to humans and animals PHIZ detection can also prevent fire and minimize property damage ABB has developed innovative technology for high impedance fault det...

Page 824: ... Level 1 10 1 5 Security Level Table 791 PHIZ Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On System type 1 Grounded 2 Ungrounded 1 Grounded System Type Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H 824 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 825: ...HIZ Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Added inputs for Circuit Breaker Closed and Circuit Breaker Open 5 5 Emergency start up ESMGAPC 5 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Emergency start up ESMGAPC ESTART ESTART 5 5 2 Function block Figure 438 Function block 1MRS757644 H...

Page 826: ...dule diagram Standstill detector The module detects if the motor is in a standstill condition The standstill condition can be detected based on the phase current values If all three phase currents are below the set value of Motor standstill A the motor is considered to be in a standstill condition Timer The timer is a fixed 10 minute timer that is activated when the ST_EMERG_RQ input is activated ...

Page 827: ...ch allows the restart of motor and the operator can now restart the motor A new emergency start cannot be made until the 10 minute time out has passed or until the emergency start is released whichever takes longer The last change of the emergency start output signal is recorded 5 5 6 Signals Table 794 ESMGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Ph...

Page 828: ...able 798 ESMGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description T_ST_EMERG Timestamp Emergency start activa tion timestamp ESMGAPC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 5 5 9 Technical data Table 799 ESMGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f f n 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 U n 5 5 10 Technical revision history Table 800 ESMGAPC Tec...

Page 829: ...of the protection ensuring a fast trip when the breaker is closed onto faulted feeder or bus Without CVPSOF the measured voltages may be too small for the impedance zones or the directional overcurrent stages to operate reliably This condition exists when the voltage transformers are located in the feeder or the bus side to be energized and therefore the voltage memory required for a correct direc...

Page 830: ...o delay Thus a switch onto fault situation is immediately signalled to SOTF control START_DLYD input is used when an additional delay is required to start the signal The switch onto fault situation is signalled to the SOTF control after the set Operate delay time Dead line detector The dead line detection should be used only when the voltage transformers are located on the line side of the circuit...

Page 831: ...ad line condition is declared if all the phase currents are below the Current dead Lin Val setting and simultaneously all phase voltages are below the Voltage dead Lin Val setting The dead line is detected if the dead line condition is declared and simulta neously no fault is detected by the START and START_DLYD inputs The dead line condition is signalled to the SOTF con trol after delay defined w...

Page 832: ... of non directional impedance or current based protection for starting CVPSOF secures a fast switch onto fault tripping in the close in three phase short circuits The non directional protection provides a fast fault clearance when the protection is used for energizing a bus from the feeder with a short circuit fault in it Other protection functions like time delayed zero sequence overcurrent funct...

Page 833: ... set to 0 02 seconds by default This is suitable in most applications This delay can be coordinated for example with the dead time settings of the AR shots to prevent the release of CVPSOF by the dead line detection function when the high speed autoreclosing is in progress The Dead line time setting parameter is set to 0 2 seconds by default This is suitable in most applications The delay must not...

Page 834: ...ead line value current Used also in auto activation logic Voltage dead Lin Val 0 01 0 58 xUn 0 01 0 40 Dead line value voltage Used also in auto activation logic Cur voltage Det time 0 60000 ms 10 20 Time delay for volt age and current based detection Operate time delay 0 120000 ms 10 20 Delay for the de layed start input SOTF reset time 0 60000 ms 10 1000 SOTF detection pe riod after initializa t...

Page 835: ...tification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Fault locator SCEFRFLO FLOC 21FL 5 7 2 Function block Figure 442 Function block 5 7 3 Functionality The fault locator function SCEFRFLO provides impedance based fault location It is designed for radially operated distribution systems It is applicable for locating short circuits in all kinds of distribution networks Earth faults can be located in effectively...

Page 836: ...tage magnitudes must exceed the threshold values of 2 xIn and 3 xUn respectively The function can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of SCEFRFLO can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 443 Functional module diagram 5 7 4 1 Phase selection logic Iden...

Page 837: ...ndividual earth faults When the faults are located at the same feeder the corresponding phase to phase loop either AB Fault or BC Fault or CA Fault is used for calculation When the faults are located at different feeders the phase to earth loop either AG Fault or BG Fault or CG Fault corresponding to the faulty phase at the protected feeder is used for calculation 5 7 4 2 Fault impedance and dista...

Page 838: ...se of two phase to earth fault In this case the phase to earth loop either AG Fault or BG Fault or CG Fault corresponding to the faulty phase at the protected feeder is used for calculation Figure 444 shows the phase to earth fault loop model The following impedances are measured and stored in the recorded data of SCEFRFLO Flt point resistance Rfault Equation 153 Flt loop resistance R R R N fault ...

Page 839: ...ault loop model In case of radial feeders this algorithm can be applied with low impedance effectively earthed systems where the fault current is fed from one side only The Load modelling algorithm has been especially designed for unearthed systems The Load modelling algorithm requires the Equivalent load Dis setting that is an equivalent load distance as an additional parameter The derivation and...

Page 840: ... the feeder U d tap d 1 The fictional voltage drop if the entire load would be tapped at the end d 1 of the feeder not drawn in Figure 445 The calculation of this value requires data from the DMS system Alternatively the setting Equivalent load Dis can be determined by conducting a single phase earth fault test R fault 0 Ω at that point of the feeder where the maximum actual voltage drop takes pla...

Page 841: ...is ratio is estimated by SCEFRFLO and stored in the recorded data Flt to Lod Cur ratio together with the fault distance estimate In case of unearthed network sufficient fault current magnitude resulting in Flt to Lod Cur ratio 1 can be achieved for example with proper switching operations in the background network if possible which increase the fault current If the faulty feeder is re energized af...

Page 842: ...hen calculated with the fault loop model This model requires positive sequence impedances of the protected feeder to be given as settings If these settings are not available valid impedance values can be calculated also without the fault loop model with setting Enable simple model TRUE However valid distance estimate that is the conversion of measured impedance electrical fault distance into a phy...

Page 843: ...calculation is most accurate when the calculation is made with the fault loop model This model requires positive sequence impedances of the protected feeder to be given as settings If these settings are not available valid impedance values can be calculated also without the fault loop model with setting Enable simple model TRUE However valid distance estimate that is the conversion of measured imp...

Page 844: ...t distance estimation For earth faults the load compensation is done automatically inside the fault distance calculation algorithm For short circuit faults load compensation is enabled with setting Load Com PP loops The default value is Enabled The parameter should be set to Disabled only if the ratio between the expected fault current and load current is large or when the fault distance estimate ...

Page 845: ...ttings and these can be set at maximum for three line sections A B and C Each section is enabled by entering a section length which differs from zero to settings Line Len section A Line Len section B or Line Len section C in the order section A section B section C The earth fault loops require both positive sequence and zero sequence impedances for example R1 line section A and X1 line section A R...

Page 846: ...es X a r km n en 1 4 10 2 0 5 ω ln Ω Equation 166 ω n 2 π f n where f n fundamental frequency Hz a en a a a 12 23 31 3 the geometric average of phase distances m a xy distance m between phases x and y r radius m for single conductor Figure 449 Typical distribution line tower configurations Example values of positive sequence impedances for typical medium voltage overhead lines are given in the fol...

Page 847: ...h positive sequence and zero sequence impedances For short circuit faults zero sequence impedances are not required The positive sequence impedance per unit values for the lines are typically known or can easily be obtained from data sheets The zero sequence values are generally not as easy to obtain as they depend on the actual installation conditions and configurations Sufficient accuracy can ho...

Page 848: ...Ph leakage Ris setting represents the leakage losses of the protected feeder in terms of resistance per phase The Ph capacitive React setting represents the total phase to earth capacitive reactance of the protected feeder per phase Based on experience a proper estimate for Ph leakage Ris should be about 20 40 Ph capacitive React Figure 450 Equivalent diagram of the protected feeder R L0F Ph leaka...

Page 849: ...tion START of ROVPTOV but not seen by the forward looking earth fault protection function START of DEFLPDEF the fault is located outside the protected feeder This is mandatory for valid measurement of setting Ph capacitive React After a set delay TONGAPC the input TRIGG_XC0F is activated and the parameter XC0F Calc in the recorded data is updated The delay TONGAPC must be set longer than the start...

Page 850: ...gs R1 line section A X1 line section A R0 line section A X0 line section A R1 line section B X1 line section B R0 line section B X0 line section B R1 line section C X1 line section C R0 line section C and X0 line section C are used for the fault distance calculation and for conversion from reactance to physical fault distance This option should be used in the case of a non homogeneous line when th...

Page 851: ...to 10 km in 1 km steps marked with circles An error of nearly eight per cent at maximum is created by the conversion procedure when modeling a non homogenous line with only one section By using impedance model with three line sections there is no error in the conversion The previous example assumed a short circuit fault and thus only positive sequence impedance settings were used The results howev...

Page 852: ...udged by maximum variation in fault distance estimate and defined with setting Distance estimate Va in the same unit as the fault distance estimate When successive estimates during one fundamental cycle are within final value Distance estimate Va the fault distance estimate mean of successive estimates is recorded In case stabilization criterion has not been fulfilled the fault distance estimate i...

Page 853: ...e FLT_DISTANCE is between the settings Low alarm Dis limit and High alarm Dis limit the ALARM output is activated The ALARM output can be utilized for example in regions with waterways or other places where knowledge of certain fault locations is of high importance Figure 455 An example of the ALARM output use 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions 620 series Technical Manual 853 ...

Page 854: ...ual voltage Uo Both alternatives are covered by setting the configuration parameter Phase voltage Meas to Accurate When the Phase voltage Meas setting is set to Ph to ph without Uo and only phase to phase voltages are available but not Uo only short circuit measuring loops fault loops AB Fault BC Fault or CA Fault or ABC Fault can be measured accurately In this case the earth fault loops fault loo...

Page 855: ...tain The triggering of SCEFRFLO can also be inhibited during the autoreclosing sequence This is achieved by connecting the inverted READY signal from the autoreclosing function DARREC which indicates that the autoreclosing sequence is in progress to the BLOCK input of SCEFRFLO Blocking of the SCEFRFLO triggering is suggested during the autoreclosing sequence when the load compensation or steady st...

Page 856: ...ase se quence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode TRIGG BOOLEAN 0 False Distance calculation triggering signal TRIGG_XC0F BOOLEAN 0 False XC0F calculation trig gering signal Table 818 SCEFRFLO Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Fault location alarm signal 5 7 7 Settings Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H 856 620 series Technical Manua...

Page 857: ...limit 0 000 1 000 pu 0 001 0 000 High alarm limit for calculated distance Low alarm Dis limit 0 000 1 000 pu 0 001 0 000 Low alarm limit for calculated distance Equivalent load Dis 0 00 1 00 0 01 0 50 Equivalent load dis tance when EF al gorithm equals to load modelling R1 line section B 0 000 1000 000 ohm pu 0 001 1 000 Positive sequence line resistance line section B X1 line section B 0 000 1000...

Page 858: ...r mode for distance calcu lation Table 822 SCEFRFLO Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description EF algorithm Sel 1 Load compensa tion 2 Load modelling 1 Load compensa tion Selection for PhE loop calculation al gorithm EF algorithm Cur Sel 1 Io based 2 I2 based 1 Io based Selection for earth fault current model Load Com PP loops 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Enabled En...

Page 859: ...T_Q INT32 0 511 Fault distance quality RFLOOP FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault loop resist ance in primary ohms XFLOOP FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault loop reac tance in primary ohms XFPHASE FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Positive se quence fault re actance in pri mary ohms IFLT_PER_ILD FLOAT32 0 00 60000 00 Fault to load cur rent ratio S_CALC FLOAT32 0 00 1 00 Estimated equiv alent load dis tance XC0F_...

Page 860: ...ult loop reac tance Flt phase reac tance FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault phase reac tance Flt point resist ance FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault resistance Flt to Lod Cur ra tio FLOAT32 0 00 60000 00 Fault to load cur rent ratio Equivalent load Dis FLOAT32 0 00 1 00 Estimated equiv alent load dis tance XC0F Calc FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Estimated PhE capacitive reac tance of the line Pre fault tim...

Page 861: ...age phase B angle V Pre Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Pre fault voltage phase C magni tude V Pre Flt Phs C Angl FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Pre fault voltage phase C angle A Flt Phs A Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Fault current phase A magni tude A Flt Phs A angle FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Fault current phase A angle A Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Fault current phase B magni tude A Fl...

Page 862: ...lue Measurement accuracy At the frequency f f n Impedance 2 5 or 0 25 Ω Distance 2 5 or 0 16 km 0 1 mile XC0F_CALC 2 5 or 50 Ω IFLT_PER_ILD 5 or 0 05 5 7 10 Technical revision history Table 825 SCEFRFLO Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement 5 8 Circuit breaker uncorresponding position start up UPCALH 5 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identifi...

Page 863: ...signals of the AR function 5 8 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of UPCALH can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Signal power supply check CB_OPEN_CMD CB_POSOPEN CB_POSCLOSE SI_PWR_ON OPERATE Protection activation ...

Page 864: ...N_CMD TRUE 5 8 5 Application The uncorresponding circuit breaker position means that the actual position of the circuit breaker s control switch is unmatched with the real position of the circuit breaker In a normal situation the function is used in cooperation with the autoreclosing function DARREC The operate signal can start the autoreclosing when detecting that the circuit breaker has opened i...

Page 865: ... delay 300 500 ms 1 300 Signal power on de lay time Table 829 UPCALH Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description CB open hold delay 300 500 ms 1 300 CB open hold delay time 5 8 8 Technical data Table 830 UPCALH Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions 620 series Technical M...

Page 866: ...uit is reported to the corresponding function block in the relay configuration The function starts and operates when TCSSCBR detects a trip circuit failure The operating time characteristic for the function is DT The function operates after a predefined operating time and resets when the fault disappears The function contains a blocking functionality Blocking deactivates the ALARM output and reset...

Page 867: ... program The activation of the BLOCK input prevents the ALARM output to be activated 6 1 5 Application TCSSCBR detects faults in the electrical control circuit of the circuit breaker The function can supervise both open and closed coil circuits This supervision is necessary to find out the vitality of the control circuits continuously Figure 460 shows an application of the trip circuit supervision...

Page 868: ...TCS is required only in a closed position the external shunt resistance can be omitted When the circuit breaker is in the open position TCS sees the situation as a faulty circuit One way to avoid TCS operation in this situation would be to block the supervision function whenever the circuit breaker is open Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H 868 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 869: ... contacts It is typical that the trip circuit contains more than one trip contact in parallel for example in transformer feeders where the trip of a Buchholz relay is connected in parallel with the feeder terminal and other relays involved The supervising current cannot detect if one or all the other contacts connected in parallel are not connected properly 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions 620 s...

Page 870: ...lel trip contacts and trip circuit supervision In case of parallel trip contacts the recommended way to do the wiring is that the TCS test current flows through all wires and joints Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H 870 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 871: ...t in use does not typically affect the supervising current injection Trip circuit supervision with auxiliary relays Many retrofit projects are carried out partially that is the old electromechanical relays are replaced with new ones but the circuit breaker is not replaced This creates a problem that the coil current of an old type circuit breaker can be too high for the protection relay trip conta...

Page 872: ... shunt resistance 1 kΩ R s trip coil resistance If the external shunt resistance is used it has to be calculated not to interfere with the functionality of the supervision or the trip coil Too high a resistance causes too high a voltage drop jeopardizing the requirement of at least 20 V over the internal circuit while a resistance too low can enable false operations of the trip coil Table 831 Valu...

Page 873: ...sconnected Incorrect connections and use of trip circuit supervision Although the TCS circuit consists of two separate contacts it must be noted that those are designed to be used as series connected to guarantee the breaking capacity given in the technical manual of the protection relay In addition to the weak breaking capacity the internal resistor is not dimensioned to withstand current without...

Page 874: ...f the protection relay R2 is disconnected as shown in the figure while the lower contact is still connected When the protection relay R2 operates the coil current starts to flow through the internal resistor of the protection relay R3 and the resistor burns immediately As proven with the previous examples both trip contacts must operate together Attention should also be paid for correct usage of t...

Page 875: ...Table 832 TCSSCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block input status Table 833 TCSSCBR Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output 6 1 7 Settings 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions 620 series Technical Manual 875 ...

Page 876: ...data Table 836 TCSSCBR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TCSSCBR Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 6 1 9 Technical revision history Table 837 TCSSBR Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement 6 2 Current circuit supervision CCSPVC 6 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC ...

Page 877: ...the situation remains unchanged and extremely high voltages stress the secondary circuit 6 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of CCSPVC can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 468 Functional module diagram D...

Page 878: ...saturated due to high fault currents The value of the differential current is available in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through other communication tools The value is calculated with the equation I DIFF I A I B I C I REF _ _ _ _ _ Equation 174 The Start value setting is given in units of In of the phase current transformer The possible difference in the phase and reference current transf...

Page 879: ...he two sets When an error in any CT circuit is detected the protection functions concerned can be blocked and an alarm given In case of high currents the unequal transient saturation of CT cores with a different remanence or saturation factor can result in differences in the secondary currents from the two CT cores An unwanted blocking of protection functions during the transient stage must then b...

Page 880: ...transformer Current measurement with two independent three phase sets of CT cores Figure 471 and Figure 472 show diagrams of connections where the reference current is measured with two independent three phase sets of CT cores Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H 880 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 881: ...en using the measurement core for reference current measurement it should be noted that the saturation level of the measurement core is much lower than with the protection core This should be taken into account when setting the current circuit supervision function 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions 620 series Technical Manual 881 ...

Page 882: ...ect connection The currents must be measured with two independent cores that is the phase currents must be measured with a different core than the reference current A connection diagram shows an example of a case where the phase currents and the reference currents are measured from the same core Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H 882 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 883: ...NAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current I_REF SIGNAL 0 Reference current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for all bi nary outputs Table 839 CCSPVC Output signals Name Type Description FAIL BOOLEAN Fail output ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions 620 series Technical Manual 883 ...

Page 884: ...high phase current 6 2 8 Monitored data Table 842 CCSPVC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IDIFF FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Differential current CCSPVC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 6 2 9 Technical data Table 843 CCSPVC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time 1 30 ms 6 2 10 Technical revision history Table 844 CCSPVC Technical revision history Tec...

Page 885: ... calculating or measuring the zero sequence voltage is not available CTSRCTF can be used for detecting the single phase failure on the current transformer secondary for protection application involving two or three sets of the three phase current transformers CTSRCTF detects a fault in the measurement circuit and issues an alarm which can be used for blocking the protection functions for example d...

Page 886: ...tion Min operate current depends on the no load current rating Typically it can be set equal to the transformer no load current rating CT failure detection This module detects the CT secondary failure in any sets of current transformers The module continuously scans the value of all the three phase currents in all groups of current transformers to detect any sudden drop in the current value to zer...

Page 887: ...under specific condition to avoid any false operation during a system fault situation When any of the following condition is satisfied the function is internally blocked and the FAIL output is deactivated immediately Magnitude of any phase current for any group of current transformers exceeds the Max operate current setting The magnitude of phase current is calculated from the peak to peak value M...

Page 888: ... the sets of the current transformer which then results in a change in the negativesequence current ΔI2 in the healthy set This change in the negative sequence current on the healthy sides that is other than where a zero current has been detected blocks the function In case of a lightly loaded transformer up to 30 the change in the negativesequence current may be very negligible However a phase di...

Page 889: ...nce current from set 2 I_A3 SIGNAL 0 Phase A current from set 3 I_B3 SIGNAL 0 Phase B current from set 3 I_C3 SIGNAL 0 Phase C current from set 3 I2_3 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current from set 3 BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 846 CTSRCTF Output signals Name Type Description FAIL BOOLEAN CT secondary failure FAIL_CTGRP1 BOOLEAN CT secondary failure grou...

Page 890: ...urrent 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 10 Maximum I2 cur rent in healthy set 6 3 8 Monitored data Table 848 CTSRCTF Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description INT_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Function blocked inter nally CTSRCTF Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 6 3 9 Technical data Table 849 CTSRCTF Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time 1 30 ms 1 Including the dela...

Page 891: ... impedance differential protection for detecting the broken CT secondary wires The differential current is taken as an input for the protection relay During normal CT condition the value of the differential current is zero However when the CT is broken the secondary differential current starts flowing and it is used for generating alarms To avoid faulty operation HZCCxSPVC should have a sensitive ...

Page 892: ...ed if the differential current exceeds the value set in the Start value setting Timer The time characteristic is according to DT When the alarm timer reaches the value set by Alarm delay time the ALARM output is activated If the fault disappears before the module generates an alarm signal the reset timer is activated If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time the alarm timer rese...

Page 893: ...ciple of HZCCxSPVC is similar to the high impedance differential protection function HIxPDIF However the current setting of HZCCxSPVC is set to be much more sensitive than HIxPDIF and it operates with a higher time delay A typical example of the HZCCxSPVC Start value setting is 0 1 pu with an Alarm delay time of 3 s or more As the current setting of HZCCxSPVC is more sensitive than the actual diff...

Page 894: ... differential current of approximately 1 0 pu The main differential protection HIxPDIF cannot operate because of the higher current setting All CTs must have the same ratio The ALARM output of the CT supervision function can be used to energize an auxiliary relay which can short circuit the current CT wires making the busbar differential protection inoperative This arrangement does not prevent unw...

Page 895: ...t BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating blocking mode Table 852 HZCCCSPVC Input signals Name Type Default Description I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating blocking mode Table 853 HZCCASPVC Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output Table 854 HZCCBSPVC Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output Table 855...

Page 896: ...1 on Operation Off On Start value 1 0 100 0 In 0 1 10 0 Start value per centage of the nominal current Alarm delay time 100 300000 ms 10 3000 Alarm delay time Alarm output mode 1 Non latched 3 Lockout 3 Lockout Select the opera tion mode for alarm output Table 859 HZCCBSPVC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 10 20 Reset dela...

Page 897: ...e Values Range Unit Description HZCCBSPVC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 864 HZCCCSPVC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description HZCCCSPVC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 6 4 10 Technical data Table 865 HZCCxSPVC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current measured fn 2 Hz 1 5 of ...

Page 898: ...rvision function SEQSPVC is used to block the voltage measuring functions when failure occurs in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer or combi sensor or voltage sensor and protection relay to avoid misoperations of the voltage protection functions SEQSPVC has two algorithms a negative sequence based algorithm and a delta current and delta voltage algorithm A criterion based on th...

Page 899: ...e is reported to the decision logic module Voltage check The phase voltage magnitude is checked when deciding whether the fuse failure is a three two or a single phase fault The module makes a phase specific comparison between each voltage input and the Seal in voltage setting If the input voltage is lower than the setting the corresponding phase is reported to the decision logic module Current an...

Page 900: ...eaker at one end and energizing the line from the other end onto a fault could lead to an improper operation of SEQSPVC with an open breaker If this is considered to be an important disadvantage the CB_CLOSED input is to be connected to FALSE In this way only the second criterion can activate the delta function The second condition requires the delta criterion to be fulfilled in one phase together...

Page 901: ... If the fuse failure detection is active for more than five seconds and at the same time all the phase voltage values are below the set value of the Seal in voltage setting with Ena ble seal in turned to True the function acti vates the FUSE_3PH output signal External fuse failure detection The MINCB_OPEN input signal is supposed to be connected through a protection relay binary input to the N C a...

Page 902: ...e g blown fuse REF 615 Figure 481 Fault in a circuit from the voltage transformer to the protection relay A fuse failure occurs due to blown fuses broken wires or intended substation operations The negative sequence component based function can be used to detect different types of single phase or two phase fuse failures However at least one of the three circuits from the voltage transformers must ...

Page 903: ...lse Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit Table 869 SEQSPVC Output signals Name Type Description FUSEF_3PH BOOLEAN Three phase start of function FUSEF_U BOOLEAN General start of function 6 5 7 Settings Table 870 SEQSPVC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 871 SEQSPVC Non group settings Adv...

Page 904: ... 1 True 0 False Enabling seal in functionality Current dead Lin Val 0 05 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 05 Operate level for open phase current detection 6 5 8 Monitored data Table 872 SEQSPVC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description SEQSPVC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 6 5 9 Technical data Table 873 SEQSPVC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time NPS function U F...

Page 905: ...n time exceeds the set limits It utilizes a binary input to indicate the active operation condition The accumulated operation time is one of the parameters for scheduling a service on the equipment like motors It indicates the use of the machine and hence the mechanical wear and tear Generally the equipment manufacturers provide a maintenance schedule based on the number of hours of service 6 6 4 ...

Page 906: ...me mode is set to Timed Warn Alm the WARNING and ALARM outputs are activated at the time of day set using Operating time hour The Operating time hour setting is used to set the hour of day in Coordinated Universal Time UTC The setting has to be adjusted according to the local time and local daylight saving time The function contains a blocking functionality Activation of the BLOCK input blocks bot...

Page 907: ...oup settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Warning value 0 299999 h 1 8000 Warning value for operation time su pervision Alarm value 0 299999 h 1 10000 Alarm value for op eration time super vision Table 877 MDSOPT Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Initial value 0 299999 h 1 0 Init...

Page 908: ...9 Technical data Table 879 MDSOPT Technical data Description Value Motor runtime measurement accuracy 1 0 5 6 6 10 Technical revision history Table 880 MDSOPT Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement D Internal improvement 1 Of the reading for a stand alone relay without time synchronization Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H 908 620 series...

Page 909: ...reaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of the circuit breaker The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations has reached a predefined value The energy is calculated from the measured input currents as a sum of I yt values Alarms are generated when the calculated values exceed the threshold settings The function contains a blocking functio...

Page 910: ...described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 485 Functional module diagram 7 1 4 1 Circuit breaker status The Circuit breaker status sub function monitors the position of the circuit breaker that is whether the breaker is in open closed or invalid position The operation of the breaker status monitoring can be described by using a module d...

Page 911: ...he status of the breaker is indicated by the binary outputs OPENPOS INVALIDPOS and CLOSEPOS for open invalid and closed position respectively 7 1 4 2 Circuit breaker operation monitoring The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction is to indicate if the circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring can be desc...

Page 912: ...r contact travel time Traveling time calculator The travel time can be calculated using two different methods based on the setting Travel time Clc mode When the setting Travel time Clc mode is From Pos to Pos the contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between auxiliary contacts state change The opening travel time is measured between the opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary co...

Page 913: ...een the start of the main contact opening and the OPEN_CB_EXE command Similarly there is a time gap t 2 between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open Therefore to incorporate the times t 1 and t 2 a correction factor needs to be added with t open to get the actual opening time This factor is added with the Opening time Cor t 2 t 1 setting The clo...

Page 914: ...via communications The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the Counter initial Val parameter and by setting the parameter Initial CB Rmn life in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI Alarm limit check The OPR_ALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations exceeds the value set with the Alarm Op number threshold setting However if the...

Page 915: ...auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay is equal to the value set with the Difference Cor time setting When the setting is negative the calculation starts in advance by the correction time before the auxiliary contact opens The accumulated energy outputs IPOW_A _B _C are available in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications The values can be reset by setting ...

Page 916: ... current is more than the rated fault current set with the Rated fault current setting the possible operations are zero The remaining life of the tripping current in between these two values is calculated based on the trip curve given by the manufacturer The Op number rated and Op number fault parameters set the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current and at the rated fau...

Page 917: ...able in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications Alarm limit check If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the Spring charge time setting the subfunction generates the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm It is possible to block the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm signal by activating the BLOCK binary input 7 1 4 8 Gas pressure supervision The gas pressure supervisi...

Page 918: ...uit breaker mechanism Therefore detecting excessive traveling time is needed During the opening cycle operation the main contact starts opening The auxiliary contact A opens the auxiliary contact B closes and the main contact reaches its opening position During the closing cycle the first main contact starts closing The auxiliary contact B opens the auxiliary contact A closes and the main contact ...

Page 919: ...pends on the tripping current and the remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer Example for estimating the remaining life of a circuit breaker Figure 497 Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV 630 A 16 kA vacuum interrupter Nr the number of closing opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker Ia the current at the time of tripping of...

Page 920: ...eaker spring should be charged within a specified time Therefore detecting long spring charging time indicates that it is time for the circuit breaker maintenance The last value of the spring charging time can be used as a service value Gas pressure supervision The gas pressure supervision monitors the gas pressure inside the arc chamber When the pressure becomes too low compared to the required v...

Page 921: ...s RST_SPR_T BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for the charging time of the CB spring Table 882 SSCBR Output signals Name Type Description TRV_T_OP_ALM BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value TRV_T_CL_ALM BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value SPR_CHR_ALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value OPR_ALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations ex ceeds alarm limit OPR_LO BOOLEAN Numb...

Page 922: ...r number of opera tions Lockout Op num ber 0 99999 1 300 Lock out limit for number of opera tions Current exponent 0 00 2 00 0 01 2 00 Current exponent setting for energy calculation Difference Cor time 10 10 ms 1 5 Corr factor for time dif in aux and main contacts open time Alm Acc currents Pwr 0 00 20000 00 0 01 2500 00 Setting of alarm level for accumula ted currents power LO Acc currents Pwr 0...

Page 923: ...9 1 500 Alarm level for CB remaining life Pressure alarm time 0 60000 ms 1 10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm in ms Pres lockout time 0 60000 ms 10 10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout in ms Ini inactive days 0 9999 1 0 Initial value of the inactive days coun ter Inactive Alm hours 0 23 h 1 0 Alarm time of the inactive days coun ter in hours 7 1 8 Monitored data Table 885 SSCBR Monitored data ...

Page 924: ...s in the range of 0 1 10 I n 5 0 at currents in the range of 10 40 I n Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Travelling time measurement 10 ms 0 ms 7 1 10 Technical revision history Table 887 SSCBR Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Added the possibility to reset spring charge time and breaker travel times C Removed the DIFTRVTOPALM and DIFTRVT CLALM outputs and t...

Page 925: ...asuring circuit breaker travelling time from opening closing command and auxili ary contact state signal change F Alarm Op number range increased from 9999 to 99999 Lockout Op number setting range increased from 9999 to 99999 Counter initial value setting range increased from 9999 to 99999 1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions 620 series Technical Manual 925 ...

Page 926: ...rents The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI is used for monitoring and metering the phase sequence voltages The frequency measurement FMMXU is used for monitoring and metering the power system frequency The three phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU is used for monitoring and metering the active power P reactive power Q apparent power S and power factor PF and for calculating the accumulate...

Page 927: ...inute indicating the analog signal demand over the demand time interval proceeding the update time The actual rolling demand values are stored in the memory until the value is updated at the end of the next time interval The Logarithmic calculation mode uses the periodic calculation using a log10 function over the demand time interval to replicate thermal demand ammeters The logarithmic demand cal...

Page 928: ...nt measurement RESCMMXU 1 of nominal In Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU 1 of nominal Un Phase sequence current measurement CSMSQI 1 of the nominal In Phase sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI 1 of the nominal Un Three phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU 1 5 of the nominal Sn When the frequency measurement function FMMXU is unable to measure the network frequency in the undervoltage sit...

Page 929: ...phase current measurement CMMXU High limit A high limit Low limit A low limit High high limit A high high limit Low low limit A low low limit Three phase voltage measurement VMMXU High limit V high limit Low limit V low limit High high limit V high high limit Low low limit V low low limit Residual current measurement RE SCMMXU High limit A high limit res Low limit High high limit A Hi high limit r...

Page 930: ...A low low Lim Phase sequence voltage measure ment VSMSQI High limit Ps Seq V high limit Ng Seq V high limit Zro V high limit Low limit Ps Seq V low limit Ng Seq V low limit Zro V low limit High high limit Ps Seq V Hi high Lim Ng Seq V Hi high Lim Zro V Hi high Lim Low low limit Ps Seq V low low Lim Ng Seq V low low Lim Three phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU High limit Low limit High high ...

Page 931: ... for CMMXU A deadband 2500 2 5 of the total measuring range of 40 I_INST_A I_DB_A 0 30 If I_INST_A changes to 0 40 the reporting delay is t s s 40 0 2500 1000 0 40 0 30 100 10 Table 890 Parameters for deadband calculation Function Settings Maximum minimum range Three phase current meas urement CMMXU A deadband 40 0 40xIn Three phase voltage meas urement VMMXU V Deadband 4 0 4xUn Residual current m...

Page 932: ...imultaneously when either one of the S or PF values exceeds the preset limit Power and energy calculation The three phase power is calculated from the phase to earth voltages and phase to earth currents The power measurement function is capable of calculating a complex power based on the fundamental frequency component phasors DFT S U I U I U I A A B B C C Equation 178 Once the complex apparent po...

Page 933: ...calculated power values are presented in units of kWh kVArh or in units of MWh MVArh When the energy counter reaches its defined maximum value the counter value is reset and restarted from zero Changing the value of the Energy unit Mult setting resets the accumulated energy values to the initial values that is EA_FWD_ACM to Forward Wh Initial EA_RV_ACM to Reverse Wh Initial ER_FWD_ACM to Forward V...

Page 934: ... input signal and hence prevent the noise to be shown in the user display The zero clamping is done for the measured analog signals and angle values The demand values are used to neglect sudden changes in the measured analog signals when monitoring long time values for the input signal The demand values are linear average values of the measured signal over a settable demand interval The demand val...

Page 935: ...EAN Low warning LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN Low alarm 8 1 4 4 Settings Table 894 CMMXU Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Num of phases 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit supervision A high high limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 1 40 High alarm current limit A high limit 0 00 40 00 ...

Page 936: ... Description IL1 A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured cur rent amplitude phase A IL2 A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured cur rent amplitude phase B IL3 A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured cur rent amplitude phase C Max demand IL1 FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Maximum de mand for Phase A Max demand IL2 FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Maximum de mand for Phase B Max demand IL3 FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Maximum de mand for Ph...

Page 937: ... magnitude of in stantaneous val ue I_ANGL_A FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg IL1 current angle I_DB_A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn IL1 Amplitude magnitude of re ported value I_DMD_A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Demand value of IL1 current I_RANGE_A Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low IL1 Amplitude range I_INST_B FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn IL2 Amplitude magnitude of in stantaneous val ue I_ANGL_B FLOAT32 18...

Page 938: ...e ported value I_DMD_C FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Demand value of IL3 current I_RANGE_C Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low IL3 Amplitude range 8 1 4 6 Technical data Table 897 CMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f n 2 Hz 0 5 or 0 002 I n at currents in the range of 0 01 4 00 I n Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB...

Page 939: ... E Internal improvement 8 1 5 Three phase voltage measurement VMMXU 8 1 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase voltage measure ment VMMXU 3U 3V 8 1 5 2 Function block Figure 502 Function block 8 1 5 3 Signals Table 899 VMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt ag...

Page 940: ...f 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit supervision V high high limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 1 40 High alarm voltage limit V high limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 1 20 High warning volt age limit V low limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low warning volt age limit V low low limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low alarm voltage limit V deadband 100 100000 1 10000 Deadband configu ration value for...

Page 941: ...U_ANGL_AB FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg U12 angle U_DB_AB FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn U12 Amplitude magnitude of re ported value U_DMD_AB FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Demand value of U12 voltage U_RANGE_AB Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low U12 Amplitude range U_INST_BC FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn U23 Amplitude magnitude of in stantaneous val ue U_ANGL_BC FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg U23 angle U_DB_BC FLOAT32...

Page 942: ...ow U31 Amplitude range U_INST_A FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn UL1 Amplitude magnitude of in stantaneous val ue U_ANGL_A FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg UL1 angle U_DMD_A FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn Demand value of UL1 voltage U_INST_B FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn UL2 Amplitude magnitude of in stantaneous val ue U_ANGL_B FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg UL2 angle U_DMD_B FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn Demand value of UL2 voltage U_INST_C FL...

Page 943: ...02 U n Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 RMS No suppression 8 1 5 7 Technical revision history Table 905 VMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Phase and phase to phase voltage angle val ues and demand values added to Monitored data view C Internal improvement D Internal improvement 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 620 series Technical Manual 943...

Page 944: ...ge AB BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for all binary outputs Table 907 VAMMXU Output signals Name Type Description HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning LOW_WARN BOOLEAN Low warning LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN Low alarm 8 1 6 4 Settings Table 908 VAMMXU Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On V high hi...

Page 945: ... ampli tude phase AB UL1 kV FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn Measured phase to earth voltage amplitude phase A U_INST_AB FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn U12 Amplitude magni tude of instantaneous value U_ANGL_AB FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg U12 angle U_DB_AB FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn U12 Amplitude magni tude of reported value U_DMD_AB FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Demand value of U12 voltage U_RANGE_AB Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 hi...

Page 946: ...nction description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Residual current measurement RESCMMXU Io In 8 1 7 2 Function block Figure 504 Function block 8 1 7 3 Signals Table 912 RESCMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for all bi nary outputs Table 913 RESCMMXU Output signals Name Ty...

Page 947: ...ects used meas urement mode 8 1 7 5 Monitored data Table 916 RESCMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description Io A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured residu al current I_INST_RES FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Residual current Amplitude mag nitude of instan taneous value I_ANGL_RES FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Residual current angle I_DB_RES FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Residual current Amplitude mag n...

Page 948: ...where n 2 3 4 5 RMS No suppression 8 1 7 7 Technical revision history Table 918 RESCMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change B C Residual current angle and demand value added to Monitored data view Recorded da ta added for minimum and maximum values with timestamps D Monitored data Min demand Io maximum val ue range RESCMSTA2 MinAmps maxVal f is corrected to 40 00 E Internal impro...

Page 949: ...ter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On V Hi high limit res 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 20 High alarm voltage limit V high limit res 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 05 High warning volt age limit V deadband res 100 100000 1 10000 Deadband configu ration value for in tegral calculation percentage of dif ference between min and max as 0 001 s Table 922 RESVMMXU Non group se...

Page 950: ...esidual voltage U_RANGE_RES Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low Residual voltage Amplitude range 8 1 8 6 Technical data Table 924 RESVMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage f f n 2 Hz 0 5 or 0 002 U n Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 RMS No suppression 8 1 8 7 Technical revision histor...

Page 951: ...measurement range are considered to be out of range and the minimum and maximum values are then shown When the frequencies cannot be measured for example due to too low voltage amplitude the default value for frequency measurement can be selected with the Def frequency Sel setting parameter In the Nominal mode the frequency is set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz and in Zero mode the frequency is set to zero and...

Page 952: ...ral calculation percentage of dif ference between min and max as 0 001 s Table 928 FMMXU Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Def frequency Sel 1 Nominal 2 Zero 1 Nominal Default frequency selection 8 1 9 6 Monitored data Table 929 FMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description f Hz FLOAT32 35 00 75 00 Hz Measured fre quency F_INST FLOAT32 ...

Page 953: ...ent measurement CSMSQI 8 1 10 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Sequence current measurement CSMSQI I1 I2 I0 I1 I2 I0 8 1 10 2 Function block Figure 507 Function block 8 1 10 3 Signals Table 932 CSMSQI Input signals Name Type Default Description I 0 SIGNAL 0 Zero sequence cur rent I 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence cur...

Page 954: ...im 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 20 High alarm current limit for negative sequence current Ng Seq A High limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 05 High warning cur rent limit for neg ative sequence cur rent Ng Seq A low limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low warning cur rent limit for neg ative sequence cur rent Ng Seq A low low Lim 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low alarm current limit for negative sequence current Ng Seq A deadband 100...

Page 955: ...ce current PsSeq A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured posi tive sequence current ZroSeq A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured zero sequence current I2_INST FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Negative se quence current amplitude in stantaneous val ue I2_ANGL FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Negative se quence current angle I2_DB FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Negative se quence current amplitude re ported value I2_RANGE Enum 0 norm...

Page 956: ..._ANGL FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Zero sequence current angle I0_DB FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Zero sequence current ampli tude reported value I0_RANGE Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low Zero sequence current ampli tude range 8 1 10 6 Technical data Table 935 CSMSQI Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f f n 2 Hz 1 0 or 0...

Page 957: ...ption IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI U1 U2 U0 V1 V2 V0 8 1 11 2 Function block Figure 508 Function block 8 1 11 3 Signals Table 937 VSMSQI Input signals Name Type Default Description U 0 SIGNAL 0 Zero sequence volt age U 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase se quence voltage U 2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase se quence voltage 8 1 ...

Page 958: ... Lim 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 20 High alarm voltage limit for negative sequence voltage Ng Seq V High limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 05 High warning volt age limit for nega tive sequence volt age Ng Seq V low limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low warning volt age limit for nega tive sequence volt age Ng Seq V low low Lim 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low alarm voltage limit for negative sequence voltage Ng Seq V deadband 100 1...

Page 959: ...nce voltage PsSeq kV FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Measured posi tive sequence voltage ZroSeq kV FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Measured zero sequence volt age U2_INST FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Negative se quence voltage amplitude in stantaneous val ue U2_ANGL FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Negative se quence voltage angle U2_DB FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Negative se quence voltage amplitude re ported value U2_RANGE Enum 0 norm...

Page 960: ... 00 deg Zero sequence voltage angle U0_DB FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Zero sequence voltage ampli tude reported value U0_RANGE Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low Zero sequence voltage ampli tude range 8 1 11 6 Technical data Table 940 VSMSQI Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured f n 2 Hz At voltages in range 0 01 1 15 U n ...

Page 961: ...A SIGNAL 0 Phase A voltage U_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B voltage U_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C voltage RSTACM BOOLEAN 0 False Reset of accumulated energy reading 8 1 12 4 Settings Table 942 PEMMXU Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Power unit Mult 3 Kilo 6 Mega 3 Kilo Unit multiplier for presentation of the power related val ues E...

Page 962: ...everse VArh Initial 0 999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy 8 1 12 5 Monitored data Table 944 PEMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description S kVA FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Total Apparent Power P kW FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Total Active Pow er Q kVAr FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Total Reactive Power PF FLOAT32 1 00 1 00 Average Power factor RSTA...

Page 963: ...er factor magnitude of in stantaneous val ue PF_DB FLOAT32 1 00 1 00 Power factor magnitude of re ported value PF_DMD FLOAT32 1 00 1 00 Demand value of power factor EA_RV_ACM INT64 0 999999999 kWh Accumulated re verse active en ergy value ER_RV_ACM INT64 0 999999999 kVArh Accumulated re verse reactive energy value EA_FWD_ACM INT64 0 999999999 kWh Accumulated for ward active ener gy value ER_FWD_AC...

Page 964: ...of maxi mum demand Time min dmd P Timestamp Time of mini mum demand Time max dmd Q Timestamp Time of maxi mum demand Time min dmd Q Timestamp Time of mini mum demand 8 1 12 6 Technical data Table 945 PEMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At all three currents in range 0 10 1 20 I n At all three voltages in range 0 50 1 15 U n At the frequency f n 1 Hz 1 5 for apparent power...

Page 965: ...ry relay signals such as protection start and trip signals or an external relay control signal via a binary input can be set to trigger the recording Recorded information is stored in a nonvolatile memory and can be uploaded for subsequent fault analysis 8 2 1 1 Recorded analog inputs The user can map any analog signal type of the protection relay to each analog channel of the disturbance recorder...

Page 966: ...ues with the High trigger level and Low trigger level parameters of the corresponding analog channel Both high level and low level violation triggering can be active simultaneously for the same analog channel If the duration of the limit violation condition exceeds the filter time of approximately 50 ms the recorder triggers In case of a low level limit violation if the measured value falls below ...

Page 967: ...dings monitored data The currently used memory space can be viewed with the Rec memory used monitored data It is shown as a percentage value The maximum number of recordings is 100 8 2 1 4 Sampling frequencies The sampling frequency of the disturbance recorder analog channels depends on the set rated frequency One fundamental cycle always contains the amount of samples set with the Storage rate pa...

Page 968: ... number octets The appropriate file extension is added to the end of the file name 8 2 1 6 Deletion of recordings There are several ways to delete disturbance recordings The recordings can be deleted individually or all at once Individual disturbance recordings can be deleted with PCM600 or any appropriate computer software which can access the protection relay s C COMTRADE folder The disturbance ...

Page 969: ...ng that is the so called pre trigger time with the Pre trg length parameter The duration of the data following the triggering that is the so called post trigger time is the difference between the recording length and the pre trigger time Changing the pre trigger time resets the history data and the current recording under collection 8 2 1 9 Operation modes Disturbance recorder has two operation mo...

Page 970: ...ing analog or binary channel The Exclusion time rem parameter counts downwards 8 2 2 Configuration The disturbance recorder can be configured with PCM600 or any tool supporting the IEC 61850 standard The disturbance recorder can be enabled or disabled with the Operation parameter under the Configuration Disturbance recorder General menu One analog signal type of the protection relay can be mapped ...

Page 971: ...umber of the protection relay and the content of the Bay name parameter are both included in the COMTRADE configuration file for identification purposes 8 2 3 Application The disturbance recorder is used for post fault analysis and for verifying the correct operation of protection relays and circuit breakers It can record both analog and binary signal information The analog inputs are recorded as ...

Page 972: ...aturation 2 Overwrite 1 1 Operation mode of the recorder Exclusion time 0 1 000 000 ms 1 0 The time dur ing which triggerings of same type are ignored Storage rate 32 16 8 samples per fundamental cycle 32 Storage rate of the wave form record ing Periodic trig time 0 604 800 s 10 0 Time between periodic trig gerings Stor mode periodic 0 Waveform 1 Trend cy cle 1 0 Storage mode for periodic triggeri...

Page 973: ... 0 Disabled Select the sig nal to be re corded by this channel Applicable values for this parameter are product var iant depend ent Every product var iant includes only the val ues that are applicable to that particu lar variant Table continues on the next page 1 Recordable values are available only in trend mode In waveform mode samples for this signal type are constant zeroes However these signa...

Page 974: ...or the analog channel Table 950 RDRE Non group binary channel settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 5 off Binary chan nel is enabled or disabled Level trigger mode 1 Positive or Rising 2 Negative or Falling 3 Both 4 Level trig ger off 1 1 Rising Level trigger mode for the binary chan nel Storage mode 0 Waveform 1 Trend cy cle 1 0 Storage mode for the ...

Page 975: ... settings are used Rec memory used 0 100 Storage mode for the binary channel Time to trigger 0 604 800 s Time remaining to the next periodic triggering 8 2 6 Technical revision history Table 953 RDRE Technical revision history Technical revision Change B ChNum changed to EChNum RADR s RADR9 12 added Analog channels 9 12 RBDR33 64 added Binary channels 33 64 C New channels added to parameter Channe...

Page 976: ...mA There are three user selectable conversion modes available for the 7 bit binary inputs where MSB is used as the SIGN bit the natural binary coded boolean input to the signed integer output binary coded decimal BCD input to the signed integer output and binary reflected GRAY coded input to the signed integer output 8 3 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Opera...

Page 977: ...et to TRUE 1 The LSB has the factor 1 Each following bit has the previous factor multiplied by 2 This is also called dual coding The operation mode BCD2INT is selected when the binary coded decimal coding is used for showing the position of the transformer tap changer The basic principle with the binary coded decimal coding is to calculate the sum of the bits set to TRUE 1 The four bits nibble BI3...

Page 978: ...t results in the lowest number of the taps in the tap changer TAP_POS output is dedicated for transferring the validated tap position for the functions that need tap position information for example OLATCC and TRxPTDF It includes both the actual position information and the status of reached end positions assuming that inputs END_POS_R and END_POS_L are connected Table 954 Truth table of the decod...

Page 979: ...vailable coding methods are BCD Gray and Natural binary coding Since the number of binary inputs are limited to seven the coding functions are limited to seven bits including the sign bit and thus the six bits are used in the coding functions The position limits for the tap positions at BCD Gray and Natural binary coding are 39 63 and 63 respectively In this example the transformer tap changer pos...

Page 980: ...BOOLEAN 0 False Binary input 3 BI3 BOOLEAN 0 False Binary input 4 BI4 BOOLEAN 0 False Binary input 5 BI5 BOOLEAN 0 False Binary input 6 SIGN_BIT BOOLEAN 0 False Binary input sign bit END_POS_R BOOLEAN 0 False End position raise or highest al lowed tap position reached END_POS_L BOOLEAN 0 False End position lower or lowest al lowed tap position reached TAP_POS INT8 0 Tap position indication Table 9...

Page 981: ...e Type Values Range Unit Description TAP_POS INT8 63 63 Tap position in dication 8 3 9 Technical data Table 959 TPOSYLTC Technical data Description Value Response time for binary inputs Typically 100 ms 8 3 10 Technical revision history Table 960 TPOSYLTC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Added new input TAP_POS C Internal improvement D Added new inputs END_TPOS_R and END_TPOS...

Page 982: ...ction description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Circuit breaker control CBXCBR I O CB I O CB Disconnector control DCXSWI I O DCC I O DCC Earthing switch control ESXSWI I O ESC I O ESC 9 1 2 Function block Figure 514 Function block Control functions 1MRS757644 H 982 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 983: ...g and short disturbances in an input are eliminated by filtering The binary input filtering time can be adjusted separately for each digital input used by the function block The validity of the digital inputs that indicate the object state is used as additional information in indications and event logging The reporting of faulty or intermediate position of the apparatus occurs after the Event dela...

Page 984: ...g functionalities for both opening and closing commands CLOSE_ENAD and OPEN_ENAD signals If the control command is executed against the blocking or if the enabling of the corresponding command is not valid CBXCBR DCXSWI and ESXSWI generate an error message When close command is given from communication via LHMI or activating the AU_CLOSE input it is carried out the EXE_CL output only if CLOSE_ENAD...

Page 985: ... open command is given AU_OPEN via communication or from LHMI and OPEN_ENAD signal is TRUE In addition the protection trip commands can be routed through the CBXCBR function by using the TRIP input When the TRIP input is TRUE the EXE_OP output is activated immediately and bypassing all enabling or blocking conditions The EXE_CL output is activated when the close command is given AU_CLOSE via commu...

Page 986: ...ength of the trip pulse Control methods The command execution mode can be set with the Control model setting The alternatives for command execution are direct control and secured object control which can be used to secure controlling The secured object control SBO is an important feature of the communication protocols that support horizontal communication because the command reservation and interl...

Page 987: ... Control procedure in the SBO method Local Remote operations The local remote selection affects CBXCBR DCXSWI and ESXSWI Local the opening and closing via communication is disabled Remote the opening and closing via LHMI is disabled AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE inputs function regardless of the local remote selection 9 1 5 Application In the field of distribution and sub transmission automation reliable c...

Page 988: ...tion POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Signal for open position of appara tus from I O POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Signal for close position of appara tus from I O ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1 True Enables opening ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1 True Enables closing BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks opening BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks closing AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Auxiliary open 1 2 AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Auxiliary close 1 2...

Page 989: ...False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE interlocking when TRUE Table 964 ESXSWI Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Apparatus open position POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Apparatus close position ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1 True Enables opening ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1 True Enables closing BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks opening BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks closing AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 ...

Page 990: ...es the command for close di rection OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok OPEN_ENAD BOOLEAN Opening is enabled based on the in put status CLOSE_ENAD BOOLEAN Closing is enabled based on the in put status Table 967 ESXSWI Output signals Name Type Description SELECTED BOOLEAN Object selected EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes th...

Page 991: ...t Step Default Description Operation counter 0 10000 1 0 Breaker operation cycles Adaptive pulse 0 False 1 True 1 True Stop in right posi tion Event delay 0 10000 ms 1 200 Event delay of the intermediate posi tion Vendor 0 External equipment vendor Serial number 0 External equipment serial number Model 0 External equipment model Table 970 DCXSWI Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit...

Page 992: ...n 5 off 1 on Operation mode on off Select timeout 10000 300000 ms 10000 30000 Select timeout in ms Pulse length 10 60000 ms 1 100 Open and close pulse length Control model 0 status only 1 direct with nor mal security 4 sbo with en hanced security 4 sbo with en hanced security Select control mod el Operation timeout 10 60000 ms 1 30000 Timeout for nega tive termination Identification ESXSWI1 switch...

Page 993: ...ON Dbpos 0 intermediate 1 open 2 closed 3 faulty Apparatus position in dication 9 1 9 Technical revision history Table 977 CBXCBR Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Interlocking bypass input ITL_BYPASS and opening enabled OPEN_ENAD clos ing enabled CLOSE_ENAD outputs added ITL_BYPASS bypasses the ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE states C Internal improvement D Added inputs TRIP and SYNC_...

Page 994: ... s respectively for Event delay set tings Default value changed to 30 s for Oper ation timeout setting C Outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are forced to FALSE in case status is Faulty 11 9 2 Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI and earthing switch indication ESSXSWI 9 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Disconnector ...

Page 995: ...nput used by the function block The validity of digital inputs that indicate the object state is used as additional information in indications and event logging Table 980 Status indication Input Status Output POSOPEN POSCLOSE POSITION Monitored data OKPOS OPENPOS CLOSEPOS 1 True 0 False 1 Open 1 True 1 True 0 False 0 False 1 True 2 Closed 1 True 0 False 1 True 1 True 1 True 3 Faulty Bad 11 0 False...

Page 996: ...para tus from I O 1 POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Signal for closed position of appa ratus from I O 1 Table 983 DCSXSWI Output signals Name Type Description OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok Table 984 ESSXSWI Output signals Name Type Description OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus clos...

Page 997: ...XSWI Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Identification ESSXSWI1 switch position Control Object identification Table 988 ESSXSWI Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Event delay 0 60000 ms 1 30000 Event delay of the intermediate posi tion Vendor 0 External equipment vendor Serial number 0 External equipment seria...

Page 998: ... CLOSEPOS are forced to FALSE in case status is Faulty 11 Table 992 ESSXSWI Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Maximum and default values changed to 60 s and 30 s respectively for Event delay set tings C Outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are forced to FALSE in case status is Faulty 11 9 3 Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN 9 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 id...

Page 999: ...rfectly synchronized It is used to perform a controlled reconnection of two systems which are divided after islanding and it is also used to perform a controlled reconnection of the system after reclosing The energizing check function checks that at least one side is dead to ensure that closing can be done safely The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outpu...

Page 1000: ...ork sections to be controlled by the circuit breaker that is which side has to be live and which side dead are determined by the setting A situation where both sides are dead is possible as well The actual value for defining the dead line or bus is given with the Dead bus value and Dead line value settings Similarly the actual values of live line or bus are defined with the Live bus value and Live...

Page 1001: ...nd live setting parameters Synchro check The Synchro check function measures the difference between the line voltage and bus voltage The function permits the closing of the circuit breaker when certain conditions are simultaneously fulfilled The measured line and bus voltages are higher than the set values of Live bus valueand Live line value ENERG_STATE equals to Both Live The measured bus and li...

Page 1002: ...le U Line Measured line voltage phase angle f Bus Measured bus frequency f line Measured line frequency T CB Total circuit breaker closing delay including the delay of the protection relay output contacts defined with the Closing time of CB setting parameter value The closing angle is the estimated angle difference after the breaker closing delay The Minimum Syn time setting time can be set if req...

Page 1003: ...er have the same frequency and are in phase with a magnitude that makes the concerned busbars or lines such that they can be regarded as live In the command mode operation an external command signal CL_COMMAND besides the normal closing conditions is needed for delivering the closing signal In the command control mode operation the Synchro check function itself closes the breaker via the SYNC_OK o...

Page 1004: ...l command signal is removed too early that is before conditions are fulfilled and the closing pulse is given the alarm timer is reset Maximum Syn time Figure 529 Determination of the checking time for closing The control module receives information about the circuit breaker status and thus is able to adjust the command signal to be delivered to the Synchro check function If the external command si...

Page 1005: ...red only once for each activated external command signal and a new closing command sequence cannot be started until the external command signal is reset and reactivated The SYNC_INPRO output is active when the closing command sequence is in progress and it is reset when the CL_COMMAND input is reset or Maximum Syn time has elapsed Bypass mode SECRSYN can be set to the bypass mode by setting the pa...

Page 1006: ...the phasors is counterclockwise The generic rule is that a low voltage side phasor lags the high voltage side phasor by clock number 30º This is called angle difference adjustment and can be set for SECRSYN with the Phase shift setting 9 3 5 Application The main purpose of the synchrocheck function is to provide control over the closing of the circuit breakers in power networks to prevent the clos...

Page 1007: ...it breaker G SECRSYN DARREC SECRSYN PLC A B U_Bus U_Bus U_Line U_Line Figure 532 Synchrocheck function SECRSYN checking energizing conditions and synchronism Connections A special attention is paid to the connection of the protection relay Furthermore it is checked that the primary side wiring is correct A faulty wiring of the voltage inputs of the protection relay causes a malfunction in the sync...

Page 1008: ...age from the line is measured Figure 533 Connection of voltages for the protection relay and signals used in synchrocheck 9 3 6 Signals Table 994 SECRSYN Input signals Name Type Default Description U_BUS SIGNAL 0 Busbar voltage U_LINE SIGNAL 0 Line voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Blocking signal of the synchro check and voltage check function CL_COMMAND BOOLEAN 0 False External closing request BYPAS...

Page 1009: ...g check mode Difference voltage 0 01 0 50 xUn 0 01 0 05 Maximum voltage difference limit Difference frequen cy 0 001 0 100 xFn 0 001 0 001 Maximum frequen cy difference limit Difference angle 5 90 deg 1 5 Maximum angle dif ference limit Table 997 SECRSYN Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Synchro check mode 1 Off...

Page 1010: ...ynchroniz ing Maximum Syn time 100 6000000 ms 10 2000 Maximum time to accept synchroniz ing Energizing time 100 60000 ms 10 100 Time delay for en ergizing check Closing time of CB 40 250 ms 10 60 Closing time of the breaker Voltage source switch 0 False 1 True 0 False Voltage source switch 9 3 8 Monitored data Table 999 SECRSYN Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description ENERG_STATE Enu...

Page 1011: ...9 Technical data Table 1000 SECRSYN Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured f n 1 Hz Voltage 3 0 of the set value or 0 01 U n Frequency 10 mHz Phase angle 3 Reset time 50 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 9 4 Autoreclosing DARREC 9 4 1 Identification Function desc...

Page 1012: ... programmable autoreclosing shots which can perform one to five successive autoreclosings of desired type and duration for instance one high speed and one delayed autoreclosing When the reclosing is initiated with starting of the protection function the autoreclosing function can execute the final trip of the circuit breaker in a short operate time provided that the fault still persists when the l...

Page 1013: ...ut long trip The UNSUC_RECL output is activated after a pre defined two minutes alarming earth fault 9 4 3 2 Zone coordination Zone coordination is used in the zone sequence between local protection units and downstream devices At the falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line the value of the shot pointer is increased by one unless a shot is in progress or the shot pointer already has the maximum value T...

Page 1014: ...The BLK_THERM signal does not affect the starting of the sequence When the reclose time has elapsed and the BLK_THERM input is active the shot is not ready until the BLK_THERM input deactivates Should the BLK_THERM input remain active longer than the time set by the setting Max Thm block time the AR function goes to lockout If the BLK_THERM input is activated when the auto wait timer is running th...

Page 1015: ...of autoreclosing shots is in most applications executed with the INIT_1 6 inputs The DEL_INIT2 4 inputs are not used In some countries starting the protection stage is also used for the shot initiation This is the only time when the DEL_INIT inputs are used 1MRS757644 H Control functions 620 series Technical Manual 1015 ...

Page 1016: ...t is capable of delaying a start signal has four time delays The time delay is selected based on the shot pointer in the AR function For the first reclose attempt the first time delay is selected for the second attempt the second time delay and so on For the fourth and fifth attempts the time delays are the same Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_2 signal Str 2 delay shot 1 Str 2 delay shot 2 St...

Page 1017: ... signal of a protection stage After a start delay the AR function opens the circuit breaker and an autoreclosing shot is initiated When the shot is initiated with the trip signal of the protection the protection function trips the circuit breaker and simultaneously initiates the autoreclosing shot If the circuit breaker is manually closed against the fault that is if SOTF is used the fourth time d...

Page 1018: ...e elapses Normally all trip and start signals are used to initiate an autoreclosing shot and trip the circuit breaker ACTIVE output indicates reclosing sequence in progress If any of the input signals INIT_X or DEL_INIT_X are used for blocking the corresponding bit in the Tripping line setting must be FALSE This is to ensure that the circuit breaker does not trip from that signal that is the signa...

Page 1019: ...to CBB configuration are First Seventh reclose time Init signals CBB1 CBB7 Blk signals CBB1 CBB7 Shot number CBB1 CBB7 The reclose time defines the open and dead times that is the time between the OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB commands The Init signals CBBx setting defines the initiation signals The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that are related to the CBB rows in the matrix The...

Page 1020: ...ses If the INIT_5 line is active during a sequence start the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to lockout If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer the CBB with the smallest individual number is always selected For example if the INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the second shot that is the shot pointer is 2 CBB2 is started instead of CBB5 Even if the initiatio...

Page 1021: ... during the synchronism check When the circuit breaker does not close the automatic initiation is carried out if the circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the reclose command Both the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the circuit breaker does not close The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated in the auto initiati...

Page 1022: ...ircuit breaker closes normally and the reclaim time starts When the reclaim time has elapsed the sequence is concluded successful 9 4 4 3 Shot pointer controller The execution of a reclose sequence is controlled by a shot pointer It can be adjusted with the SHOT_PTR monitored data The shot pointer starts from an initial value 1 and determines according to the settings whether or not a certain shot...

Page 1023: ...vated CBB defines the reclose time When the reclose time has elapsed the CLOSE_CB output is not activated until the following conditions are fulfilled The SYNC input must be TRUE if the particular CBB requires information about the synchronism All AR initiation inputs that are defined protection lines using the Control line setting are inactive The circuit breaker is open The circuit breaker is re...

Page 1024: ... after elapsed discrimination time new shot begins 9 4 4 5 Sequence controller When the LOCKED output is active the AR function is in lockout This means that new sequences cannot be initialized because AR is insensitive to initiation commands It can be released from the lockout state in the following ways The function is reset through communication with the RecRs parameter The same functionality c...

Page 1025: ...tions involving down stream fuses tripping and initiation of shot 1 should be fast instantaneous or short time delayed The tripping and initiation of shots 2 3 and definite tripping time should be delayed In this example two overcurrent elements PHLPTOC and PHIPTOC are used PHIPTOC is given an instantaneous characteristic and PHLPTOC is given a time delay The PROT_CRD output is activated if the SH...

Page 1026: ... CLOSE_CB output is active for the time set with the Close pulse time setting The CLOSE_CB output is deactivated also when the circuit breaker is detected to be closed that is when the CB_POS input changes from open state to closed state The Wait close time setting defines the time after the CLOSE_CB command activation during which the circuit breaker should be closed If the closing of circuit bre...

Page 1027: ...mit setting defines the number of reclose attempts that are allowed during the time defined with the Frq Op counter time setting If the set value is reached within a pre defined period defined with the Frq Op counter time setting the AR function goes to lockout when a new shot begins provided that the counter is still above the set limit The lockout is released after the recovery time has elapsed ...

Page 1028: ...uptions in the power system service and brings the power back on line quickly and effortlessly The basic idea of the autoreclose function is simple In overhead lines where the possibility of self clearing faults is high the autoreclose function tries to restore the power by reclosing the breaker This is a method to get the power system back into normal operation by removing the transient or semi t...

Page 1029: ... The settings related to CBB configuration are First Seventh reclose time Init signals CBB1 CBB7 Blk signals CBB1 CBB7 Shot number CBB1 CBB7 The reclose time defines the open and dead times that is the time between the OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB commands The Init signals CBBx setting defines the initiation signals The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that are related to the CBB ...

Page 1030: ...sed for blocking purposes If the INIT_5 line is active during a sequence start the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to lockout If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer the CBB with the smallest individual number is always selected For example if the INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the second shot that is the shot pointer is 2 CBB2 is started instead of CBB5...

Page 1031: ... during the synchronism check When the circuit breaker does not close the automatic initiation is carried out if the circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the reclose command Both the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the circuit breaker does not close The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated in the auto initiati...

Page 1032: ...ed flexibility allowing multiple and adaptive sequences Each CBB is identical The Shot number CBB_ setting defines at which point in the auto reclose sequence the CBB should be performed that is whether the particular CBB is going to be the first second third fourth or fifth shot During the initiation of a CBB the conditions of initiation and blocking are checked This is done for all CBBs simultan...

Page 1033: ...SUC_RECL DEL_INIT _4 DEL_INIT _3 DEL_INIT _2 INIT _6 INIT _5 INIT _4 INIT _3 INIT _2 INIT _1 SYNC INC_SHOTP CB_READY CB_POS RECL_ON INHIBIT _RECL BLK _RCLM_T BLK _RECL_T BLK _THERM AR_ON READY Figure 551 Example connection between protection and autoreclosing functions in protection relay configuration It is possible to create several sequences for a configuration Autoreclose sequences for overcur...

Page 1034: ...mes for shot 1 and shot 2 are different but each protection function initiates the same sequence The CBB sequence is described in Table 1003 as follows Shot 1 CBB1 0 3s Shot 2 CBB2 15 0s INIT_1 I INIT_2 I INIT_3 Io Lockout Lockout Lockout Figure 553 Two shots with three initiation lines Table 1003 Settings for configuration example 1 Setting name Setting value Shot number CBB1 1 Init signals CBB1 ...

Page 1035: ...ts The third shot which is the second shot in the autoreclose sequence initiated by I or Io is set as a delayed autoreclosing and executed after an unsuccessful high speed autoreclosing of a corresponding sequence Figure 554 Autoreclosing sequence with two shots with different shot settings according to initiation signal t HSAR Time delay of high speed autoreclosing here First reclose time t DAR T...

Page 1036: ...ignals CBB2 6 lines 2 and 3 2 4 6 Second reclose time 0 2s an example Shot number CBB3 2 Init signals CBB3 6 lines 2 and 3 2 4 6 Third reclose time 10 0s 9 4 6 4 Delayed initiation lines The auto reclose function consists of six individual auto reclose initiation lines INIT_1 INIT 6 and three delayed initiation lines DEL_INIT_2 DEL_INIT_3 DEL_INIT_4 DEL_INIT_2 and INIT_2 are connected together wit...

Page 1037: ... and 5 Optionally can also be used with SOTF 9 4 6 5 Shot initiation from protection start signal In it simplest all auto reclose shots are initiated by protection trips As a result all trip times in the sequence are the same This is why using protection trips may not be the optimal solution Using protection start signals instead of protection trips for initiating shots shortens the trip times Exa...

Page 1038: ...t that after the second shot when the protection starts again Str 2 delay shot 3 elapses before the protection operate time and the final trip follows The total trip time is the protection start delay 0 10 seconds the time it takes to open the circuit breaker 9 4 6 6 Fast trip in Switch on to fault The Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays can also be used to achieve a fast and accelerated trip with...

Page 1039: ... Blocks and resets reclaim time BLK_THERM BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks and holds the reclose shot from the thermal overload CB_POS BOOLEAN 0 False Circuit breaker position input CB_READY BOOLEAN 1 True Circuit breaker status signal INC_SHOTP BOOLEAN 0 False A zone sequence coordination sig nal INHIBIT_RECL BOOLEAN 0 False Interrupts and inhibits reclosing se quence RECL_ON BOOLEAN 0 False Level sensitiv...

Page 1040: ...igh master 1 None Terminal priority Synchronisation set 0 127 1 0 Selection for syn chronizing require ment for reclosing Auto initiation cnd 1 Not allowed 2 When sync fails 3 CB doesn t close 4 Both 2 When sync fails Auto initiation con dition Tripping line 0 63 1 0 Tripping line defines INIT in puts which cause OPEN_CB activa tion Fourth delay in SOTF 0 False 1 True 0 False Sets 4th delay into u...

Page 1041: ... it 0 250 1 0 Frequent operation counter lockout limit Frq Op counter time 1 250 min 1 1 Frequent operation counter time Frq Op recovery time 1 250 min 1 1 Frequent operation counter recovery time Auto init 0 63 1 0 Defines INIT lines that are activated at auto initiation Table 1009 DARREC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Manual close mode 0 False 1 ...

Page 1042: ...ot jump 0 False 1 True 1 True Enable shot jump ing CB closed Pos sta tus 0 False 1 True 0 False Circuit breaker closed position sta tus Blk signals CBB1 0 63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB1 Blk signals CBB2 0 63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB2 Blk signals CBB3 0 63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB3 Blk signals CBB4 0 63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB4 Blk signals CBB5 0 63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB5 Blk signals CB...

Page 1043: ... 0 2147483647 Frequent operation counter FRQ_OPR_AL BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Frequent operation counter alarm STATUS Enum 1 Not defined 1 Ready 2 InProgress 3 Successful 4 WaitingForTrip 5 TripFromProtection 6 FaultDisappeared 7 WaitToComplete 8 CBclosed 9 CycleUnsuccessful 10 Unsuccessful 11 Aborted AR status signal for IEC61850 INPRO_1 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Reclosing shot in pro gress shot 1 INPR...

Page 1044: ...32 0 2147483647 Resetable operation counter all shots SHOT_PTR INT32 1 7 Shot pointer value MAN_CB_CL BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Indicates CB manual closing during reclosing sequence SOTF BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Switch onto fault DARREC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 9 4 10 Technical data Table 1011 DARREC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set ...

Page 1045: ...rol with voltage regulator OLATCC COLTC 90V 9 5 2 Function block Figure 557 Function block 9 5 3 Functionality The tap changer control with voltage regulator function OLATCC on load tap changer controller is designed for regulating the voltage of power transformers with on load tap changers in distribution substations OLATCC provides a manual or automatic voltage control of the power transformer b...

Page 1046: ...aracteristic IDMT is selectable for delays between the raising and lowering operations The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the voltage control operations with an external signal or with the supervision functionality of the function 9 5 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are ...

Page 1047: ...transformer If the phase voltages are measured the voltage U_AB is calculated internally in the IED Currents from the secondary side of the power transformer I_A I_C have several uses The highest phase current value is used for overcurrent blocking The currents from the secondary side of the power transformer are used for line drop compensation average of the connected inputs 1MRS757644 H Control ...

Page 1048: ...st exceed two percent of I n 9 5 4 2 Tap changer position inputs The position value of the tap changer can be brought to OLATCC as a resistance value a mA signal or as a binary coded signal More information on how the resistance value the mA signal or a binary coded interface are implemented can be found in TPOSYLTC in the technical manual of the IED The indicated tap changer position of the own t...

Page 1049: ...us information from the circuit breakers The common Local Remote L R exclusion concerns the manual raising and lowering commands of OLATCC that is it internally proves the exclusion mechanism to prevent the remote commands from SCADA when the IED is in local mode 9 5 4 4 Manual voltage regulation The manual raising and lowering commands can be given either via the configuration inputs LOWER_LOCAL ...

Page 1050: ...ed if the tap changer does not move downwards in Cmd error delay time after the pulse activation resulting that ALARM_REAS in the monitored data contains a command error value 9 5 4 5 Automatic voltage regulation of single transformer OLATCC is intended to control the power transformers with a motor driven on load tap changer The function is designed to regulate the voltage at the secondary side o...

Page 1051: ...as the typical tap changer operating time is active before the start of the next operating timer is possible For OLATCC the delay is set to 6 seconds If one tap changer operation is not enough to regulate the transformer voltage within the hysteresis limits a second adjustable delay T2 Control delay time 2 usually with a shorter time setting than T1 starts This delay is used for the control comman...

Page 1052: ...cally if the resistance and reactance of the line are known or measured practically from the line drop IL XL RL UB UL Load Figure 560 Equivalent electrical circuit for calculating the LDC term The compensation parameters Line drop V Ris U r and Line drop V React U x are percentage values of U n according to the equations Line dropV Ris U I R U Line dro r CT n VT n _ _ 3 100 1 1 Un p pV React U I X...

Page 1053: ...oper voltage levels This can cause a conflict if the transformer tries to reduce the voltage at the substation Additionally it is difficult to predict the actual voltage levels in the feeder lines in such a case and lowering the voltage at the substation can have harmful effects in the far end of the network However the Rv Pwr flow allowed setting allows also negative LDC terms to be taken into eq...

Page 1054: ... rises as a result to the RAISE_OWN output signal activation if the circulating current level is sufficient Equation 187 and Equation 189 and the other parameters remain the same As a result the voltage rise should diminish the circulating current LDC equation and parallel connection The additional challenge in the parallel connection regarding the line drop compensation is to know the total curre...

Page 1055: ...the parallel transformers the M F principle can still be used to regulate two or an unlimited number of transformers in parallel Since the master cannot detect the tap positions of parallel transformers it just activates the lowering and raising outputs for all the followers when it controls its own tap changer This is called blind control In this case a number of parallel transformers are regulat...

Page 1056: ... followers with a parallel failure can be read from the monitored data FAIL_FLLW For example if only follower 3 is in the parallel failure state FAIL_FLLW has the value Follower 3 If both followers 1 and 2 are in the parallel failure state FAIL_FLLW has the value Followers 1 2 By default when no failed followers exist the value is No failed followers Negative Reactance Principle NRP This parallel ...

Page 1057: ...ability U ci ci n n 100 Equation 188 I ci Circulating current Stability Stability setting the recommended value depends on the loop impedance If the transformers operating in parallel have different rated currents the value of the Stability factor setting of the regulator should be proportional to the rated currents that is the higher the rated current the higher the Stability factor setting value...

Page 1058: ...llel To start the parallel operation the acting operation mode parameter has to be set to MCC for all the regulators of the connection Furthermore the signal CON_STATUS must indicate that the transformers are connected to the network A unit that is minimizing the circulating current must have the acting operation mode set to MCC However units that have the acting operation mode set to Manual do no...

Page 1059: ...eration modes In these modes if CON_STATUS is TRUE the information transmission is started The circulating current information receiving is allowed only in the MCC acting operation mode when CON_STATUS is TRUE PAR_UNIT_MCC can be seen in the monitored data view Communication and the MCC mode The phasor information from the other parallel IEDs is needed for the circular current calculation Therefor...

Page 1060: ...econds The delay is assumed to be the tap changer operating delay The timer status can also be read from the monitoring data TIMER_STS where T1 active gives a value Lower timer1 on or Raise timer1 on while T2 active gives a value Lower timer2 on or Raise timer2 on Furthermore the Fast lower T on value indicates that the fast lowering control functionality is active Chapter 9 5 4 9 Blocking scheme ...

Page 1061: ... after the control pulse has been deactivated an alarm is generated Chapter 9 5 4 10 Alarm indication If the TCO input is not connected no alarm is generated The control operation is disabled when the TCO input signal is active unless no tap changer stuck is detected Chapter 9 5 4 10 Alarm indication Thus the controller cannot send new pulses to the tap changer when this is already operating becau...

Page 1062: ...ot indicate the actual blocking but indicates if the coming command is successful The actual blocking is indicated by studying the corresponding monitored data BLK_I_LOD BLK_U_UN RNBK_U_OV BLK_LTCBLOCK BLK_I_CIR BLK_RAISE and BLK_LOWER values Table 1015 illustrates the meaning of different monitored data values For example the block status value 9 indicates that there are conditional circulating c...

Page 1063: ...ock lowering under voltage blocking has an effect in the manual operation mode 4 OC UV Conditions 2 and 3 together Load current and block low ering under voltage blocking have effect in the manual operation mode 5 EXT External blocking has an effect in the manual operation mode 6 OC EXT Conditions 2 and 5 together Load current and external blocking have effect in the manual operation mode 7 UV EXT...

Page 1064: ...sted with the setting parameter Load current limit The maximum of measurements from the secondary side current phases is used for blocking By default both the automatic operation and the manual operation are blocked Table 1016 when the set limit is exceeded The blocking status can be read from the monitored data BLKD_I_LOD Block lowering voltage The block lowering voltage feature blocks both raisi...

Page 1065: ...s of the tap changer These extreme positions can be adjusted with the setting parameters Raise block tap and Lower block tap When the tap changer reaches one of these two positions the commands in the corresponding direction are blocked Table 1016 It depends on the comparison between the Raise block tap and Lower block tap settings which direction is blocked Chapter 9 5 4 4 Manual voltage regulati...

Page 1066: ...tion is detected An alarm activation means that the ALARM output is activated and the alarm reason can be read from the monitored data ALARM_REAS Alarms are in use by default but they can be set not to be in use by setting Alarms enabled to False Three different alarm conditions and their combinations can be detected by OLATCC Command error OLATCC supervises the tap changer position information of...

Page 1067: ...nds given in the manual and automatic modes All commands even those that are omitted by the tap changer due to its operation sequence are calculated in a cumulative counter This data parameter can be reset via the clear menu parameter OLATCC counter 9 5 5 Application OLATCC is used to control the voltage on the load side of the power transformer Based on the measured voltage and current the functi...

Page 1068: ...e configuration example uses an mA signal to indicate the current tap position of the local transformer To take that position information to OLATCC the measured mA signal is first scaled with the X130 RTD function The scaled value is then converted to integer value with T_F32_INT8 function That integer value is connected to the TAP_POS input of the TPOSYLTC function The tap position value is autom...

Page 1069: ...be used to change the operation mode via inputs of the master and the follower Operation mode Input control M U12b IL1b IL2b IL3b TCO Tap position ind Raise Lower M U12b IL1b IL2b IL3b TCO Tap position ind Raise Lower Regulator 1 signals Regulator 2 signals CB1 CB3 CB2 CB2 Lower follower Raise follower Figure 566 An example of the configuration for the Auto parallel Master Follower mode the positi...

Page 1070: ...pen Open Auto single Manual Closed Open Closed Auto single Auto single Closed Closed Open Auto single Manual Closed Closed Closed Auto parallel Master Auto parallel mode Auto master Auto parallel Follower Auto parallel mode Auto follower Configuration example for the Auto parallel MCC mode The purpose of the Auto parallel MCC mode is to minimize the circulating current between the parallel transfo...

Page 1071: ...at no wiring or communication is needed between the IEDs The voltage regulators operate independently However for the cases where there is an occasional stepwise change in the phase angle of the load the regulating error can be suppressed by an automatic setting group change or by changing the operation mode with the logic Figure 569 Changing the operation mode of OLATCC automatically when the cap...

Page 1072: ...ower positions not known by master Requires power transformers with identical ratings and step voltages Extra wiring work raising lowering com mands input TAPCHG_FLLW connected from output FLLWx_CTL from the master to the follower Manual control needed in the beginning of operation Blind control follower positions after con trol cannot be supervised It must be relied on that the followers are foll...

Page 1073: ...efforts since this principle utilizes a horizontal communi cation between the regulators the inputs TRx_I connected from parallel transformer controller s outputs TR0_I The step voltages and short circuit impe dances of the transformers do not need to be identical The phase angle of the load current may vary without any impact on the regulation accuracy Automatic adjustment for the number of trans...

Page 1074: ...her PARALLEL BOOLEAN 0 False Parallel or single op eration AUTO BOOLEAN 0 False Auto Manual indica tion CON_STATUS BOOLEAN 0 False Network connection status of the own transformer LTC_BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False External signal for blocking TCO BOOLEAN 0 False Tap changer operat ing input RSV BOOLEAN 0 False Reduce set voltage active TR1_I_AMPL FLOAT32 0 00 Received current magnitude from transformer 1 ...

Page 1075: ...wer transformer 2 in the Master Follower opera tion mode FLLW3_CTL INT32 Lower Raise command for follower transformer 3 in the Master Follower opera tion mode ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm status PAR_FAIL BOOLEAN Parallel failure detected PARALLEL BOOLEAN Parallel or single operation AUTO BOOLEAN Auto Manual indication BLKD_I_LOD BOOLEAN Indication of over current blocking BLKD_U_UN BOOLEAN Indication of un...

Page 1076: ...ple Control delay time 1 1000 300000 ms 100 60000 Control delay time for the first control pulse Control delay time 2 1000 300000 ms 100 30000 Control delay time for the following control pulses Table 1026 OLATCC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Operation mode 1 Manual 2 Auto single 3 Auto parallel 4 Input cont...

Page 1077: ...olt age on the regula ted side Raise block tap 36 36 1 17 Tap changer lim it position which gives highest volt age on the regula ted side LTC pulse time 500 10000 ms 100 1500 Output pulse dura tion common for raise and lower pul ses LDC enable 0 False 1 True 1 True Selection for line drop compensation Table 1027 OLATCC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Descriptio...

Page 1078: ...current TIMER_STS Enum 0 Timer off 1 Lower timer1 on 2 Raise timer1 on 3 Lower timer2 on 4 Raise timer2 on 5 Fast lower T on Timer T1 T2 or fast lower timer active OPR_MODE_STS Enum 0 Not in use 1 Manual 2 Auto single 3 Auto master 4 Auto follower 5 MCC 6 NRP The acting op eration mode of the function block U_CTL FLOAT32 0 000 3 000 xUn Control voltage Up target volt age level UD_CTL FLOAT32 2 000...

Page 1079: ...ALARM_REAS Enum 0 No alarm 1 Cmd error 2 TCO error 3 Cmd TCO err 4 Pump error 5 Pump cmd err 6 Pump TCO err 7 Pmp TCO cm d err Status and rea son for alarm OP_TM_NUM_H INT32 0 2147483647 Number of con trols for own tap changer during last hour FAIL_FLLW Enum 0 No failed fol lowers 1 Follower 1 2 Follower 2 3 Followers 1 2 4 Follower 3 5 Followers 1 3 6 Followers 2 3 7 Followers 1 2 3 Failed follow...

Page 1080: ...ata Characteristic Value Operation accuracy 1 Depending on the frequency of the measured current fn 2 Hz Differential voltage Ud 0 5 of the meas ured value or 0 005 Un in measured vol tages 2 0 Un Operation value 1 5 of the Ud for Us 1 0 Un Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 2 4 0 0 of the set value Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode 2 8 5 0 of the set value at theoretical B in ra...

Page 1081: ...l revision history Technical revision Change B Added new output TIMER_ON new 61850 data for that ACT interface changes by interchanging already existing data between monitored data and output interface Operation mode default to be changed to 4 Input control previously it was Manual C Internal improvement D Added input TAP_POS Added command mode for Operation mode setting 1MRS757644 H Control funct...

Page 1082: ...d distortion function CMHAI is used for monitoring the current total demand distortion TDD 10 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of CMHAI can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections BLOCK ALARM Distortion measure ment ...

Page 1083: ...s are the key characteristics describing power quality Power quality is however a customer driven issue It could be said that any power problem concerning voltage or current that results in a failure or misoperation of customer equipment is a power quality problem Harmonic distortion in a power system is caused by nonlinear devices Electronic power converter loads constitute the most important cla...

Page 1084: ...Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for TDD 10 1 7 Settings Table 1033 CMHAI Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Demand interval 0 1 minute 1 5 minutes 2 10 minutes 3 15 minutes 4 30 minutes 5 60 minutes 6 180 minutes 2 10 minutes Time interval for demand calculation Demand window 1 Sli...

Page 1085: ...axi mum demand TDD phase B Time max dmd TDD IL3 Timestamp Time of maxi mum demand TDD phase C 3SMHTDD_A FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 3 second mean value of TDD for phase A DMD_TDD_A FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Demand value for TDD for phase A 3SMHTDD_B FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 3 second mean value of TDD for phase B DMD_TDD_B FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Demand value for TDD for phase B 3SMHTDD_C FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 3 second mea...

Page 1086: ... Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of VMHAI can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Distortion measure ment Demand calculation BLOCK ALARM U_A_AB U_B_BC U_C_CA Figure 573 Functional module diagram Distortion measurement The distortion measurement module measures harmonics up to the 11th...

Page 1087: ...ks the ALARM output 10 2 5 Application VMHAI provides a method for monitoring the power quality by means of the voltage waveform distortion VMHAI provides a short term three second average and long term demand for THD 10 2 6 Signals Table 1036 VMHAI Input signals Name Type Default Description U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age A or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt...

Page 1088: ...alues Range Unit Description Max demand THD UL1 FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Maximum de mand THD for phase A Max demand THD UL2 FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Maximum de mand THD for phase B Max demand THD UL3 FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Maximum de mand THD for phase C Time max dmd THD UL1 Timestamp Time of maxi mum demand THD phase A Time max dmd THD UL2 Timestamp Time of maxi mum demand THD phase B Time max dmd THD UL3 Tim...

Page 1089: ...or THD for phase C 10 2 9 Technical revision history Table 1040 VMHAI Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement 10 3 Voltage variation PHQVVR 10 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Voltage variation PHQVVR PQMU PQMV 10 3 2 Function block Figure 574 Function b...

Page 1090: ...ue of the voltage for each phase International standard 61000 4 30 defines the voltage variation to be implemented using the RMS value of the voltage IEEE standard 1159 1995 provides recommendations for monitoring the electric power quality of the single phase and polyphase ac power systems PHQVVR contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block a set of function outputs or the function i...

Page 1091: ... can be set to this voltage level to avoid the undesired voltage dip or swell indications This is accomplished by converting the variation limits with the Reference voltage setting in the variation detection module that is when there is a voltage different from the nominal voltage the Reference voltage setting is set to this voltage The Variation enable setting is used for enabling or disabling th...

Page 1092: ...th are defined as percentage values calculated from the difference between the reference and the measured voltage For example a dip to 70 percent means that the minimum voltage dip magnitude variation is 70 percent of the reference voltage amplitude The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function and outputs 10 3 4 3 Variation validation The validation criterion for voltage variation is that...

Page 1093: ...he activation of the OPERATE output and recording data update takes place These counters are available through the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications There are no phase segregated counters but all the variation detections are registered to a common time magnitude classified counter type Consequently a simultaneous multiphase event that is the variation type event d...

Page 1094: ...ore rising back above Voltage dip set 3 The event indication ends and possible detection is done when the TRMS voltage returns above for dip and interruption or below for swell the activation starting limit For example after an instantaneous dip the event indication when the voltage magnitude exceeds Voltage dip set 1 is not detected and recorded immediately but only if no longer dip indication fo...

Page 1095: ...ty built in function that checks the relationship adherence so that if VVa x time 1 is set higher than VVa x time 2 or VVa x time 3 VVa x time 2 and VVa x time 3 are set equal to the new VVa x time 1 If VVa x time 2 is set higher than VVa x time 3 VVa x time 3 is set to the new VVa x time 2 If VVa x time 2 is set lower than VVa x time 1 the entered VVa x time 2 is rejected If VVa x time 3 is set l...

Page 1096: ...is no longer fulfilled variation is indicated as a dip as long as all phases are active In case of a single phase interruption of Figure 580 when there is a dip indicated in another phase but the third phase is not active there is no variation indication start when Phase Mode is Three Phase In this case only the Phase Mode value Single Phase results in the ST_B interruption and the ST_A dip It is ...

Page 1097: ...l the phases are active Furthermore both swell and dip variation event detections take place simultaneously In case of a concurrent voltage dip and voltage swell both SWELLCNT and DIPCNT are incremented by one Also Figure 582 shows that for the Phase Mode value Three Phase two different time moment variation event swell detections take place and consequently DIPCNT is incremented by one but SWELLC...

Page 1098: ...e swell 10 3 5 Recorded data Besides counter increments the information required for a later fault analysis is stored after a valid voltage variation is detected Recorded data information When voltage variation starts the phase current magnitudes preceding the activation moment are stored Also the initial voltage magnitudes are temporarily stored at the variation starting moment If the variation i...

Page 1099: ...the older data sets are moved to the next banks 1 2 and 2 3 when a valid voltage variation is detected When all three banks have data and a new variation is detected the newest data are placed into bank 1 and the data in bank 3 are overwritten by the data from bank 2 Figure 583 shows a valid recorded voltage interruption and two dips for the Phase mode value Single Phase The first dip event durati...

Page 1100: ...iation duration Ph B Variation Dur Ph B Variation Ph B start time stamp phase B var iation start time moment Var Dur Ph B time Variation duration Ph C Variation Dur Ph C Variation Ph C start time stamp phase C var iation start time moment Var Dur Ph C time Current magnitude Ph A preceding variation Var current Ph A Current magnitude Ph B preceding variation Var current Ph B Current magnitude Ph C ...

Page 1101: ...quipment Voltage dips are typically caused by faults occurring in the power distribution system Typical reasons for the faults are lightning strikes and tree contacts In addition to fault situations the switching of heavy loads and starting of large motors also cause dips Voltage swells cause extra stress for the network components and the devices connected to the power system Voltage swells are t...

Page 1102: ...ges for measurement The measurement mode is always TRMS 10 3 7 Signals Table 1043 PHQVVR Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current mag nitude I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current mag nitude I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current mag nitude U_A SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age A U_B SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age B U_C SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age C BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block si...

Page 1103: ...eference voltage VVa swell time 1 0 5 54 0 cycles 0 1 0 5 Voltage variation swell duration 1 Voltage swell set 2 100 0 140 0 0 1 120 0 Swell limit 2 in of reference voltage VVa swell time 2 10 0 80 0 cycles 0 1 10 0 Voltage variation swell duration 2 Voltage swell set 3 100 0 140 0 0 1 120 0 Swell limit 3 in of reference voltage VVa swell time 3 2000 60000 ms 10 2000 Voltage variation swell durati...

Page 1104: ...Swell dip Int 7 Swell dip Int Enable variation type Table 1047 PHQVVR Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Phase supervision 1 Ph A 2 Ph B 3 Ph A B 4 Ph C 5 Ph A C 6 Ph B C 7 Ph A B C 7 Ph A B C Monitored voltage phase Phase mode 1 Three Phase 2 Single Phase 2 Single Phase Three Single phase mode Power quality measurement functions 1MRS757644 H 1104 620 ...

Page 1105: ...tary dip opera tion counter TEMPDIPCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Temporary dip opera tion counter MAXDURDIPCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Maximum duration dip operation counter MOMINTCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Momentary interrup tion operation counter TEMPINTCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Temporary interruption operation counter SUSTINTCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Sustained interruption operation counter MAXDURINTCNT INT32 0 2147...

Page 1106: ... current Ph C FLOAT32 0 00 60 00 xIn Current magnitude Phase C preceding var iation Time Timestamp Time Variation type Enum 0 No variation 1 Swell 2 Dip 3 Swell dip 4 Interruption 5 Swell Int 6 Dip Int 7 Swell dip Int Variation type Variation Ph A FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn Variation magnitude Phase A Var Ph A rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude Phase A time stamp Variation Ph B FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xU...

Page 1107: ...amp Variation magnitude Phase B time stamp Variation Ph C FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn Variation magnitude Phase C Var Ph C rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude Phase C time stamp Variation Dur Ph A FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Variation duration Phase A Var Dur Ph A time Timestamp Variation Ph A start time stamp Variation Dur Ph B FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Variation duration Phase B Var Dur Ph B time Times...

Page 1108: ...igh quality that is a balanced voltage supply on a continuous basis VSQVUB uses five different methods for calculating voltage unbalance The methods are the negative sequence voltage magnitude zero sequence voltage magnitude ratio of the negative sequence voltage magnitude to the positive sequence voltage magnitude ratio of the zero sequence voltage magnitude to the positive sequence voltage magni...

Page 1109: ...eriod The Average calculation module uses five different methods for the average calculation The required method can be selected with the Unb detection method parameter When the Neg Seq mode is selected with Unb detection method the voltage unbalance is calculated based on the negative sequence voltage magnitude Similarly when the Zero Seq mode is selected the voltage unbalance is calculated based...

Page 1110: ...ulator PCT_UNB_AL OBS_PR_ACT BLOCK 10MIN_MN_UNB from Average calculator 3s_MN_UNB from Average calculator Figure 587 Percentile calculation Observation period The Observation period module calculates the length of the observation time for the Statistics recorder sub module as well as determines the possible start of a new one A new period can be started by timed activation using calendar time sett...

Page 1111: ...The length of the period is determined by the settings Obs period selection and User Def Obs period The OBS_PR_ACT output is an indication signal which exhibits rising edge TRUE when the observation period starts and falling edge FALSE when the observation period ends If the Percentile unbalance Trigger mode or Obs period duration settings change when OBS_PR_ACT is active OBS_PR_ACT deactivates im...

Page 1112: ...module If the trigger mode is selected Periodic or Continuous and the blocking is deactivated before the next observation period is due to start the scheduled period starts normally Statistics recorder The Statistics recorder module provides readily calculated three second or ten minute values of the selected phase to the percentile calculator module based on the length of the active observation p...

Page 1113: ...the output PCT_UNB_VAL Recorded data The information required for a later fault analysis is stored when the Recorded data module is triggered This happens when a voltage unbalance is detected by the Voltage unbalance detector module Three sets of recorded data are available in total The sets are saved in data banks 1 3 The data bank 1 holds the most recent recorded data Older data are moved to the...

Page 1114: ...dentify the network and load unbalance that may cause sustained voltage unbalance A single phase or phase to phase fault in the network or load side can create voltage unbalance but as faults are usually isolated in a short period of time the voltage unbalance is not a sustained one Therefore the voltage unbalance may not be covered by VSQVUB Another major application is the long term power qualit...

Page 1115: ...larm active when percentile unbalance exceeds the limit OBS_PR_ACT BOOLEAN Observation period is active 10 4 7 Settings Table 1054 VSQVUB Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation On Off Unb detection method 1 Neg Seq 2 Zero Seq 3 Neg to Pos Seq 4 Zero to Pos Seq 5 Ph vectors Comp 3 Neg to Pos Seq Set the operation mode for vo...

Page 1116: ...bservation period start month Obs period Str day 1 31 1 Calendar time for observation period start day Obs period Str hour 0 23 h 0 Calendar time for observation period start hour 10 4 8 Monitored data Table 1055 VSQVUB Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description 3S_MN_UNB FLOAT32 0 00 150 00 Non sliding 3 second mean value of voltage unbalance 10MIN_MN_UNB FLOAT32 0 00 150 00 Sliding 1...

Page 1117: ...high mean unbalance Max unbalance Volt FLOAT32 0 00 150 00 Maximum 3 seconds unbalance voltage Time Max Unb Volt Timestamp Time stamp of maxi mum voltage unbalance Alarm high mean Dur FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Time duration for alarm high mean unbalance Max unbalance Volt FLOAT32 0 00 150 00 Maximum 3 seconds unbalance voltage Time Max Unb Volt Timestamp Time stamp of maxi mum voltage unbalance VSQ...

Page 1118: ...etermined solely with the Reset delay time setting The purpose of the delayed reset is to enable fast clearance of intermittent faults for example self sealing insulation faults and severe faults which may produce high asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers It is typical for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop off periods durin...

Page 1119: ...off In case 1 the reset is delayed with the Reset delay time setting and in case 2 the counter is reset immediately because the Reset delay time setting is set to zero 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1119 ...

Page 1120: ... current is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region The timer input rises when a fault current is detected The definite timer activates the START output and the operate timer starts elapsing The reset drop off timer starts when the timer input falls that is the fault disappears When the reset drop off timer elapses the operate timer is reset Since this happens before another start ...

Page 1121: ...is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region The timer input rises when a fault current is detected The definite timer activates the START output and the operate timer starts elapsing The Reset drop off timer starts when the timer input falls that is the fault disappears Another fault situation occurs before the reset drop off timer has elapsed This causes the activation of the OPERA...

Page 1122: ...during the time BLOCK remains active If the timer input is not active longer than specified by the Reset delay time setting the operate timer is reset in the same way as described in Figure 590 regardless of the BLOCK input The selected blocking mode is Freeze timer 11 2 Current based inverse definite minimum time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1122 620 series Technic...

Page 1123: ...urve type and the setting values used The curve scaling is determined with the Time multiplier setting There are two methods to level out the inverse time characteristic The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operating time for the IDMT curve that is the operation time is always at least the Minimum operate time setting Alternatively the IDMT Sat point is used for giving the leveling...

Page 1124: ...based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with the Minimum operate time setting is set to 1000 milliseconds the IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1124 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1125: ... time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with IDMT Sat point setting value 11 the Minimum operate time setting is set to minimum 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1125 ...

Page 1126: ...t is outside the guaranteed measuring range Also the maximum measured current of 50 x In gives the leveling out point 50 2 5 20 x I I 11 2 1 1 Standard inverse time characteristics For inverse time operation both IEC and ANSI IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported The operate times for the ANSI and IEC IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients A B and C The values of the ...

Page 1127: ...verse 0 0086 0 0185 0 02 4 ANSI Moderately Inverse 0 0515 0 1140 0 02 6 Long Time Ex tremely Inverse 64 07 0 250 2 0 7 Long Time Very In verse 28 55 0 712 2 0 8 Long Time Inverse 0 086 0 185 0 02 9 IEC Normal In verse 0 14 0 0 0 02 10 IEC Very Inverse 13 5 0 0 1 0 11 IEC Inverse 0 14 0 0 0 02 12 IEC Extremely In verse 80 0 0 0 2 0 13 IEC Short Time Inverse 0 05 0 0 0 04 14 IEC Long Time In verse 1...

Page 1128: ...Figure 596 ANSI extremely inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1128 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1129: ...Figure 597 ANSI very inverse time characteristics 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1129 ...

Page 1130: ...Figure 598 ANSI normal inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1130 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1131: ...Figure 599 ANSI moderately inverse time characteristics 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1131 ...

Page 1132: ...Figure 600 ANSI long time extremely inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1132 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1133: ...Figure 601 ANSI long time very inverse time characteristics 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1133 ...

Page 1134: ...Figure 602 ANSI long time inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1134 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1135: ...Figure 603 IEC normal inverse time characteristics 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1135 ...

Page 1136: ...Figure 604 IEC very inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1136 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1137: ...Figure 605 IEC inverse time characteristics 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1137 ...

Page 1138: ...Figure 606 IEC extremely inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1138 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1139: ...Figure 607 IEC short time inverse time characteristics 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1139 ...

Page 1140: ...e characteristics 11 2 1 2 User programmable inverse time characteristics The user can define curves by entering parameters into the following standard formula General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1140 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1141: ...haracteristics The RI type simulates the behavior of electromechanical relays The RD type is an earth fault specific characteristic The RI type is calculated using the formula t s k I I 0 339 0 236 Equation 197 The RD type is calculated using the formula t s I k I 5 8 1 35 In Equation 198 t s Operate time in seconds k set Time multiplier I Measured current I set Start value 1MRS757644 H General fu...

Page 1142: ...Figure 609 RI type inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1142 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1143: ...rse time characteristics 11 2 2 Reset in inverse time modes The user can select the reset characteristics by using the Type of reset curve setting 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1143 ...

Page 1144: ... reset if another start does not occur during the reset delay If the Type of reset curve setting is selected as Def time reset the current level has no influence on the reset characteristic Inverse reset Inverse reset curves are available only for ANSI and user programmable curves If you use other curve types immediate reset occurs Standard delayed inverse reset The reset characteristic required i...

Page 1145: ... ANSI Extremely Inverse 29 1 2 ANSI Very Inverse 21 6 3 ANSI Normal Inverse 0 46 4 ANSI Moderately Inverse 4 85 6 Long Time Extremely Inverse 30 7 Long Time Very Inverse 13 46 8 Long Time Inverse 4 6 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1145 ...

Page 1146: ...Figure 611 ANSI extremely inverse reset time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1146 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1147: ...Figure 612 ANSI very inverse reset time characteristics 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1147 ...

Page 1148: ...Figure 613 ANSI normal inverse reset time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1148 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1149: ...Figure 614 ANSI moderately inverse reset time characteristics 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1149 ...

Page 1150: ...Figure 615 ANSI long time extremely inverse reset time characteristics General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1150 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1151: ...Figure 616 ANSI long time very inverse reset time characteristics 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1151 ...

Page 1152: ...is not available for IEC type inverse time curves User programmable delayed inverse reset The user can define the delayed inverse reset time characteristics with the following formula using the set Curve parameter D General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1152 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1153: ...re applied The selected blocking mode is Freeze timer The activation of the BLOCK input also lengthens the minimum delay value of the timer Activating the BLOCK input alone does not affect the operation of the START output It still becomes active when the current exceeds the set Start value and inactive when the current falls below the set Start value and the set Reset delay time has expired 11 3 ...

Page 1154: ...lues used The user determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier setting The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time for the IDMT mode that is it is possible to limit the IDMT based operate time for not becoming too short For example Figure 618 Operate time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum operate time set to 0 5 second General function block features 1...

Page 1155: ... time characteristics for overvoltage protection The operate times for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients A B C D and E The inverse operate time can be calculated with the formula t s k A B U U U C D E Equation 201 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1155 ...

Page 1156: ... of Time multiplier Table 1060 Curve coefficients for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves Curve name A B C D E 17 Inverse Curve A 1 1 0 0 1 18 Inverse Curve B 480 32 0 5 0 035 2 19 Inverse Curve C 480 32 0 5 0 035 3 General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1156 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1157: ...Figure 620 Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1157 ...

Page 1158: ...Figure 621 Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1158 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1159: ... protection 11 3 1 2 User programmable inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection The user can define the curves by entering the parameters using the standard formula 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1159 ...

Page 1160: ...so set for it The Curve Sat Relative setting for curves A B and C is 2 0 percent However it should be noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve characteristics concerning the discontinuities in the curve when the programmable curve equation is used Thus the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another degree of freedom to move the inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it effective...

Page 1161: ...curves are defined with the coefficients A B C D and E The inverse operate time can be calculated with the formula t s k A B U U U C D E Equation 203 t s operate time in seconds U measured voltage U the set value of the Start value setting k the set value of the Time multiplier setting Table 1061 Curve coefficients for standard undervoltage IDMT curves Curve name A B C D E 21 Inverse Curve A 1 1 0...

Page 1162: ...Figure 623 Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1162 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1163: ...ltage protection 11 3 2 2 User programmable inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection The user can define curves by entering parameters into the standard formula 1MRS757644 H General function block features 620 series Technical Manual 1163 ...

Page 1164: ...elative setting for curves A B and C is 2 0 percent However it should be noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve characteristics concerning also discontinuities in the curve when the programmable curve equation is used Thus the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another degree of freedom to move the inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it effectively sets the maximum operate ...

Page 1165: ...ch is a numerically calculated fundamental component of the signal Peak to peak Peak to peak with peak backup Consequently the measurement mode can be selected according to the application In extreme cases for example with high overcurrent or harmonic content the measurement modes function in a slightly different way The operation accuracy is defined with the frequency range of f fn 0 95 1 05 In p...

Page 1166: ...nti aliasing filter of the protection relay inputs Consequently this mode is usually used in conjunction with high and instantaneous stages where the suppression of harmonics is not so important In addition the peak to peak mode allows considerable CT saturation without impairing the performance of the operation Peak to peak with peak backup The peak to peak with peak backup measurement principle ...

Page 1167: ...a U a U A B C 1 2 3 Equation 212 U U a U a U A B C 2 2 3 Equation 213 When VT connection is selected as Delta the positive and negative phase sequence voltage components are calculated from the phase to phase voltages according to the equations U U a U AB BC 1 2 3 Equation 214 U U a U AB BC 2 3 Equation 215 The phase to earth voltages are calculated from the phase to phase voltages when VT connect...

Page 1168: ... phase to phase voltages are calculated from the phase to earth voltages when VT connection is selected as Wye according to the equations U U U AB A B Equation 219 U U U BC B C Equation 220 U U U CA C A Equation 221 General function block features 1MRS757644 H 1168 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1169: ...d accuracy limit primary current to the rated primary current For example a protective current transformer of type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10 For protective current transformers the accuracy class is designed by the highest permissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current prescribed for the accuracy class concerned followed by ...

Page 1170: ...ring input of the protection relay is not exceeded This is always fulfilled when I1n Ikmax 100 Ikmax is the highest fault current The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of the protection relay For that reason in practice even a few times smaller nominal primary current can be used than given by the formula Recommended start current settings If Ikmin is the lo...

Page 1171: ... be further prolonged Therefore the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula Fa 20 Current start value I1n The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the protection relay 12 1 1 3 Example for non directional overcurrent protection The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder The protection is implemented as three stage definite time non dir...

Page 1172: ...ple is 3 500 A 5 83 I2n I2n is the 1 2 multiple with nominal primary current of the CT For the CT characteristics point of view the criteria given by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the protection relay setting is considerably below the Fa In this application the CT rated burden could have been selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons Requirements for m...

Page 1173: ...sical connections 13 1 Module slot numbering 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 626 Module slot numbering 1 X000 2 X100 3 X105 4 X110 5 X115 6 X120 7 X130 1MRS757644 H IED physical connections 620 series Technical Manual 1173 ...

Page 1174: ...ed in the product specific application manuals 13 4 Communication connections The front communication connection is an RJ 45 type connector used mainly for configuration and setting Galvanic RJ 45 Ethernet connection Optical LC Ethernet connection ST type glass fiber serial connection EIA 485 serial connection EIA 232 serial connection Never touch the end face of an optical fiber connector IED phy...

Page 1175: ...imode LC type connection depending on the product variant and the selected communication interface option A shielded twisted pair cable CAT 5e is used with the RJ 45 connector and an optical multi mode cable 2 km with the LC type connector In addition communication modules with multiple Ethernet connectors enable the forwarding of Ethernet traffic These variants include an internal Ethernet switch...

Page 1176: ...re the protection relay is used is 32 and the maximum length of the bus is 1200 meters 13 4 5 Optical ST serial rear connection Serial communication can be used optionally through an optical connection either in loop or star topology The connection idle state is light on or light off Using ST loop mode requires an ST serial converter that supports detecting and removing of duplicate request after ...

Page 1177: ...er optic ST IEC 60870 5 103 Supported 13 4 7 Rear communication modules COM0001 RJ 45 COM0002 LC COM0003 RS 485 IRIG B COM0005 RJ 45 ARC COM0006 LC ARC COM0007 RS 485 IRIG B ARC Figure 628 Communication module options 1MRS757644 H IED physical connections 620 series Technical Manual 1177 ...

Page 1178: ... B ARC COM0023 RJ 45 RS 232 485 RS 485 ST IRIG B Figure 629 Communication module options COM0031 3xRJ 45 COM0032 2xLC RJ 45 ST ARC COM0033 3xRJ 45 ST ARC COM0034 LC 2xRJ 45 ST ARC COM0037 2xLC RJ 45 Figure 630 Communication module options IED physical connections 1MRS757644 H 1178 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1179: ...5 1 COM0006 1 COM0007 1 COM0011 1 1 COM0012 1 1 COM0013 1 1 COM0014 1 1 COM0023 1 1 1 1 COM0031 3 COM0032 1 2 1 COM0033 3 1 COM0034 2 1 1 COM0037 1 2 Table 1065 LED descriptions for COM0001 COM0014 LED Connector Description X1 X1 X1 LAN link status and activity RJ 45 and LC RX1 X5 COM2 2 wire 4 wire receiving activity TX1 X5 COM2 2 wire 4 wire transmitting activity RX2 X5 COM1 2 wire receiving act...

Page 1180: ...gnal activity Table 1067 LED descriptions for COM0031 COM0034 and COM0037 LED Connector Description X1 X1 X1 LAN1 link status and activity X2 X2 X2 LAN2 link status and activity X3 X3 X3 LAN3 link status and activity RX X9 COM1 fiber optic receiving activity TX X9 COM1 fiber optic transmitting activity Table 1068 LED descriptions for COM0035 and COM0036 LED Connector Description X1 X1 X1 LAN link ...

Page 1181: ...2 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors Group Jumper connection Description Notes X4 1 2 A bias enabled COM2 2 wire connection 2 3 A bias disabled X5 1 2 B bias enabled 2 3 B bias disabled X6 1 2 Bus termination ena bled 2 3 Bus termination disa bled Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H IED physical connections 620 series Technical Manual 1181 ...

Page 1182: ...o biasing as default Table 1070 4 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM2 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X4 1 2 A bias enabled COM2 4 wire TX channel 2 3 A bias disabled X5 1 2 B bias enabled 2 3 B bias disabled 1 X6 1 2 Bus termination ena bled 2 3 Bus termination disa bled 1 X7 1 2 B bias enabled COM2 4 wire RX channel 2 3 B bias disabled 1 X8 1 2 A bias enabled 2 3 A bias disabled 1 ...

Page 1183: ...alled COM2 The fiber optic ST connection uses the COM1 port Table 1071 EIA 485 connections for COM0001 COM0014 Pin 2 wire mode 4 wire mode 10 COM1 A COM2 Rx 9 B Rx 8 COM2 A Tx 7 B Tx 6 AGND isolated ground 5 IRIG B 4 IRIG B 3 2 GNDC case via capacitor 1 GND case 13 4 7 2 COM0023 jumper locations and connections The optional communication module supports EIA 232 EIA 485 serial communication X6 conn...

Page 1184: ... 20 1 2 3 1 2 3 X 17 X 18 X 16 X15 X14 X13 1 2 3 X24 1 2 3 X3 X25 1 2 3 5 4 3 2 1 X 27 X 28 3 2 1 Figure 632 Jumper connections on communication module COM0023 revisions A F IED physical connections 1MRS757644 H 1184 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1185: ...nection type can be either EIA 232 or EIA 485 Type is selected by setting jumpers X19 X20 X21 and X26 The jumpers are set to EIA 232 by default Table 1073 EIA 232 and EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM1 Group Jumper connection Description X19 1 2 2 3 EIA 485 EIA 232 X20 1 2 2 3 EIA 485 EIA 232 Table continues on the next page 1MRS757644 H IED physical connections 620 series Technical Manual 1185 ...

Page 1186: ... jumper connectors for COM1 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X5 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled 1 COM1 Rear connector X6 2 wire connection X6 1 2 2 3 B bias enabled B bias disabled 1 X7 1 2 2 3 Bus termination ena bled Bus termination disa bled 1 Table 1075 4 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM1 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X5 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled ...

Page 1187: ...ptical ST Table 1077 2 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM2 Group Jumper connection Description X13 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled X14 1 2 2 3 B bias enabled B bias disabled X15 1 2 2 3 Bus termination enabled Bus termination disabled Table 1078 4 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM2 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X13 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled COM2 4 wire TX c...

Page 1188: ... 1 2 2 3 Star topology Loop topology X24 1 2 2 3 Idle state Light on Idle state Light off Table 1080 EIA 232 connections for COM0023 X6 Pin EIA 232 1 DCD 2 RxD 3 TxD 4 DTR 5 AGND 6 7 RTS 8 CTS Table 1081 EIA 485 connections for COM0023 X6 Pin 2 wire mode 4 wire mode 1 Rx 6 Rx 7 B Tx 8 A Tx Table 1082 EIA 485 connections for COM0023 X5 Pin 2 wire mode 4 wire mode 9 Rx 8 Rx 7 A Tx Table continues on...

Page 1189: ...cations and connections The optional communication modules include support for optical ST serial communication X9 connector The fiber optic ST connection uses the COM1 port X15 X24 3 2 1 3 2 1 Figure 634 Jumper connections on communication module COM0032 1MRS757644 H IED physical connections 620 series Technical Manual 1189 ...

Page 1190: ...1 X15 3 X24 1 2 3 2 Figure 635 Jumper connections on communication module COM0033 IED physical connections 1MRS757644 H 1190 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1191: ...ation module COM0034 Table 1083 X9 Optical ST jumper connectors Group Jumper connection Description X15 1 2 2 3 Star topology Loop topology X24 1 2 2 3 Idle state Light on Idle state Light off 1MRS757644 H IED physical connections 620 series Technical Manual 1191 ...

Page 1192: ...4 Dimensions Description Value Width Frame 262 2 mm Case 246 mm Height Frame 177 mm 4U Case 160 mm Depth 201 mm Weight Complete protection relay max 5 5 kg Plug in unit only max 3 0 kg Technical data 1MRS757644 H 1192 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1193: ...perating condition DC 18 0 W nominal 1 22 5 W max 2 AC 19 0 W nominal 1 23 0 W max 2 DC 18 5 W nominal 1 22 5 W max 2 Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 15 of the DC value at frequency of 100 Hz Fuse type T4A 250 V 1 During the power consumption measurement the relay is powered at rated auxiliary energizing voltage and the energizing quantities are energized without any binary output being act...

Page 1194: ... 1 s 100 A 500 A Dynamic current withstand Half wave value 250 A 1250 A Input impedance 100 mΩ 20 mΩ Voltage inputs Rated voltage 60 210 V AC Voltage withstand Continuous 240 V AC For 10 s 360 V AC Burden at rated voltage 0 05 VA 1 Ordering option for residual current input 2 Not available for RET620 3 Residual current and or phase current Technical data 1MRS757644 H 1194 620 series Technical Manu...

Page 1195: ...t voltage 75 mV 9000 mV 1 Continuous voltage withstand 125 V Input impedance at 50 60Hz 2 MΩ Voltage sensor input Rated secondary voltage 346 mV 2339 mV 4 Continuous voltage withstand 50 V Input impedance at 50 60Hz 2 MΩ 1 Equals the current range of 40 4000 A with 80A 3mV Hz Rogowski 2 Depending on the used nominal current hardware gain 3 Covers 6 kV 30 kV sensors with division ratio of 10 000 1 ...

Page 1196: ... default is 16 V to ensure the binary inputs operation regardless of the auxiliary voltage used 24 48 60 110 125 220 or 250 V DC However the default value is not optimal for the higher auxiliary voltages The binary input threshold voltage should be set as high as possible to prevent any inadvertent activation of the binary inputs due to possible external disturbances At the same time the threshold...

Page 1197: ...R 0 00427 Supported resistance range 0 2 kΩ Maximum lead resistance three wire measurement 25 Ω per lead Isolation 2 kV inputs to protective earth Response time 4 s RTD resistance sensing cur rent Maximum 0 33 mA rms Operation accuracy Resistance Temperature 2 0 or 1 Ω 1 C 10 Ω copper 2 C mA inputs Supported current range 0 20 mA Current input impedance 44 Ω 0 1 Operation accuracy 0 5 or 0 01 mA 1...

Page 1198: ...arry for 0 5 s 30 A Breaking capacity when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms 1 A 0 25 A 0 15 A Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC DC 1 X100 SO1 X105 SO1 SO2 when any of the protection relays is equipped with BIO0005 X110 SO1 SO2 when REF620 or RET620 is equipped with BIO0005 X115 SO1 SO2 when REF620 or REM620 is equipped with BIO0005 Technical data 1MRS757644 H 1198 620 series Techni...

Page 1199: ...ty when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms 1 A 0 25 A 0 15 A Minimum contact load 10 mA at 5 V AC DC 1 X100 IRF SO2 X105 SO3 SO4 when any of the protection relays is equipped with BIO0005 X110 SO3 SO4 when REF620 or RET620 is equipped with BIO0005 X115 SO3 SO4 when REF620 or REM620 is equipped with BIO0005 X130 SO1 SO2 when RET620 is equipped with RTD0002 1MRS757644 H Technical data 620 s...

Page 1200: ...30 A Breaking capacity when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms at 48 110 220 V DC two contacts connected in a series 5 A 3 A 1 A Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC DC Trip circuit monitoring TCS Control voltage range 20 250 V AC DC Current drain through the monitoring cir cuit 1 5 mA Minimum voltage over the TCS contact 20 V AC DC 15 20 V 2 PSM0003 PO3 PSM0004 PO3 PSM0003 PO4 and PSM0...

Page 1201: ...250 V AC DC Continuous contact carry 5 A Make and carry for 3 0 s 15 A Make and carry for 0 5 s 30 A Breaking capacity when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms at 48 110 220 V DC two contacts connected in series 1 A 0 25 A 0 15 A Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC DC 1 X130 SO3 of RET620 equipped with RTD0002 1MRS757644 H Technical data 620 series Technical Manual 1201 ...

Page 1202: ...ion Value Rated voltage 250 V AC DC Continuous contact carry 8 A Make and carry for 3 0 s 15 A Make and carry for 0 5 s 30 A Breaking capacity when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms at 48 110 220 V DC 5 A 3 A 1 A Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC DC Technical data 1MRS757644 H 1202 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1203: ...e and carry for 3 0 s 15 A Make and carry for 0 5 s 30 A Breaking capacity when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms at 48 110 220 V DC 5 A 3 A 1 A Operate time 1 ms Reset 20 ms resistive load 1 X105 HSO1 HSO2 HSO3 when any of the protection relays is equipped with BIO0007 1MRS757644 H Technical data 620 series Technical Manual 1203 ...

Page 1204: ...Data transfer rate Front TCP IP protocol Standard Ethernet CAT 5 cable with RJ 45 con nector 10 MBits s Rear TCP IP protocol Shielded twisted pair CAT 5e cable with RJ 45 connector or fiber optic cable with LC connector 100 MBits s Technical data 1MRS757644 H 1204 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1205: ...ounter connector Weidmüller BL 3 5 10 180F AU OR BEDR or 9 pin counter connector Weidmüller BL 3 5 9 180F AU OR BEDR 1 Serial port X16 9 pin D sub connector DE 9 Serial port X12 Optical ST connector 1 Depending on the optional communication module 1MRS757644 H Technical data 620 series Technical Manual 1205 ...

Page 1206: ...M 62 5 125 or 50 125 μm glass fiber core 1300 nm 2 km 8 dB ST MM 62 5 125 or 50 125 μm glass fiber core 820 900 nm 1 km 11 dB 1 Maximum length depends on the cable attenuation and quality the amount of splices and connectors in the path 2 Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together Technical data 1MRS757644 H 1206 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1207: ...e IRIG time code format B004 B005 1 Isolation 500V 1 min Modulation Unmodulated Logic level 5 V TTL Current consumption 4 mA Power consumption 20 mW 1 According to the 200 04 IRIG standard 1MRS757644 H Technical data 620 series Technical Manual 1207 ...

Page 1208: ...n Description Value Fiber optic cable including lens 1 5 m 3 0 m or 5 0 m Normal service temperature range of the lens 40 100 C Maximum service temperature range of the lens max 1 h 140 C Minimum permissible bending radius of the connection fiber 100 mm Technical data 1MRS757644 H 1208 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1209: ... flush mounted protection relay Table 1102 Degree of protection of flush mounted protection relay Description Value Front side IP 54 Rear side connection terminals IP 20 1MRS757644 H Technical data 620 series Technical Manual 1209 ...

Page 1210: ...6 h 3 4 Relative humidity 93 non condensing Atmospheric pressure 86 106 kPa Altitude Up to 2000 m Transport and storage temperature range 40 85 C 3 Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance outside the temperature range of 25 55 C 4 For relays with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is 70 C Technical data 1MRS757644 H 1210 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1211: ...n mode 2 5 kV Electrostatic discharge test IEC 61000 4 2 IEC 60255 26 IEEE C37 90 3 2001 Contact discharge 8 kV Air discharge 15 kV Radio frequency interference test 10 V rms f 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 IEC 60255 26 class III 10 V m rms f 80 2700 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 IEC 60255 26 class III 10 V m f 900 MHz ENV 50204 IEC 60255 26 class III Fast transient disturbance test IEC 61000 4 4 IEC 60255 26 ...

Page 1212: ...ms IEC 61000 4 11 Power frequency immunity test Binary inputs only IEC 61000 4 16 IEC 60255 26 class A Common mode 300 V rms Differential mode 150 V rms Conducted common mode disturbances 15 Hz 150 kHz Test level 3 10 1 10 V rms IEC 61000 4 16 Emission tests EN 55011 class A IEC 60255 26 CISPR 11 CISPR 12 Conducted 0 15 0 50 MHz 79 dB μV quasi peak 66 dB μV average 0 5 30 MHz 73 dB μV quasi peak 6...

Page 1213: ...eference 1 3 GHz 76 dB μV m peak 56 dB μV m average measured at 3 m distance 3 6 GHz 80 dB μV m peak 60 dB μV m average measured at 3 m distance 1MRS757644 H Protection relay and functionality tests 620 series Technical Manual 1213 ...

Page 1214: ...r inputs of SIM0005 IEC 61869 6 Impulse voltage test 5 kV 1 2 50 μs 0 5 J 1 kV 1 2 50 μs 0 5 J communication IEC 60255 27 1 5 kV 1 2 50 µs 0 5 J sensor inputs of SIM0005 IEC 61869 6 Insulation resistance measurements 100 M Ω 500 V DC IEC 60255 27 Protective bonding resistance 0 1 Ω 4 A 60 s IEC 60255 27 Protection relay and functionality tests 1MRS757644 H 1214 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1215: ...ation tests sinusoidal Class 2 IEC 60068 2 6 test Fc IEC 60255 21 1 Shock and bump test Class 2 IEC 60068 2 27 test Ea shock IEC 60068 2 29 test Eb bump IEC 60255 21 2 Seismic test Class 2 IEC 60255 21 3 1MRS757644 H Protection relay and functionality tests 620 series Technical Manual 1215 ...

Page 1216: ...0068 2 1 Damp heat test 6 cycles 12 h 12 h at 25 C 55 C humidity 93 IEC 60068 2 30 Change of temperature test 5 cycles 3 h 3 h at 25 C 55 C IEC60068 2 14 Storage test 96 h at 40 C 96 h at 85 C IEC 60068 2 1 IEC 60068 2 2 5 For relays with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is 70 C Protection relay and functionality tests 1MRS757644 H 1216 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1217: ...ct safety Table 1108 Product safety Description Reference LV directive 2014 35 EU Standard EN BS EN 60255 27 EN BS EN 60255 1 1MRS757644 H Protection relay and functionality tests 620 series Technical Manual 1217 ...

Page 1218: ... 6 EMC compliance Table 1109 EMC compliance Description Reference EMC directive 2014 30 EU Standard EN BS EN 60255 26 Protection relay and functionality tests 1MRS757644 H 1218 620 series Technical Manual ...

Page 1219: ...ty Regulations 2016 The Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Elec tronic Equipment Regulations 2012 BS EN 60255 1 BS EN 60255 26 BS EN 60255 27 BS EN 61000 6 2 BS EN 61000 6 4 IEC IEC 60255 1 IEC 60255 26 IEC 60255 27 IEC 61000 6 2 IEC 61000 6 4 IEC 61850 IEC 61869 6 UL listed c UL us UL 508 CSA C22 2 No 14 18 Industrial Control Equipment IEEE C37 90 IEEE C37 90...

Page 1220: ... cable type designed for high signal integrity CAT 5e An enhanced version of CAT 5 that adds specifications for far end cross talk CBB Cycle building block COMTRADE Common format for transient data exchange for power systems Defined by the IEEE Standard CPU Central processing unit CT Current transformer CTS Clear to send DAN Doubly attached node DC 1 Direct current 2 Disconnector 3 Double command ...

Page 1221: ...3 1 Communication standard for protective equipment 2 A serial master slave protocol for point to point communication IEC 61850 International standard for substation communication and modeling IEC 61850 8 1 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850 standard series IEC 61850 9 2 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850 standard series IEC 61850 9 2 LE Lite Edition of IEC 61850 9 2 offe...

Page 1222: ...veform between its maximum positive value and its maximum negative value 2 A measurement principle where the measurement quantity is made by calculating the average from the positive and negative peak values without including the DC component The peak to peak mode allows considerable CT saturation without impairing the performance of the operation Peak to peak with peak back up A measurement princ...

Page 1223: ...r system In stead of representing each of three phases with a separate line or termi nal only one conductor is represented SMT Signal Matrix tool in PCM600 SMV Sampled measured values SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SOF Status of fault SOTF Switch onto fault ST Connector type for glass fiber cable SW Software TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCS Trip circuit supervision TLV...

Page 1224: ...voltage www abb com relion www abb com substationautomation ABB Distribution Solutions Digital Substation Products P O Box 699 FI 65101 VAASA Finland Phone 358 10 22 11 1MRS757644 H Copyright 2022 ABB All rights reserved ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for Relion 620 Series

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands

ABB Relion 620 Series, Technical Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for Relion 620 Series

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands